Skidata / Sentry Original Contract — Santa Monica City Council, September 30, 2025

10413
3/30/2017

Exhibit E
Sentry’s Statement of Work Proposal

1 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

1. Cover Letter for City of Santa Monica PARCS Upgrade
Thank you for the opportunity to submit this comprehensive proposal from the Sentry SKIDATA Group (“Sentry”) to deliver a world-class PARCS system for the City of Santa Monica (“COSM”).

Sentry is at the forefront in implementing state of the art parking enhancements throughout the United States. In fact, our specific niche is managing the implementation and service of large scale, automated systems in demanding, multi-location, continuously operating environments. As such, Sentry has built an impressive resume of references, supporting more than 400 sites, that can further assure COSM that Sentry clearly understands how to deliver these projects well. The Sentry technical and management team selected for this project are specialists, who have local experience gained on projects of similar size and scope.

Furthermore, Sentry’s support infrastructure and post install service reputation is unparalleled; this is enabled through the investments we continue to make in establishing, developing, and building the best support structure in the industry, lessons learnt from more than 30 years in business.

In this proposal we highlight and detail how Sentry is a unique partner for COSM:

1. As the most technically astute and financially prudent choice – we are owned by the PARCS manufacturer receiving full, direct and fast tracked support;

2. Being uniquely capable of installing a platform that truly enables the COSM’s ambition for many years to come – we know how to take the platform we deliver and extend its capability over the life of the system, as we have done for many networked, multi-garage installations;

3. Sentry is capable of extending our scope further than others, to offer true turnkey; implementation and mitigate delivery risk for COSM – with dedicated resourcing that does not draw from service, and professional project management, ensure projects are designed and delivered to be on time and on budget with no surprises;

4. SKIDATA solutions are mature, internationally market proven and importantly have a long history of delivering for clients, not start-ups offering prototypes or businesses with no infrastructure returning from bankruptcy with a cheaper price. For the best value, greater compliance out of the box and long term success can only be assured with Sentry;

5. It is only Sentry that is able to offer proven promotional integrations and full compliance with PCI, EMV compliance, we understand it having lead the market with SKIDATA for many years, competitors that do not meet current PA-DSS requirements (3.1), introduce unnecessary risk.

Should there be any aspect of our proposal which needs further clarification, or if any reason should arise which would preclude COSM from selecting Sentry for this, please contact our team, and we would value the opportunity to specifically address any concerns in order to move forward together.

With kind regards,
Mike Brill
[email protected]
(818) 919-3290
"Sentry is a specialist
systems integrator that
offers world-class
customer help and
innovations to optimize
revenue for our
customers over the long
term."
2 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
City of Santa Monica
SKIDATA PARCS Upgrade
Statement of Work Proposal
Version: 1
Date: July 22, 2016
3 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

CONTENTS

1. Cover Letter for City of Santa Monica PARCS Upgrade .................................................................1

2. Qualifications and References.......................................................................................................4

3. Project Manager’s resume listing qualifications and experience...................................................18

4. Data sheets for primary equipment in project. ............................................................................23

5. Detailed project schedule. ..........................................................................................................48

6. Exceptions and Substitutions ......................................................................................................58

6. Detailed price sheet with itemized costs .....................................................................................61

7. Detailed price list for on-going fees or subscription based services...............................................61

13. List manufacturer of each primary component of system.............................................................61

14. Recommended spare parts list w/pricing. ...................................................................................61

8. Warranty/Extended Warranty/Service Agreement. .....................................................................62

9. Report samples...........................................................................................................................63

10. Sample training program. ...........................................................................................................65

11. Sample punch list. ......................................................................................................................69

12. List of Sub-Contractors................................................................................................................70

15. List of Attachments ....................................................................................................................71 4 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
IMPORTANT NOTE: The following response format follows the numbers in F. Response Format and includes the required items numbers as the SECTION 3 – RFP SPECIFICATIONS 1. Proposal Submittals.

2. Qualifications and References.

D. Financial Statements
Please refer to attached documents 1. Financials.

F. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. In continuous operations for previous five years.

Sentry presents a comprehensive and considered proposal that will provide a world leading Parking Access and Revenue Control System (PARCS) upgrade for COSM.  Sentry is SKIDATA’s largest subsidiary worldwide and a specialist systems integrator with more than 30 years of PARCS experience and more than 400 customer sites.  SKIDATA is the leading international PARCS provider with more than 10,000 installations, helping clients optimize performance and maximize profits.

In California, the Sentry team has implemented and continues to service 250+ PARCS systems, supporting parking operations at many of the highest profile event destination, commercial and shopping facilities. We are strongest in service, contract delivery and multi-site operations networking.

The Sentry niche is the implementation and servicing of large scale, automated parking systems in demanding, continuously operating environments exactly like those of the COSM. We high-caliber, dedicated project manager’s with many years PARCS experience to deliver multi-site projects all the time – many included in our references and one of the latest is 9 Casino hotel locations at MGM Las Vegas in double quick time.

Sentry has built an impressive resume of references that can attest to how well these projects are delivered and the remarkable outcomes that follow. Sentry has been in business since 1979 (37 years) and employs more than 150 PARCS professionals
5 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

2. Primary components installed in three or more parking facilities of similar size and complexity.

The following Three locations use the SKIDATA Parking.logic PARCS across multiple garage locations.

Reference 1
Company Name CITY OF BEVERLY HILLS
Company Address 55 North Rexford Drive, Beverly Hills, California, 90210 Contact Name Chad Lynn
Telephone Number 310 288 2807
Email Address of Contact [email protected]
Start and End Dates of Project 2012 - Ongoing
Brief Description of Project 14 City owned parking Structures • 73 Lanes
• 73 Barrier Gates
• 16 Cash/Credit Pay on Foot
• 22 Credit Only Pay on Foot
• AVI Readers
Brief Description of Key
Accomplishments
• SENTRY SKIDATA GROUP installed the 14 parking structures using a phased installation approach. Sentry has completed the SKIDATA Installation in all parking Structures which are connected via the city’s fiber optic network. Each parking structure is unique. Some parking structures employ Pay on Foot technology to fully automate the facility while others employ booth cashiering in addition to express exit lanes. • SENTRY SKIDATA GROUP installed the 14 parking structures using a phased installation approach. Sentry has completed the SKIDATA Installation in all parking Structures which are connected via the city’s fiber optic network. Each parking structure is unique. Some parking structures employ Pay on Foot technology to fully automate the facility. Some parking structures employ booth cashiering and express exit lanes. 6 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Reference 2
Company Name COUNTY OF ORANGE
Company Address 300 East Chapman Avenue in Orange California 92866 Contact Name Ron Kozma
Telephone Number (714) 667-9618
Email Address of Contact [email protected]
Start and End Dates of Project 2011 - Ongoing
Brief Description of Project 12 County owned parking Structures • 56 Lanes
• 56 Barrier Gates
• 7 Cash/Credit Pay on Foot
• 1 Credit Only Pay on Foot
Brief Description of Key
Accomplishments
• Orange County is the home of a wide range of tourist attractions. Orange County boasts a thriving business economy and a well-educated work force.

The County of Orange is a regional service provider and planning agency whose core businesses include public safety, public health, environmental protection, regional planning, public assistance, social services and aviation. • SENTRY SKIDATA GROUP installed 56 lanes and 8 Pay on Foots these 12 parking structures all located throughout the county. All parking garages are connected via secure wireless Ethernet. The project and deployment is similar to the City of Beverly Hills.
7 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Reference 3
Company Name JOHN WAYNE AIRPORT
Company Address 3160 Airport Way Costa Mesa, CA 92626
Contact Name Tim Harris
Telephone Number (949) 252-5246
Email Address of Contact [email protected]
Start and End Dates of Project 2012 - Ongoing
Brief Description of Project • 57 Lanes
• 57 Barrier Gates
• License Plate Recognition (LPR)
• Automated Valet
Brief Description of Key
Accomplishments
• John Wayne Airport It is located approximately 35 miles south of Los Angeles, between the cities of Costa Mesa, Irvine, and Newport Beach. The service area includes more than three million people within the 34 cities and unincorporated areas of Orange County. In 2014, more than nine million passengers were served.
• JWA converted to SKIDATA in 2011/2012. The Exits were changed from multiple booths to 1 booth per exit plaza. 57 lanes, 17 visitors’ entry lanes, 10 attended booths, 16 visitors unattended exit column lanes, 2 CC in/out with LPR integration. Automated Valet Electronic Count Signage with Real Time updates.
8 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
G. Installer Qualifications:

1. Licensed in California.

Sentry Control Systems LLC, California Contractor License No.100 7233

2. Continuously worked with equipment manufacturer, including providing installations and maintenance, for minimum of three years.

Sentry has worked with SKIDATA A.G. for more than a decade.

3. Approved in writing by PARCS manufacturer(s).

SKIDATA A.G. is the majority owner of Sentry Control Systems LLC. http://www.sentrycontrol.com/about-skidata
Hugo Rohner (CEO of SKIDATA A.G.) is an officer of Sentry Control Systems LLC.

The team we propose for the project is highly
experienced in designing, implementing, and
servicing PARCS in large scale, dynamic
environments, comprising industry experts
located in Los Angeles, California.

Since Sentry’s customer listing is extensive,
we have chosen to represent our broad local
capabilities visually; we can provide
supplemental information, including
addresses and contacts for every customer
represented on this map.

Each of the projects represented
on this map includes the core SKIDATA
Parking.Logic application we propose for the
PARCS at COSM.

The map to the right represents projects sold
by Sentry in excess of $100,000 since January
2011. The illustration shows, for example, that
there have been 74 in the Los Angeles area.

Sentry has more than 400 installations in the United State alone, which does not include the hundreds of other locations installed by SKIDATA authorized distributors. Both SKIDATA and Sentry are profitable and the breadth of our local customer sites means new customers such as the COSM enjoy all the investments and expertise gained from this history. In addition, Sentry has developed a remarkable internal culture founded on teamwork and customer outcomes, supported by continual professional development that empowers individuals to deliver; as a result, Sentry has as large core of long-term employees, something that no other businesses in our industry has, and just one of the reasons we continue to attract the very best talent. 9 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

4. Documentation of manufacturer’s installation training within previous two years.

Product Quality Assurance
All SKIDATA subsidiaries and partners are certified through ongoing training and each individual has training certification. As we are manufacturer owned, Training for the technical team is run in-house with courses delivered by Stefan Perner and registered on an electronic portal, a sample report of recent activity is shown as an example of the training delivered over the previous two years. Each technical employee attended the sessions which are provided multiple times to allow service to continue.

STEFAN PERNER – 10 years PARCS experience
Product Manager
Stefan has been with Sentry since 2007. As a native of Austria, Stefan worked with SKIDATA headquarters prior to joining Sentry. With 15+ years of parking experience, Stefan played an integral role in establishing the North American subsidiary, SKIDATA INC. He holds degrees in industrial and mechanical engineering from a Hoehre Technische Lehranstallt in Salzburg, Austria. Stefan is the lead technical consultant for the SKIDATA family of products which the COSM may use in this upgrade. Stefan’s team leadsthe training department which will deliver the operational, management and technical assistance to allow COSM to thrive.

SESSION SCHEDULE
Commend Basic for SKIDATA part1 – WC 7/20/2016 6:30
Commend Basic for SKIDATA part1 – WC 7/6/2016 6:30
Basic Relay Logic and Wiring WC 6/29/2016 6:30
What’s NEW in Parking.Logic V9 6/28/2016 10:00
Basic Relay Logic and Wiring WC 6/22/2016 6:30
Basic Relay Logic and Wiring WC 6/15/2016 6:30
Basic Relay Logic and Wiring WC 6/8/2016 6:30
INDECT Technician TRAINING - WC 3 DAY 5/31/2016 8:30
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 5/16/2016 9:00
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 5/11/2016 10:00
Commend Basic for SKIDATA part1 – WC 5/11/2016 6:30
What’s NEW in Parking.Logic V9 5/10/2016 9:00
What’s NEW in Parking.Logic V9 5/5/2016 13:30
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 5/5/2016 8:00
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 5/4/2016 11:00
Folding Gate arm (Barrier 98) Repair and Service - WC 5/4/2016 6:30 Folding Gate arm (Barrier 98) Repair and Service - WC 4/27/2016 6:30 Configuring Commend 4/19/2016 14:00
What’s NEW in Parking.Logic V9 4/18/2016 7:30
Commend Basic for SKIDATA part1 – WC 4/13/2016 6:30
EMV- Payment Express Terminal in Parking.Logic v8 4/12/2016 7:00 SENTRY SKIDATA New Hire Overview Training 4/4/2016 9:00 SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 3/31/2016 8:30
Commend Basic for SKIDATA part1 – WC 3/30/2016 6:30
10 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
INDECT Sales and Project TRAINING 3/24/2016 9:00
SKIDATA Parking.Logic Cashier Overview WC 3/23/2016 10:00 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - Installation/Basic configuration 4-DAY WC 3/15/2016 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - System overview/Operation WC 3/14/2016 8:30 SKIDATA Parking.Logic Cashier Overview 2/26/2016 10:00
POW Session v25 GUI 2/25/2016 6:45
POW Session Column 2/24/2016 6:30
SKIDATA Car Access - Refresher 2DAY WC 2/23/2016 8:30
POW Session Barrier Gate 2/23/2016 6:45
XO Portal Learning Session 2/17/2016 9:00
SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - Installation/Basic configuration 4-DAY WC 2/16/2016 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - System overview/Operation WC 2/15/2016 8:30 Parking.Logic and Interface Training for Westfield LAB 2/9/2016 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - Installation/Basic configuration 4-DAY WC 2/2/2016 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - System overview/Operation WC 2/1/2016 8:30 SKIDATA Parking.Logic Cashier Overview WC 1/29/2016 10:00 SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 1/19/2016 10:00
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 12/22/2015 8:00
SKIDATA Car Access - Refresher 2DAY 12/16/2015 8:30
SKIDATA Car Access -Level 1 Installation/Basic configuration 5-DAY 12/7/2015 9:00 SKIDATA Parking.Logic Cashier Overview 12/3/2015 9:00
SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 11/18/2015 10:15
SKIDATA Parking.Logic Cashier Overview 11/16/2015 10:00 SKIDATA Car Access - Commissioning 2DAY 11/10/2015 8:30 Sentry SKIDATA Car Access - System overview/Operation 11/10/2015 8:00 Certification - Car Access - "System Engineer" 11/4/2015 9:30 SKIDATA Members Platform Navigation 11/2/2015 10:00
SKIDATA Certified Trainer 10/26/2015 9:00
SENTRY SKIDATA New Hire Training 10/21/2015 9:30
SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - V8 and New Hardware Refresher 2DAY 10/6/2015 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - Installation/Basic configuration 4-DAY 9/15/2015 8:30 SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - System overview/Operation 9/14/2015 9:00 SENTRY SKIDATA New Hire Training 9/11/2015 9:00
EMV- Six Terminal in Parking.Logic v8 8/28/2015 8:00
SKIDATA Validation Creation and Reporting 8/19 8/19/2015 9:00 SKIDATA Keycard Creation and Articles 8/6/2015 9:00
SENTRY SKIDATA Car Access - V8 and New Hardware - sales 8/5/2015 9:00 SKIDATA Validation Creation and Reporting 8/5/2015 9:00 SENTRY SKIDATA New Hire Training 8/3/2015 10:30
E-Ticketing in Parking.Logic basic overview 7/23/2015 7:30 SENTRY SKIDATA New Hire Training 7/21/2015 10:30
Parking.Logic Review R21- V8 7/14/2015 8:00
JWA PlateTech 2.0 tech and troubleshooting JWA 6/25/2015 8:30 11 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

5. Proven ability to provide service and support after installation, meeting minimum requirements as specified herein.

Sentry’s culture fosters a business environment based upon high ethical standards and integrity. These characteristics flow through the entire organization and directly to the relationships Sentry has with its customers. Sentry strives to ensure its clients are successful, and it knows the best way to achieve this is by continually delivering on commitments in an ethical manner and with the highest degree of integrity.

SPIRIT OF SUPERIOR STRONG SETTING

PASSION RELIABILITY COMMITMENT TRENDS
For SKIDATA, core values are not descriptions of the work Sentry does or strategies to accomplish business success, these values underlie the work ethic of the entire Sentry team, how team members interact with each other, and are the focus points in the choices we make every day.

In practicing business with the highest ethical standards, Sentry strives to create customers for life. Sentry knows that reputation is the life-blood of success for a small business.

Many customers have upgraded again and again with Sentry —the ultimate compliment in this industry.

INVESTMENT IN LONG STANDING RELATIONSHIPS
What better way to get a feel for the validity and success of a company than learning what their current customers say about the service they receive:
“Thank you very much, and we appreciate the prompt manner you handle our calls for help.” - Bethesda Towers
“Everyone on your team is always very responsive, detailed, and efficient solution providers’—thank you for helping Impark achieve success.” -Impark Parking For many equipment suppliers, once they implement and install a parking control system, they are done. Sentry is never done. The support structure we have developed over 30 years allows Sentry’s clients to have the assurance that Sentry will always be there, ready to provide additional services, to help with any challenge in software, transactions, maintenance, and repair—for as long as COSM are in Parking.

Sentry’s focus isn't just to install equipment—our mission is to match the best solutions with the best service possible to enable your business to success and continue to outshine your peers. The outcome is the maximum return on an investment from the solution with a support life of more than 10 years.

Sentry’s warranty services ensure operational capacity and system uptime is maximized. Sentry shall warranty all parts, materials, and workmanship following Final System Acceptance or, following the first day of beneficial use.
12 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Sentry established its support standards over three decades ago and continues refining its methods. This continual commitment to servicing and helping customers separates Sentry from its competition.

Sentry’s dedicated service team is a salient characteristic which sets Sentry apart as an innovator in the industry.

It is rare—if not impossible—to find another local organization anywhere in the United States with the critical mass to employ dedicated teams for service.

Sentry’s field service technicians are comprised of a team of factory certified specialists, trained on the details of the PARCS systems, ready to respond at a moment’s notice. Each technician’s vehicle is stocked with an inventory of spare parts, consumables, and tools needed to respond effectively to virtually all types of service calls. Even then, no technician operates alone—each is supported by an extensive network of service professionals on the team, with a variety of expertise. Sentry has team members in place to provide remote service, either over the phone and/or via a network connection, to help expedite resolutions to customers’ technical requests.

Sentry is likely to have very nearby technicians delivering preventative maintenance and ready to act for immediate resolution of issues. All service requests are initially received by the coordinator/dispatcher—the service department has the ability to remotely service, troubleshoot, and triage any and all service requests. The remote service assistance will either resolve the issue, or, it will dispatch the call to the nearest available field technician. This process ensures an initial triage takes place, so that the proper personnel with the correct parts respond promptly to the service request. In addition to the locally available support resources, Sentry has a direct line with the manufacturer (unlike distributors who typically will not), and is therefore able to include them on the remote service session, as well.

Sentry has recently upgraded the way we run our ServiceDepartment. Our first-time fix rate is unmatched – historically over 80% with very few requiring Level 2 support elevation. We scan in every part that enters our warehouse or goes on a technician's truck. By tracking each technician's vehicle via GPS, when a service call comes in, Sentry knows in real time where technicians are located, what qualifications they have and what parts are on their truck. This gives our customer the right person for fix with the correct part in the least amount of time. This eliminates one trip to diagnose and another trip to get the correct part for the job. If the problem is software related Sentry can remotely access systems to fix that problem without having to send someone onsite. This is just an everyday service that Sentry provides for the life of your equipment.

For remote diagnostics and support, Sentry can operate tools which monitor the network and report back any chances in condition, these condition changes can be sent as alerts and allows the diagnosis and response to be underway immediately, particularly where the condition requires a fix involving the COSM or one of the COSM’s third party contractors. Alerts can be reported and are available pending the system design deployed by COSM. 13 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Technology = Efficiency and Accuracy
Sentry’s Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system assists with streamlining processes, and ensuring our customers’ needs are escalated efficiently and effectively. This system allows us to gain real-time information regarding the service request, and enables Sentry’s service department to coordinate a faster response and help our customers see an accelerated
resolution. With the usage of this ERP system, Sentry is able to:
 View inventory on hand, and resupply field personnel
 Manage inventory of parts and promptly resupply
 Maintain serialized inventory for chain of custody, life of part, warranty purposes, etc.
 Gather data analytics for continued improvement
 View detailed reports on requests and likely resolutions  Provide detailed Service Level Agreement reporting
This is assisted by two concepts that are implemented in the current generation of SKIDATA equipment (1) many of the devices can be serviced without requiring special tools to simplify restoration and (2) common components between the devices, which allows spares to be shared reducing the compliment of spares required and extending the life of systems.

SERVICE HIGHLIGHT: COMPONENT REPAIRS
By using the unique design of SKIDATA components, Sentry is able to quickly remove, replace, repair and restore components, minimizing the need to entirely procure new components – significantly extending the value of the initial investment.

Sentry maintains $4M in parts at our facility in Los Angeles, including components and complete units. This is vital in a scenario where full units need to be replaced (i.e. vehicle incident) and this can be delivered immediately following the preceding responsibilities of electrical and cabling support.

Advanced Part’s Replacement Strategy
Sentry is able to offer an advanced part replacement program that reduces downtime of equipment and lost revenue when technical issues arise—this means Sentry can provide a “support part”, get you back up and running and then deal with the repair. Most companies simply take the part and send it out for repair and do not address the issue until the part is returned—leading to an accumulation of lost revenue and huge inconvenience to the customer. This service will be available to the COSM.
14 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

RESOLUTION TIMES
Sentry understand the desire and shared responsibility to resolve problems quickly, when compared to other vendors, Sentry is best placed to achieve response KPIs with our local resources, better solution design, investment in the right support structures and a reputation for service. A feature of the SKIDATA solution is that once commissioned, it is a remarkably reliable and flexible software environment—it is uncommon for clients to experience software/network/ integration issues.

Note that blanket SLAs around effective repair times are not practical for this industry given the electrical, traffic management and array of third party sub-systems which contribute to system performance. i.e. responding to an electrical spike which fails a hard-drive, a resolution which may take 4 hours to resolve or a case where a third party network issue impacts the performance of the PARCS system, which may require a number of hours of discovery. In other related maintenance contracts with COSMs and Event destinations, Sentry has negotiated response and resolution KPIs based on categories of specific component faults and would recommend this to the Authority to ensure that service costs are minimized. Sentry will report on all service types and their durations, forming an agenda for the review of service levels provided.

Service shall be available 24 hours a day with calls outside the 9-hour period (8am to 5pm EST) billed according to the Afterhours Rate schedule. With this contract, COSM will receive business service coverage from are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, with a guaranteed response time—both during the one-year warranty period and extended.

Sentry will maintain equipment operational during the warranty period and equipment shall be serviced within the response timeframe, following notification by the COSM.

The two tables below illustrate Service Level Performance Metrics and associated describe the Service Level Priority Definitions. Priority Codes are defined in the below grid, Service Level Priority Definitions.

SERVICE LEVEL PRIORITY DEFINITIONS
Priority Scope Examples
1 Emergency: An entire critical subsystem is down or an entire parking structure is inoperable.
 A structure cannot exit any cars
 The Credit Processing System is down
 An entire entry or exit plaza within a structure is
down
2 Urgent: An important sub-system is
down or a major aspect of a parking
structure is not functional.
 A manned cashier booth is down
 Two or more express lanes are down
simultaneously within a single parking structure
3 Normal: Normal, daily break/fix
activity.
 Coder not functional or POF lock broken
 LPR not functional in a single lane in one structure
 One of the master handsets in the Command
Center is not functional
 An electronic sign at an entry or exit lane is not
functional
4 Scheduled Maintenance or Priority 1 –
3 delayed with permission.
 Routine Scheduled Maintenance activity
 If we have permission for delay on Priority 1–3, the
authorized contact name must be logged
15 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

SERVICE LEVEL
During Operational Hours After Hours
Priority
Code
Remote
Response
On-Site
Response
Repair
Resolution
Remote
Response
On-Site Response Repair Resolution
1 1 hour Within 2 hours
of service call
Same day or
notification is
required
1 hour Within 2 hours of
service call
Same day or
notification as
required
2 2 hours Within 4 hours
of service call
Same day or
notification is
required
2 hours
Within 4 hours of
service call or 8 am,
whichever is last
Same day or
notification as
required
3 4 hours Within 8 hours
of service call
Same day or
notification is
required
10 a.m. the
nearest
business day
Noon the nearest
business day
Same day or
notification as
required
4 As scheduled As scheduled
Same day or
notification is
required
As
scheduled As scheduled
Same day or
notification as
required
16 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

6. Manufacturer approved service center located within two hours driving distance of site.

The team we propose for the project is highly experienced in designing, implementing, and servicing PARCS in large scale, dynamic environments, comprising industry experts located in Los Angeles, California.

The support office for COSM is located at 6611 Odessa Ave, Van Nuys.

The Van Nuys service center features:
 Dedicated training environment with all proposed technology  Spares and components to the value of approximately $4m  12 Full-Time Field Management (Install, Service, IT, Training)  35 Full-Time Field Service and Maintenance Technicians  25 Full-Time Field Installation Personnel
 20 Network Specialists and Remote Service Technicians 17 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
H. References: Provide a minimum of three (3) references of similar size and scope (multiple facilities w/multiple lanes, pay on foot machines in remote locations, etc.).

See response to #2. The following recent installations are available for contact.

Parent Account Locations City Value Period PARCS LPR AVI PGS EMV PA-DSS e:VAL ABM Parking Services Pier 39 Garage San Francisco $ 750,000 Q3-2015 Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Ace Parking Palm Springs COSM Palm Springs $ 500,000 Q1-2016 Yes - - - Yes Yes - AEG LA Convention Center Los Angeles $ 1,000,000 Q1-2015 Yes - Yes - - Yes Yes Bomel Construction Alameda Square Las Vegas $ 1,500,000 Q2-2015 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Clarendon Regency LLC Market Common Arlington $ 750,000 Q2-2014 Yes - - - - Yes Yes Federal Realty Invest. Pike and Rose Block #7 Rockville $ 750,000 Q1-2015 Yes - Yes - - Yes Yes Highwoods Properties Four Orlando Garages Raleigh $ 1,500,000 Q2-2016 Yes - Yes - Yes Yes Yes Holy Cross Hospital Holy Cross Hospital Germantown $ 750,000 Q2-2014 Yes - - Yes - Yes - Hotel Del Coronado Hotel Del Coronado Coronado $ 750,000 Q1-2015 Yes - - - - Yes Yes Irvine Spectrum Spectrum Center Irvine $ 1,500,000 Q2-2014 Yes - - Yes - Yes - LAZ Parking Beverly Connection Los Angeles $ 750,000 Q1-2016 Yes - - Yes Yes Yes Yes LAZ Parking 1 Bank of America Center Charlotte $ 750,000 Q2-2016 Yes Yes - - Yes Yes Yes Macerich Kings Plaza Brooklyn $ 1,500,000 Q2-2014 Yes - - - - Yes Yes Macerich Broadway Plaza Walnut Creek $ 3,500,000 Q3-2014 Yes - - Yes - Yes Yes MGM Resorts MGM Casinos Las Vegas Las Vegas $13,500,000 Q1-2016 Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Park SFO Park SFO San Francisco $ 750,000 Q1-2014 Yes - Yes - - Yes Yes Pier 5 Baltimore Pier 5 Baltimore Baltimore $ 750,000 Q4-2015 Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Pointe Orlando Pointe Orlando Orlando $ 750,000 Q2-2015 Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes SP Plus River Center San Antonio $ 1,000,000 Q3-2015 Yes - - - - Yes Yes SP Plus 555 Capital Mall Sacramento $ 500,000 Q2-2016 Yes - - Yes Yes Yes Yes The Ratkovich Co. The Bloc Los Angeles $ 1,000,000 Q4-2015 Yes - Yes - Yes Yes Yes The Village at Topanga Westfield Topanga Canoga Park $ 1,500,000 Q4-2014 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Union Station Union Station Washington DC $ 1,000,000 Q1-2016 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes USPTO USPTO Alexandria, VA $ 750,000 Q3-2015 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Westfield Century City Westfield Century City Century City $ 4,000,000 Q2-2016 Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes 18 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

3. Project Manager’s resume listing qualifications and experience.

I. Project Manager

JAMES MAGLOTHIN
James has over 15 years of experience providing parking technology consulting services to aviation, casino, education, health care, hospitality, municipal, retail and other private clientele. He has extensive project experience with a wide range of parking technologies including Automated Parking Guidance Systems (APGS), Automated Vehicle Identification (AVI), Parking Access and Revenue Control Systems (PARCS), and Valet.

Education, Registrations, Recognitions & Affiliations
Texas A&M University
2001| Bachelor of Science, Civil Engineering
Professional Engineer (P.E.)
2006 | Civil Engineering – TX, WA, NY
Project Management Professional (PMP)
2010 | Project Management Institute
40 Under 40, US Parking Professionals
2015 | National Parking Association
Parking Consultants Council
Southern Region Chair
2009-Present | National Parking Association
International Parking Institute
2002-Present | Member
Recent Projects
MGM Resorts International, Las Vegas Strip 2016
James served as the project manager for the ground breaking paid parking implementation project at all nine of MGM’s properties along the Las Vegas Strip. The technology implementation was led by Sentry Control Systems and consists of 119 lanes of equipment and 69 pay-on-foot stations representing the largest SKIDATA installation in the world. In addition, the project consists of an Indect single space parking guidance system encompassing over 14,000 parking spaces making it the largest Indect installation in the US and the 2nd largest in the world.

Other parking technology solutions include Inex LPR, Payment Express EMV credit card processing, Commend VoIP intercom, Frog Parking surface lot sensors, and Global multi-space parking meters.

Tampa International Airport 2014/2015
James served as the lead PARCS consultant on a design-build team comprised of Manhattan Construction Company, Walker Parking Consultants, Lumin Advisors, Aberdeen Management Group and HUB Parking Technology. The Tampa Airport owns approximately 22,000 public parking spaces spread across their Hourly Parking Garage, Daily Parking Garage and Economy Parking Garages. The project included the demolition and reconstruction of the majority of the Airport’s entry and exit plaza islands in order to accommodate a state of the art communications network and new PARCS devices such as LPR cameras. The new PARCS includes features and third party integrations including QR code readers, EMV credit card terminals, VoIP intercom with pinhole camera integration, valet parking, employee parking, SunPass™ Plus toll road AVI payment, private AVI access, proximity card access, Indect level count PGS, roving cashier handhelds, dynamic message signage and CCTV, among others.

Dallas-Ft. Worth International Airport 2012/2013
James served as senior project engineer and PARCS consultant on the program management team that managed the implementation of DFW’s new SKIDATA PARCS. DFW owns over 20,000 parking spaces including five parking garages and four surface parking lots. The project included the demolition and reconstruction DFW’s north and south toll plazas which control parking access via a toll road that is routed through the center of DFW’s five terminals.
19 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
J. Organizational Chart of all relevant staff.

Project Delivery Team
Participation %
Project Design &
Sponsorship
Solution Design &
Site Surveys
Pre-Install
&Testing
Installation &
Commissioning
Support Service

RESOURCE NAME PROJECT ROLE
Management Team
Lester Mascon Executive Project Sponsor 80% - - - -
Chris McKenty Executive Project Sponsor 80% - - - -
Project Man. Team
James Maglothin Project Manager 10% 100% 100% 100% -
Greg Corpodian Construction Manager 10% 10% 20% 30% -
Joshua Powers Project Operations Manager 10% - - 15% -
Supported by team of five 10% 10% 20% 30% -
System Engineers
Patrick Brooke Network Configuration Manager 100% 100% 20% 20% - Supported by team of five 10% 10% 20% 20% -
Noe Carrillo Lead Tester - 10% 100% 10% -
Supported by team of five - - 100% 10% -
Install Team
Jim Stanley Installation Manager - - 50% 100% -
Supported by team of eight - - 50% 100% -
Training Team
Stephan Perner Product Manager 10& - - 5% 5%
Supported by a team of four - - - 10% 5%
Service Team
Robert De Bruine Service and Maintenance - - - - 5%
Supported by team of thirty - - - - 5%
Sentry has a wide range of experience to draw on to handle a project of this magnitude. Only individuals with extensive training and field experience in their respective disciplines are placed in critical positions, including SKIDATA certification.
20 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
The following team will form the leadership roles for the delivery of the project, ensuring the solutions are delivered to the project schedule. Each has the requisite certifications to perform their duties. Sentry warrants and insures the performance of each person and their actions. Each participant is available for interview as is required for the project to determine the suitability of all appointments, we know of no other who will make this offer.

We invite the COSM to compare and contrast the extensive local resources available from Sentry with any of the competition, the projects listed in Los Angeles were delivered by this team and we believe the COSM will determine our team is the only qualified team with the concentration of local resources to complete the project on-time, on-budget and within the service levels required by the COSM. If it happens a participant cannot contribute when the project is scheduled, then a second with equal experience, drawn from the Los Angeles team will be made available for approval.

Sentry will be the sole responsible entity for the delivery of the Projects which includes project management, system design, integration, installation, commissioning, testing, training and service support for the duration for the project, warranty and after warranty support. During the course of this project, Sentry will rely on in-house talent and experience, including with each selected partner supplier to design a project with an intimate understanding the scope, core competencies and limitations.

Various individuals have roles across the project stages and note that lesser support, administrative or low participation contributors are not listed. There are more than 100 employees that constitute Sentry’s Californian presence, each technician receives a constant stream of professional development, by way of our in-house training department run by Stefan Perner. Our training environment includes a full and complete demonstration area and dedicated class-room, this is because Sentry understands that quality training leads to first time results, a great culture, loyalty staff and higher levels of engagement, all of which are crucial to delivering our service values.

LESTER MASCON - 15 years PARCS experience
Executive Project Sponsor
Lester (Executive VP) has been with Sentry for many years and is a former United States Marine. He manages all field personnel at Sentry. Lester began as a Wireless Network engineer and then followed up with 12 years working on Construction and IT Projects. While with Sentry, Lester has attended and received a certification in all available levels of SKIDATA training.

Lester has overseen more than 100 projects with Sentry, from inception to support and to refreshment.

Lester's is available to customer for design advice, project discussion and as a reference point to ensure the smooth delivery of the project from every angle.

CHRIS MCKENTY – 15 years PARCS experience
Revenue Specialist / Project Sponsor
Chris McKenty joined the company as Vice President of Sales, West Region. Chris has been a pioneering evangelist of cloud technologies, having co-founded one of the earliest SaaS businesses that supplied cloud-based parking reservation and yield management solutions to over 80 international Airports and car park managers and owners 21 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
world-wide. Chris understands how COSM can understand their customers from the car-park perspective to ensure that all goals such as automation, improved customer experience, increased revenue and competing with the competition are met.

After nearly 17 years serving in the Royal Navy where he earned numerous commendations, including two citations from the U.S. Navy, McKenty spent 25 years selling and supporting technology solutions across numerous continents, assisting clients to grow their revenues and margins.

Most recently he successfully led sales and business development in two successive cloud based parking technology businesses and expanded these solutions across Europe and the Middle East and more recently across Canada, US and Asia Pacific.

PATRICK BROOKE – 8 years PARCS experience
PCI/IT Security & Network/Server Manager
Patrick has been with Sentry since the mid-2000s and graduated from Embry Riddle, with a Bachelor of Science in Aerospace Studies. Prior to joining Sentry, Patrick worked at Bob Hope COSM as a customer of Sentry during the PARCS implementation. After the project, Patrick joined Sentry, as he was interested in the opportunity to help Sentry and SKIDATA develop its model for delivering high availability PARCS systems in other dynamic environments.

Patrick holds the Payment Card Industry Security Standards Council (PCI DSS) Payment Card Industry Professional (PCIP) qualification, is a SKIDATA certified technician and has achieved various accreditations in Cisco, Microsoft and all related PARCS system components in this offer. Patrick designed the high availability system architecture concept.

Patrick is a key resource for the design, implementation and maintenance of UCLA PCI and will be for COSM.

Stefan’s team leads the training department which will deliver the operational, management and technical assistance to allow COSM to thrive.

JOSHUA POWERS – 8 years PARCS experience
Director of Installations
Josh (IT Manager, Technical Services) is the project's leader in software commissioning. Josh will deliver the project's IT scope including developing plan and deliverables. A central role, Josh works closely with Greg to assemble and coordinate project staff, providing programming direction and support to installation and service departments. His role includes monitoring quality assurance and supervising system implementations as they occur.
22 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
GREG CORPODIAN – 25 years Construction experience
Construction Manager
Greg Corpodian has worked in the construction business for over 25 years, and has assisted in projects like The FBI Building, San Diego, The Getty Museum, VA Hospital, Dodger Stadium locker room remodel, and the Hotel Del Coronado, to name a few larger projects. Greg is a member of the UNLV Football Hall of Fame where he graduated with his BS Degree, and holds an MBA in Finance, and Negotiations and Conflict Management, where he graduated with both degrees Summa Cum Laude. Greg also holds a certification in Six Sigma.

JIM STANDLEY – 31 years PARCS experience
On-Site Installation Manager
Jim is one of the parking industry’s most experienced installation technician’s having successfully led installs for over 30 years across many markets and differing parking products. Jim has been with the Sentry team for over 20 years now and is a State of California certified electrician is also OSHA certified in California. Jim has successfully completed all required SKIDATA training to commissioning equipment. Jim’s deep experience of parking, SKIDATA and the requirements needed to successfully deploy a PARCS solution makes him a key and invaluable team member.

NOE CARRILLO – 18 years PARCS experience
Lead Tester
Noe is one of Sentry’s leading testers having led major PARCS installation and upgrades test phases across many differing projects including John Wayne Airport, Westfield Topanga, and Phoenix Plaza and is leading testing shortly at Long Beach Airport. Noe commenced his career with Sentry as a System Commissioner and has progressed to be responsible for many installations and upgrades.

ROBERT DE BRUINE - 18 years PARCS experience
Service and Maintenance
Robert works with internal and external customers to coordinate the Sentry response to service, repairs and maintenance of equipment. Robert joins Sentry after a role as Head of Operations for SKIDATA. Robert will be the contract administrator over the term of the installation, working on matters such as ensuring certifications are up to date, documentation is maintained and to assist with escalating matters remotely as well as on-site. 23 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

4. Data sheets for primary equipment in project.

A. Product Data:

1. Product description for each component including the following:

Refer to attached product submittals 4a1 and 2013 reply.

System Concept
24 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

SKIDATA PARCS FMS TECHNOLOGY
SKIDATA Parking.Logic is the PARCS FMS system proposed to COSM.

This solution has a remarkable pedigree of development since 1977, it’s the world’s most successful PARCS.

The central control software for SKIDATA is Parking.Logic, it is designed to;  Unify the whole parking management into a single system  Provide comprehensive remote management of facilities  Integrate with external systems (ERP, Building Access, CCTV etc.)  Scale from simple parking area to complex cross-linked parking networks  Always comply with Credit Card Processing standards (PCI-DSS/EMV)  Allow flexible rate schedules and deliver comprehensive reporting The Parking.Logic GUI is intuitive to navigate with point/click features – the system features more than 50 modules that provide easy integration and expansion to extend functionality. These are provided under a licensing system which allows further modules to be accessed. 25 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Parking.Logic provides a control console indicates the current system status as well as any system events as they occur. The Control Console also allows the operator to switch between the main applications such as the Administration Centre, Control Centre, Sales Centre and Online Help.

Each workstation can be set to standard or extended display mode:
 System events can be configured to show up on either of the two available system event lists (errors are assigned to one list, and intercom transactions to the other by default)  Events can be set to require additional acknowledgement (confirmation dialogue)  Error handling and marking from any workplace on the system  Windows of the main programs (Control Centre, Admin Centre, Sales Centre and Online Help can be placed anywhere on the screen
 System status is indicated by easily identifiable symbols and plain-text messages  Display of status and system event messages on control console  Definable alert sound notifies operators of system events  Easily identifiable system status icons
 Authorization setup for each function
 Default selection of car parks displayed on-screen can be configured for each Workstation  Setting affects all functions and display of error and status messages  Authorized operators may edit settings temporarily via Control Centre (settings will automatically revert to defaults upon log-off)  Configuration and display of operating parameters for car park notice boards and storey counters  Functions for establishing/terminating intercom or closed-circuit video connections  All the control of all peripheral devices
 Special control functions for parking columns and barriers: manual opening of barriers for a single passage; activation/deactivation of Keep Open / Keep Closed position of a barrier; deactivation/reactivation of a barrier unit; activation/deactivation of Keep Open position of a shutter 26 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
door; activation/deactivation of automated barrier operation (barrier actuation via vehicle detection loop); reversal of direction of reversible lanes to entry or exit; cashing up and unlocking cash terminals of Electronic Purses; activation/deactivation of License Plate Identification  Control functions for Automatic Payment Machines: deactivation of activated alarm, deactivation/reactivation of APM, staff member can allow/block issuing of replacements for lost tickets; adjustable price, display or print data of the last transactions, cash up and unlock terminals of Electronic Purses, shutdown device, details listed include filling levels of hoppers, main cash container, main banknote container and dispenser
 Control functions for Pay Stations: cash up and unlock terminals of Electronic Purses,  shutdown device, details listed include cash and check levels  Control functions for Administration Unit, Workstations: Shutdown device  Global control functions for multiple car parks / multiple facility systems: activation/  deactivation of Keep Open / Keep Closed position of all barriers, deactivation of  transaction control (‘Anti-pass-back function’) for one transaction (e.g. following a power failure), deactivation of section transaction control (e.g. following a power failure), activation/deactivation of automated operation of all barriers, Fire Alarm function (sets all entrance barriers to Keep Closed and all exit barriers to Keep Open), close/open Car Park
 if a car park is closed only cards have entry permission which are also allowed to enter the car park if full; exit is granted as usual
SKIDATA has high level integration with “Commend”; these systems are integrated at the production level in the SKIDATA factory. This gives the customer a fully functional solution including “divert-to-mobile” and remote barrier control on ALL entries and exits. The Commend system is the market leading platform, the system has proven to be able to grow with multiple site/system interoperability, with each location indicated differently and rules of priority able to be applied.

The control server and station allow for full remote operation and monitoring of all parking lanes and pay on foot locations. The system monitors in real-time for any alerts, and attend to intercom calls as they are requested.

SKIDATA Parking.Logic collects and reports on any activity across the system allowing different user groups to produce administrative reports on revenue collection and operational performance metrics.

As the components of a SKIDATA system operate on a closed network, security issues are minimized and mitigated by the application of COSM security protocols. The design of the SKIDATA architecture to meet the requirements of PCI required specific design to ensure the scope of the PCI audits are minimized. In further discussions the COSM should talk with Sentry regarding our deployments for the University of California and our working relationship with PCI Auditor CoalFire, which has successfully delivered a program that clearly relates requirements and responsibilities that ensure audits are routine and compliance assured. 27 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONALITY
SKIDATA can produces not only standard reports on transit times/volume by period, plus alarms and payments by type within in the system but also customized granular reports across definable periods presented in matrixes that can be exported to a range of systems.

The greatest possible data views to analyze and enhance performance:
 Offers ability to integrate reports to Finance and/or HR systems Ability to produce feed to external systems to that streamline reporting/auditing  Able to provide output to data warehousing for storage of all system data Ability to collect and securely store all vital data automatically  Provides remote access for administration and monitoring Enables full system access offsite to credentialed users  Automatically update external roadside or zone occupancy signage Enable the ability to provide basic occupancy guidance
 Enables definable rate structures within your Car Parks by duration or location Provides for early bird discounts and staff parking zones in the lowest utilized areas  Enables parkers to reserve car parks by mobile phone app Send a reservation to the system to reserve a space
 Provides variable validations that can be applied by retailers as well as the center Control the administration of validations and avoid the potential for lost revenue  Provides system monitoring and remote diagnostics to respond to requests Supplier can respond immediately to alarms and enhance uptimes.  Provides full audit and compliance with PCI-DSS and EMV Is structure and design allows SKIDATA to move fast and inexpensively to meet changes in compliance
 Provides the option for single space/zone counting parking guidance Provides drivers with signage directions straight to the closest available bay and illuminated space indicators for the fastest turnover that eliminates search frustration 28 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Parking Credential Media
Barcode Tickets
For short term parking, thermal tickets that are printed on entry with a barcode, this represents the standard method of record. Thermal barcode tickets are the most economical, have less risk of misreads and their optical reading means minimal wear when compared to magnetic stripe entry and exit media. SKIDATA is committed to providing the most reliable solutions in the industry, and SKIDATA’s barcode ticket issuance process does not compromise this standard. Each ticket is printed then read by a barcode scanner prior to being issued to a customer. If a ticket is unreadable, then the system will not issue the ticket to the customer, rather it will invalidate the first ticket then issue another ticket, following the same process. The benefit is SKIDATA’s ticket issuing methodology is designed to ensure tickets issued are not unreadable at a payment device or upon exit, so the patron experience is improved and so the system results in fewer exception transactions. A barcode that is 25% diminished is generally still usable in SKIDATA. 2D/3D Barcodes
SKIDATA allows the combination of your parking discount or entry ticket to be provided within brochures and e‐ mails; redeemed by phone at barcode scanners on Entry or Exit Columns and Pay on Foot (POF) Paystations.

Guests can use phones to scan QR codes and receive barcodes for early bird validations or ticket validations at a Point of Sale (POS.) The proposed barcode readers easily read printed and digital barcode media. Barcodes can be generated natively within the PARCS for distribution or they can be created via external systems to a prescribed format. Barcodes can be associated with a number of SKIDATA services—called Articles.

Reservations, Contract Parkers, Validations, Discounts, Quota Based Cards, and Personalized Cash Debit Cards can all be assigned to barcode media, using their associated SKIDATA articles. SKIDATA’s native e-ticketing service enables an authorized PARCS administrator to issue barcode passes for any of the above uses.

Pass Cards
Whereas others are only starting to offer this type of data carrier in their systems, SKIDATA have been using card based data carriers in parking for over 10 years.

SKIDATA supports external system cards include ISO 7811, ISO 14443 and 15693 (RFID data carriers) and ISO 7813 cards or its own 13 Mhz range. This allows customers to take advantage of existing Mifare, Legic, Weigand, HID Prox or other 3rd party cards within the parking system, adding parking to one of many applications on the card.

The ability to import card information can provide the ability to smoothly the transition registered users to the new equipment and provides opportunities to align park-and-ride services on the one card. The integration to TAP is discussed further in the proposal.
29 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
EMV Card Processing Terminals by Payment Express
Unattended Contact Readers and Contactless (option) are provided for bankcard acceptance at exit terminals.

The readers are a component of our terminal based end to end encryption solution for bankcard processing.

True to SKIDATA’s open architecture, the readers are not proprietary, as the terminals are EMV and PCI Compliant to fully meet all the regulations. One of the reasons why SKIDATA has selected Payment Express is because of the security features, these credit card readers are able to process the credit cards coming with the secure chip technology.

Summary of Payment Express uniqueness:
 End to end encryption of all data that potentially can significantly reduce COSM PCI scope;  No single point of failure with the ability for payments to be taken offline;  Rapid transaction processing time < 3-4 seconds for online authorisation;  Upgrades to meet regulation changes are able to be achieved easily with a very low cost;  Updates are deployed remotely over a secure internet line.

Payment Express provides a customer portal providing the ability to make attended card transactions (such as processing IOUs) and delivers additional reporting functionality, such as card reporting, that is otherwise not visible to the PARCS due to EMV and PCI requirements. Payment Express supports a large range of integrations and gateways, they will need to be consulted on any proposed change of financial institutions as would be best practice for COSM, to maintain PCI assurance and to ensure service continuity.

SCR200E CARD READER
 Combinedmagneticstripecard and
ICC(chipcard)reader
 Contactless capable (when
combinedwithBRF210)
 End-end encryption of all data (Pointto-Point Encryption, P2PE)  Employsindustryleading3DES
encryptionwithtamperdetection
 32-bit ARM7 crypto-processor
 Extremely fast processingtime
 Rearmountmetal bezel
BRF210 CONTACTLESS ANTENNA
 Supports mobile payments
(e.g. Apple Pay,Google Wallet, SamsungPay)
 4displayLEDs-verticalor horizontal orientation
 32-BitCortexM3120MHz processor
 Contactless card interfaces- ISO14443A/B
30 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

LANE CONTROLS
For the perfect first and last impression – SKIDATA Barrier Gate, Lite and Power.Gate Quick Movements!
Configurable opening times: openings are up to 15%
quicker than other systems.

Energy saving!
The best in its field, operates in a wide range of
temperatures possible without any extra heating or
ventilation.

The Barrier.Gate is a robust device
featuring high reliability and longevity. It
consists of a three-phase, geared motor
with frequency converter control – that
allows for start and stop control of the
Barrier arm without the use of limit
switches, increasing reliability and reducing
spare part requirements. The self-locking
gear system ensures that the Barrier arm
cannot be lifted manually. The barrier is
free of any front line maintenance requirements – no need for lube jobs, limit switch settings, etc.

All Barrier arm breakages / removals are logged as part of the system audit trail. The Barrier arm is able to be refitted without the use of specialized tools and manual removed in a power outage.

The Gate is not configured to auto raise to control vehicle entry in times of no power. 31 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
To ensure longevity, the Barrier and arm is manufactured from materials such as high-grade noncorrosive steel and/or durable impact resistant plastic and conforms to ISO 9001 Quality Assurance standards. The signal to the Barrier to ‘open’ is an intelligent command, and not a simple relay switching device. Barriers that are opened by a simple relay switch can easily be bypassed with basic tools (e.g. a pair of pliers).

The SKIDATA Column proposed entry control stations are an attractive and robust solution presenting customers with self-explanatory, easy to understand on screen instructions and controls.

A graphic LCD display is incorporated into the device, to display user messages for guidance and operation, and to facilitate maintenance procedures. The Entry device is activated by the presence of a vehicle on a detection loop. This sensing device has frequency and sensitivity settings.

Highlights:
 7” Color Graphic Display with touchscreen availability  Dual feed barcoded ticket dispenser – can stock up to 10,000 tickets  SKIDATA proximity cards reader and 2D Barcode Reader
 Commend Intercom Point and Pinhole camera
 EMV Credit Card Reader and Contactless (Options)
 Interchangeable SKIDATA coder – Reading & Printing tickets  Large footprint for 3rd party devices
Full Color LCD screen for
instructions/messaging
Programmable Buttons
Additional Functions Area:
- External Card Reader
- 3
rd Party Barcode Scanner
- EMV readers
- Future Functionality
Illuminated ticket slot with
Ticket request button
Integrated Intercom Button
Large Ticket Storage 5,000+
Quick restocking design
32 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
There are two types of lane control columns, the Power.Gate and Lite.Gate which have been selected to suit the requirements.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

1. Illuminated barrier arm (upgrade)
Enables the highest visibility in outdoor, morning and evening light settings

2. Rubber protection strip on barrier bottom
In case of barrier falling on vehicle, safety strip means no or minimal damage is done

3. Self-locking barrier
Prevent barrier from being manually raised by passenger or similar

4. Constructed from non-corrosive materials including support base Enables the longest possible life for components and upgrade with minimum costs

5. Sacrificial Failure Points
If barrier driven through, it can be quickly replaced by installing a new plastic screw, means no motor damage and next to immediate recovery.

6. Maintenance free barrier
A system which requires no maintenance and guaranteed for 5,000,000+ cycles

7. Product support and spares availability for 10 years Infrastructure investment able to be amortized to act reliably for an extensive period

8. Ticket Column contains LCD instructions and audio greeting Able to quickly communicate the required actions to drivers in under 3 seconds

9. Reads barcode parking tickets in 4 ways
Allows the customer to insert ticket in the fastest possible action

10. Integrate CCTV camera overwatch or pinhole camera
Monitor the lane and provide remote assistance to drivers who call for help

11. Accept Contactless Bankcards
Ability to quickly pay by credit card by holding their card in close proximity or Apple Pay equipped phones.

12. 2D/3D Barcode Scanner
Ability to read vouchers, e-tickets or smartphone images to apply validation rules

13. Accept stored value cards and 3rd party cards
Provides the ability for Staff and VIPs etc. to use the features of RFID card or tags

14. System capable of providing following
 License Plate Recognition (LPR)
 Long Range Readers for RFID
 Near Field Communications (NFC)
33 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
License Plate Camera System (Available Option)
Parking.Logic is able to associate multiple distinct identifying form factors with a parking Article. Vehicle License Plates are more commonly becoming a critical form factor to allow ingress and egress of vehicles in paid and controlled parking applications. The proposed solution focuses heavily on delivering the functionality for enhanced revenue control functionality and for ticket based exception handling; however, the SKIDATA Parking.Logic platform extends License Plate functionality to articles other than for transient parking tickets.

License Plates can be used to identify reservation, contract parker, and pre-paid accounts. The LPR of choices if from Inex-Zamir:
 Fully digital All-In-One imager and processor in a single housing  Fan-less, Ultra-Low Power, Super-Small Intel® Atom™ processor  Available in a wide ranging Fields-of-Views
 Dual-streaming Digital Color Overview Output for Color Scene Imaging and ONVIF-Compliant Video for VMS/NVR/DVR
 Ideal for lane overviews, a better alternative to pinholes at COSM
Mounted to a pole the IZA500 SERIES ALL-IN-ONE IMAGER automatically captures all vehicles crossing its path. Each passing vehicle’s identifying data is captured, read, and stored in a database within milliseconds. The imager/processor produces up to 60 frames of video per second. With built-in synchronized LED illumination in a ruggedized IP66 housing, ensures accurate vehicle identification data at any time of the day, regardless of weather or lighting conditions.

License Plate Management System
A necessary feature of car park management, particularly powerful in SKIDATA is the ability to create lists of any type, configure their characteristics and apply automated responses which members ‘on or not’ on the list are recognized. It also provides this by importing list updates. Lists are configurable within SKIDATA incorporating Parking.Logic rules is possible with this native module, design for this purpose. This can work to identify vehicles without plates for further investigation and to stop such vehicles at exit for engagements.

License Plate Notifications are produced when the parking system searches for a Ticket Number by providing a Plate Number. If SKIDATA finds a match for the provided Plate Number, then the Ticket Type and Ticket Number are both returned to the parking system. 34 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Pay on Foot Station
The Easy.Cash comprises self-explanatory payment system that is burglar-proof. It meets all ADA design standards so as to enable use by everyone in the community, additionally an intercom help point is integrated into the payment device. To ensure longevity (proven upwards of 10 years,) the machine is manufactured from high-grade non-corrosive steel and durable impact resistant plastic.

An LCD display device is incorporated into the Payment device, to display user messages and intuitive guidance or to assist in facilitating maintenance procedures. The Payment device is activated by the insertion of a ticket/card
into the unit’s mouthpiece (the screen
saving displays the instruction to insert
ticket.) It is able to accommodate the
payment of short term paper-based
tickets and the reading of a variety of
season (staff, customers, etc.) cards.

Note readers, coin accepters, ticket
coders, cash vaults and coin hoppers
are all monitor. These components can
be interchanged as business processes
change, to adopt to new payment types
and as cash becomes less prevalent, to
use the systems to extend the spares
pool. Interchangeability also provides
the ability to management the different
lifecycle patterns of low volume areas
with high volume areas.

Credit card only system shown in inset.

Large full color LCD screen for instructions and
payment assistance
Accepts Bankcard Payment and can be used to
recharge stored value cards.

Pay with Coins,
Cards and Cards
Space for additional readers
and scanners, including EMV
and contactless terminals.
35 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

ADDITIONAL FEATURES/OPTIONS

1. Complies with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and displays multiple languages Enables highest level of public inclusion

2. Manufactured from non-corrosive and impact resistant materials, forced entry resistant Longest service life and secured cash management

3. Payment machine that contains LCD instructions (and audio as an option) Able to quickly communicate the required actions in under 3 seconds

4. Accepts all current and future Coins and Notes with changes in configuration only Quickly update cash acceptance without the need to install new equipment

5. Has a significant storage of coins and notes, with the ability to self-replenish High capacity self-replenishing storage means less cash collections

6. Integrate CCTV camera overwatch
Provide remote assistance to drivers who call for help and monitor remotely

7. Contactless Paywave (option)
Ability to quickly pay by credit card by holding their card in close proximity

8. 2D Barcode Scanner
Ability to read vouchers, e-tickets or smartphone images to apply validation rules

9. Accept and recharge stored value cards and Third Party cards Provides the ability for Staff and VIPs etc. to use the features of RFID card or tags

10. Sizable and flat front panel area
Provides the ability to decal the unit with easy to follow messaging/branding

11. Large illuminated top panel
Provides the ability to see the unit from increased distance

12. Parking system to have the following environmentally sensitive modes and functions  Energy saving modes such as standby
 Thermal print head for reduced printer decay
 Interchangeable components between high and low volume locations 36 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Remote and Attended Cashier Station
Cashiers can offer customers special service and individual consultations at your manned point of sale or deliver these services remotely via intercom call exchanges. With the multifunctional workstation you'll be able to keep a firm grip on the complete parking management solution, including generating financial reports. The system is a well-organized user interface with stable and reliable hardware.

The POS supports different keyboards, printers, monitors, client displays, scanners and coding devices, including Touchscreen options and Cash drawer interface. All components can be interchanged and relocated. It has all the necessary functions at an affordable price, with scalable scanning and coding devices for the centralized collecting of payment and collecting of payment at exit.

Multifunctional and secure
 Secure barcode and credit card payment
 Conveniently handles RFID data carriers (e.g. charging of Keycard)  Rapid ticket production and Easy shift management
 Controlled access to software modules and operating system  Comprehensive functions for handling items
Available suite of options
37 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

2. Description of the CMS software and hardware including the following:

Configuration diagram – Network Concept
38 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
A2. Project Component Deliverables

PROJECT ITEM QUANTITY
Garage Components
In addition to re-usable components held by COSM

1.Entry Power.Gate Unlimited, HID / Refurbish to Power.Gate 8/12 Exit Power.Gate Unlimited, HID / Refurbish to Power.Gate 12/19

2.Pinhole Camera 98
Power.Gate Print@Home 51
Laser Printer, Keyboard, Monitor, Mouse 1

3.UPS vA 500 18

4.Smart UPS 1000va, Rack Mount 1

5.Payment Express Unattended EMV Reader - Card Insert SCR200 Bundle 78

6.Payment Express Attended EMV Reader with PinPad (IPP350) 7

7.HP 5810 PC 23

8. RS2 HID Proxcard II 2,000

9.SKIDATA Desktop Coder Unlimited 4
Replacement SKIDATA Pay on Foot Baseboard 35

10.RDR Door Reader w/ Intercom 8

11.Commend GE300 5-8 Subscribers with Tel Card 14

12. Credit Card Only POF 4

13. Full Service Easy Cash POF with HID 8

14. Barrier.Gate-ADA Non-Illuminated 40
Barrier.Gate-Standard Illuminated 10' 11
Network
SFP Transceiver for SM Fiber 100 Base FX GBIC 30

15. Cisco 24 Gigabit Managed Switch 15

16. License, Symantec Endpoint, 1yr, (1-24) 70

17. HP DL380 large scale Server with VM ware 2
Cable, Belden 4PR/Cat5/PL/Blue 210
Software
In addition to existing licenses held by COSM
SW-EPI/LICENSE (For EMV) 105
39 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Projects
Scan / X-Ray of deck (Non-Destructive) 3
Training 40
All 115 VAC power at Sentry specified locations 1
All final wiring terminations of low voltage communications 1 All new conduit with pull string and junction boxes. 1
All required low voltage communication or control. 1
Re-installation of COSM Stored components 1
Final system testing and checkout 1
Exclusions to be delivered by others
Obtaining required permits 1
Internet Access at Server Locations 1
Assure existing Conduit is usable 1
Priced Option

18.Payment Express BRF210 Contactless Antenna 85

19. Sweb.Validate eVAL 1
b. Software platforms and programming language.

ITEM MANUFACTURER APPLICATION
PARCS MODULES SENTRY SKIDATA PARKING.LOGIC
SERVER/PCs MICROSOFT WINDOWS 7 / SERVER 12

ANTIVIRUS SYMANTEC END POINT

PAYMENT GATEWAY PAYMENT EXPRESS PAYMENT EXPRESS
c. Communication protocol, polling procedures and transaction message flow from peripheral devices to and through CMS.

The system requires a TCP/IP network and access to a phone line (intercom) - all items on the network are IP addressed. Parking.Logic is polls devices constantly, see item D. d. Communication failure/error identification and recovery.

Sentry is able to use sensor tools from Paessler to provide comprehensive technology based monitoring for IP addressable components and subsystems within the PARCS, allowing notification of changes.

Sentry is able to monitor IP addressable components and systems - see:
https://www.paessler.com/prtg/features#comprehensive
https://www.paessler.com/manuals/prtg/available_sensor_types 40 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Once a change is alerted, the appropriate support is applied either remotely, with an immediate instruction to site or a site visit.
e. Fault tolerance.

Along with the other fail-over and off-line operations previously described, the proposed system is designed to allow for redundant servers (where requested), power supplies, network cards, in VM Ware Essentials Plus on UPS back-up.

This creates a very stable environment with high availability redundancy for automatic cutover to continue its intended operations instead of failing. This gives you a very high fault tolerant design that is self‐stabilized.

Sentry follow best practice criteria in our design to eliminate single point of failure by establishing appropriate redundancies within the software and head end servers.
f. Back-up procedures.

Data storage is a configurable able to meet the required IT policies of the client. Typically, this involves establishing a back-up procedure to a separate mirror drive or sent on a routine basis (nightly) to remote storage.

Internally, SKIDATA has the facility to decentralize the storage of duplicate operational data on its own devices, pushing data to physically remote locations for secure back-up.

SKIDATA’s more demanding customers run fully redundant networks with physically separate and remote offsite data warehousing. It is up to the COSM to determine the level of automation and back-up your business continuity warranty and IT policy dictates.
g. Data storage and retrieval procedures.

Archived data can be reviewed by accessing the storage location through Parking.Logic. In an instance of the need for the recovery from a critical event, SKIDATA support will be on hand for guidance and support.

3. Photos of actual installations.

41 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

City of Santa Barbara
UCLA Santa Monica Westfield Topanga
For more visit:
www.skidata.com/en/parking-management.html
42 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
B. RCS Credential: Proposer shall provide rationale for offering one of the following:

For short term parking, SKIDATA uses thermal tickets that are printed on entry with a barcode, this represents the standard method of record. Thermal barcode tickets are the most economical, have less risk of misreads and their optical reading means minimal wear when compared to magnetic stripe entry and exit media. SKIDATA is committed to providing the most reliable solutions in the industry, and SKIDATA’s barcode ticket issuance process does not compromise this standard. Each ticket is printed then read by a barcode scanner prior to being issued to a customer. If a ticket is unreadable, then the system will not issue the ticket to the customer, rather it will invalidate the first ticket then issue another ticket, following the same process. The benefit is SKIDATA’s ticket issuing methodology is designed to ensure tickets issued are not unreadable at a payment device or upon exit, so the patron experience is improved and so the system results in fewer exception transactions. A barcode that is 25% diminished is generally still usable in SKIDATA.

C. Detailed description of cloud-based validation system functions and features. e:VAL by SKIDATA Sweb.Validate
e:VAL® is a unique solution developed by Sentry designed to allow users to securely validate parking tickets using a web browser with or Smart phone. It allows for the value associated with validations to the specific user who provides them. eVAL provides reporting on validation and cash accounting activity to remove associated theft entirely. In achieving the above, e:VAL® allows parking facility managers to sell or otherwise provide electronic validation funds to departments and tenants and retailers, who can then use to validate parking tickets.

Each tenant can be configured or configure their own different validation options to suit the needs. For the COSM, this can mean City wide promotions and loyalty schemes.
e:VAL® Advantages:
 Eliminates theft and fraud of validations
 Eliminates lost paper validation tickets
 Visitor tracking
 Validation reordering
 Comprehensive reporting
 Reduced paper waste
 Reduced exit lane congestion
 e:VAL® is fast and easy
e:VAL is exclusively available with SKIDATA and Sentry.

For its full range of features, refer to the electronic attachment. "Using e:VAL as our validation
solution has enabled us to streamline
the ordering/delivery process and
improve fiscal controls. Our tenants
love the paperless aspect of the
system and the ease at which they
can obtain detailed reports for their
transactions." - Josh Boen,
Division Manager, Five Star Parking
43 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
Other SKIDATA Validation Opportunities
In addition to e:VAL, SKIDATA offers several other card/ticket types that can be used to discount or credit value to the individual Parker, these card/ticket types can be configured on barcode, and/or RFID media.

1. Cash Coupon
A cash coupon is an anonymous follow-up card with a user defined cash value that is inserted after the transient ticket is inserted and the parking fee is displayed. The parking fee will be reduced based on the applicable value on the card.

2. Cash Debit Card
A cash debit card is an anonymous cash value decrementing card that is used to enter and exit the parking facility. The parking fee due is deducted at the exit and the balance remaining is encoded on the card. The card balance will be displayed to the Parker at both the Entrance and Exit Columns and the Parker can recharge their cash debit card at any work station with the desk top coder or at the Pay-on-foot Station.

3. Discount Card
A discount card is an anonymous follow-up card with a user defined percentage value that is inserted after the transient ticket is inserted and the parking fee is displayed. The parking fee will be reduced based on the applicable percentage.

4. Time Debit Card
A time debit card is an anonymous follow-up card with a user defined time value that is inserted after the transient ticket is inserted and the parking fee is displayed. The parking fee will be reduced based on the applicable time discount.

5. Multiple Time Debit Card
A multiple-time debit card is an anonymous follow-up card with a user defined time value that is inserted after the transient ticket is inserted and the parking fee is displayed. The parking fee will be reduced based on the applicable time discount on the card. The multiple-time debit card can be reused during the programmed validity period.
44 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
SKIDATA offers COSM a promotional platform
The SKIDATA system can deliver a range of service integrations which the COSM should take into deep consideration as it evaluates the relative revenue potential.

1. Electronic Barcodes
Consider allowing other qualifying businesses to generate barcodes which could be used to validate parking in the PARCS. SKIDATA’s External Card Systems module can be used to effectively enable other ticketing programs to become 3rd party sales channels for validation coupons. This would need cooperation from COSM and the participating carriers; however, if parties decide to cooperate, then Sentry can enable the reading of certain parameters in a generated barcode, allowing Parking.Logic to apply a validation to the parking rate.

This information could be used to allow a configurable discount, % OFF, $ OFF, Time Reduction, free upgrade (i.e. Daily Rate for Hourly Lot) or other desired promotional synergies – delivered across a range of media.

2. PARCS Synergies
Promote Parking through incentivized 3rd party sales aggregation channels through PARCS, allowing them to reserve and pay for parking through the SKIDATA system.

For example:

Parkmobile— is fully integrated into Parking.Logic for mobile payment of transient parking tickets. Parkmobile has millions of users in the area. COSM and Parkmobile can partner to encourage Parkmobile customers.

Parking Panda is fully integrated into Parking.Logic for reservation sales. Parking Panda has active/ loyal customers in the Los Angeles market. The COSM could partner to encourage Parking Panda customers.
45 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e

3. Use SKIDATA to grow COSM Non-Parking Revenue
COSM can utilize the Entry Terminal, Exit Terminal, and POF Terminals to issue high quality media, including color advertising, promotions on tickets, and unique vouchers with configurable time-bound discounts.

SKIDATA allows a flexible range of physical and digital media designs to be read and vended.

Utilize Entry Terminal and Exit Terminal video displays to synergize with COSM campaigns. x
46 | P a g e
C o m m e r c i a l i n C o n f i d e n c e
L. PCI Compliance: Provide proof that the proposed PARCS is compliant with current Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements.

SKIDATA has the best track record in the industry in maintaining software for payment applications validated according to the relevant PCI / PA-DSS standard. If COSM selects Sentry, it will have chosen a company who takes the responsibilities associated with PA-DSS compliance very seriously. SKIDATA has made a significant commitment to protecting cardholder data and ensuring that operators and owners reduce liability, and Sentry follows this investment by ensuring its business systems, business practices, and employee training programs focus on ensuring that PARCS systems implemented and serviced by Sentry follow PA-DSS best practices. This is exemplified in that SKIDATA was the first and potentially only PARCS to be listed as supporting a PA-DSS v3.x payment application. SKIDATA is able to continually make this commitment due to its architecture, release based software approach, and due to its adherence to following ISO 9001 standards in software development.

To support this leading position, the proposed EMV terminals from Payment Express are P2PE certified.

Source: www.pcisecuritystandards.org/approved_companies_providers/validated_payment_applications.php IMPORTANT: If other proposers are PA-DSS v3 compliant at time to submission, then they do not know what it will take to attain this compliance for their solution and will likely design a network/system architecture which does not enable compliance to be met in the future. It will either lead to a security compliance risk or a significant upgrading to the network or hardware technology that the COSM will need to accommodate, either by downtime or by further investment internal resources. 47 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Q. Anti-Tailgating: Tailgating has been a problem proposer shall describe system features that will address this issue.

From 2013
Anti-Tailgating Loop detector – The specialized loop detector included in our proposal is designed to detect minuet changes in the magnetic field emitted by each vehicle. The system will detect when a vehicle is too close to the car in front by recognizing the change in the magnetic field.

Additional Speed Bump - Installing a speed bump in the exit lane will help to separate the cars that are tailgating to allow the specialized loop detector to detect the change in the magnetic field sending a close signal to the gate and only allow one vehicle to exit at a time.

Further advice
License Plate Recognition (option) - Our recent installation at MGM Casinos featured the use of License Plate Recognition, by capturing plates, those who chose to tailgate can have their fee associated to their Account (if they have registered), be blacklisted / challenged at Entry when they return or pursued for payment (some Airport seek recompense this way.)
Where LPR cannot be deployed and as a general comment, minimizing tail gating requires multiple interventions, including improved communications at entry, more convenient payment options and locations for POFs, lane monitoring CCTV and encouraging Parker’s to register, so offenders can be known to COSM. 48 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

5. Detailed project schedule.

O. Project Schedule:

1. Submit a detailed project schedule (from signed contract to acceptance testing), identifying milestones along the way, as well as potential challenges to the schedule.

Sentry offers an illustrative schedule that can only be defined with detailed agreement on desired sequencing, contract commitment and with the return of required project data to Sentry. The below chart shows the tasks and milestones, to deploy a single garage – where the greyed area would be repeated for each PARCS garage either concurrently or sequentially or to an agreed upon start.

Task Name Duration Start Finish
City of Santa Monica PARCS Upgrade
Initiation Processes
Executed Contract and Deposit Received - Commencement Date 1 day Mon 8/22/16 Mon 8/22/16 Submit insurance documents (as required) 2 days Tue 8/23/16 Wed 8/24/16 Initiation Processes COMPLETE 0 days Wed 8/24/16 Wed 8/24/16 Order Equipment
Submit equipment order to SKIDATA 1 day Tue 8/23/16 Tue 8/23/16 Obtain estimated delivery date 60 days Wed 8/24/16 Tue 11/15/16 Order Equipment COMPLETE 0 days Tue 11/15/16 Tue 11/15/16 Required Site Works and Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings in CAD for Sentry to Update 1 day Tue 8/23/16 Tue 8/23/16 Updated Shop Drawing submitted for Plan Check and Electrical Permit 15 days Wed 8/24/16 Tue 9/13/16 Detail site works and schedule external contractor 2 days Wed 9/14/16 Thu 9/15/16 Required Pre-Works and Shop Drawings COMPLETE 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Submit Required Samples
Project Kick-Off Meeting / Submit Required Samples 2 days Wed 9/14/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review Credit Process for setting up Merchant Account 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review DSL Line requirements for Credit Cards 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review POT Line (Plan old telephone for call forwarding) 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review Parking Rates 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16
Review Validations 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16
Review Project schedule and phasing plan 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review Permit Status- Talk about delays if any 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review Ticket Stock 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16
Review Training schedule and set date for training at Sentry Training Center 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16 Review work times 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16
Set Go Live date 0 days Thu 9/15/16 Thu 9/15/16
All Customer Deliverables Completed 2 days Fri 9/16/16 Mon 9/19/16 Required Submission of Samples/Permits COMPLETE 0 days Mon 9/19/16 Mon 9/19/16 Pre-Installation
Equipment delivered to warehouse 1 day Wed 11/16/16 Wed 11/16/16 Perform pre-install maintenance on equipment 2 days Thu 11/17/16 Fri 11/18/16 49 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Complete internal release documentation 1 day Thu 11/17/16 Thu 11/17/16 Pre-Installation COMPLETE 0 days Wed 11/16/16 Wed 11/16/16 Site Works - (Where applicable)
Form new islands and install new inner island conduits 1 day Tue 9/20/16 Tue 9/20/16 Rough Electrical Inspection for islands prior to concrete 1 day Wed 9/21/16 Wed 9/21/16 Conduit Infrastructure 5 days Thu 9/22/16 Wed 9/28/16
Cable pulls to lanes (power and data) 3 days Thu 9/29/16 Mon 10/3/16 Provision Testing Documents 2 days Tue 9/20/16 Wed 9/21/16 Provision of Training Plan 4 days Thu 9/22/16 Tue 9/27/16 Install Garage
Ship, Install and Remove, Commission and LAT 5 days Thu 11/17/16 Wed 11/23/16 Installation COMPLETE 0 days Wed 11/23/16 Wed 11/23/16
Training
Complete Training 2 days Thu 11/24/16 Fri 11/25/16
Training COMPLETE 0 days Fri 11/25/16 Fri 11/25/16
Soft Launch Go Live - Substantial Completion
Operational Demonstration Testing
Operational Demonstration Testing Period 30 days Mon 11/28/16 Fri 1/6/17 ODT period COMPLETE 0 days Fri 1/6/17 Fri 1/6/17
Final System Acceptance
Perform site walk with customer 1 day Mon 1/9/17 Mon 1/9/17 Complete punch list items from all inspections 2 days Tue 1/10/17 Wed 1/11/17 Perform final site walk 1 day Thu 1/12/17 Thu 1/12/17
Final System Acceptance COMPLETE 0 days Thu 1/12/17 Thu 1/12/17 Post Implementation Review
Identify and document lessons learned 1 day Fri 1/13/17 Fri 1/13/17 Review documents with maintenance team 1 day Mon 1/16/17 Mon 1/16/17 Post Implementation Review COMPLETE 0 days Mon 1/16/17 Mon 1/16/17 Project Closure
Complete final as-builds and close-out documentation 3 days Thu 1/12/17 Mon 1/16/17 Issue final completion documents including as-builds and warranties 1 day Tue 1/17/17 Tue 1/17/17 Obtain customer sign-off 1 day Wed 1/18/17 Wed 1/18/17
Release project resources and Close Project 1 day Thu 1/19/17 Thu 1/19/17 Complete contract closure 1 day Fri 1/20/17 Fri 1/20/17 Project Closure COMPLETE 0 days Fri 1/20/17 Fri 1/20/17 And 4. Provide an expedited installation schedule for Structure 6 (first installation).

From final design to go-live, the duration can be as little as 16 weeks - all sites delivered concurrently.

However, lane installation schedules are driven by many factors, least likely is the availability of Sentry to deliver the installation.
50 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

2. Describe how Proposer will maintain the schedule

PROJECT MANAGEMENT APPROACH
The following section addresses the plan and approach to meet the objectives of the Functional Specification, including project installation phasing, the deactivation of the existing PARCS solution, the activation and phasing of the new proposed Sentry team’s PARCS solution and finally the rigorous testing to ensure a successful system acceptance. To achieve these project goals, the Sentry project management team will utilize the PMI Project Management methodologies, specifically the following ten knowledge areas used to successfully manage this project.

Scope Management identifies and documents the work required to complete the requirements of the project. Sentry will outline the scope of work through a Work Breakdown Structure and ultimately use this to create the Master Project Schedule for the COSM.

Time Management defines the processes for developing and managing the Master Project Schedule to ensure project completion is on time. Sentry aims to approach the installation with multiple crews and shifts for various aspects of the work that we have found to be best practice. The PARCS portion of the project normally can be done after any peak periods during the day shift without causing disruption to the operations of each parking location. Lastly, the network infrastructure work would best be performed at night as to not effect operations.

Cost Management for developing and managing the project budget to ensure the project completed onbudget. Sentry proposes to hold monthly executive meetings on budgetary items to ensure the budget of the project stays on track. Throughout the project the use of specific cost control methods within Sentry’s ERP system are used to evaluate and report on the projects overall budgetary health.

Quality Management for Sentry is ensuring the process of quality assurances, quality control activities and milestones are met with each project. We do this by thorough testing at the Factory Acceptance Testing, Pre-Installation and Post-Installation phases on each device installed. Beginning with inspection of equipment upon arrival set up and pre-build of units before installation, standardized installation methods, to final installation and testing of the lane with lane acceptance test scripts are all examples of the quality control procedures that go into every installation we perform. We understand the COSM has rigorous Quality Control standards and we are very confident that not only do we meet those standards but will exceed them.

HR Management focuses on identifying the most qualified team members, support staff, and the training needed to support the project team. We use rigorous standards to develop a project team. As outlined in Section Three, we have chosen a team of experts in their industry to meet the COSM’s project needs.

Project Communication is one of the single most important aspects of managing a successful project.

Effective, timely communication of the project status and other key information is critical to project success.

This is why Sentry invests so much time in the communication plan through a clear concise process that shows an effective reporting structure and escalation process. Building a clear communications plan, using project control documents as part of the first stages of the planning process is key to the success of our projects.
51 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Project Risk Management identifies, validates and rates risks to the project overall success and project path to minimize or eliminate potential or foreseen risks to the project. Sentry then develops a proactive plan to minimize the likelihood and impact of the risk ever hitting the project.

Project Procurement Management defines the process for purchasing the products and equipment, services, general materials, resources for the project. We have a tried, true and tested methodology for Project Procurement starting with the review process by the Project Manager, submittal submission and approval and ending with actual procurement, all based on the COSM’s critical path schedule which are incorporated into the Master Project Schedule.

Stakeholder Management focuses on identifying and supporting all project stakeholders from the COSM to ensure effective stakeholder engagement and agreement. This is carried out by Sentry through various avenues of communication, whether it be phone, email, site visits, meetings, reports or shared web portals, we strive to provide all information to all COSM stakeholders in a timely and efficient manner.

Integration Management brings the areas above into a focus under a comprehensive Project Management approach. The COSM will find this exemplified in our solution approach and project schedule.

The designated Project Manager, will be responsible for submittals regardless of the original source, to review, approve, log, file, and transmit all submittals to COSM. Sentry will maintain a current Submittal Schedule and will ensure that all subcontractors and suppliers are timely with their submittals.

Sentry will also maintain a Submittal Status Log with an up-to-date status of each required submittal. Sentry will certify that each submittal is in compliance with all applicable plans and specifications. Additionally, the team proposes using a Submittal Data Sheet that includes the following:
 A unique submittal number, which remains with it throughout its existence and routing.  Revised submittals will carry the same number as the original, but will clearly state the Revision number and revision date.
 A description of the submittal, any deviations noted in the submittal will be highlighted.

The Sentry project management team will also review submittals returned by the COSM’s team. Sentry will maintain an up-to-date master-set of all shop, field, fabrication, and construction drawings and procedures from vendors, suppliers, subcontractors and company sources. Changes to shop, field, fabrication, and construction drawings and procedures will be transmitted, reviewed, and distributed to the applicable persons or organizations. The receipt and distribution of revised documents will be noted in the Document Distribution Log in the same manner as the original documents.

The Sentry team places great importance on how this project will be managed and documented to ensure accountability and transparency from the outset to ensure project deliverables are of the highest quality.

The project management team led by the Project Manager has the necessary skillsets and experience to provide the COSM with the personnel to successfully design, test, deactivate and phase out the existing PARCS equipment, and install PARCS solution that meet the specification objectives. 52 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

3. Describe existing PARCS removal and new PARCS installation will occur without ceasing existing operations.

Project Schedule
The current Sentry project schedule comprehends several phases within the deployment.

The schedule considers the following key phases:
 Contract Execution: Deposit for long lead items
 Critical design meetings
 Review of acceptance testing procedures
 Deployment of the central data management system
 System Installation and Training
 Acceptance testing
 Commencement of Warranty period
Sentry proposes to complete the scope of work determined once the schedule of completion of the required precursors and the deposit payment is received by Sentry. A comprehensive project Gantt chart, developed utilizing Critical Path Method scheduling techniques, incorporating designed float, and highlighting predecessors and dependencies will be delivered once this is agreed at contract.

Transition Plan
The Sentry team work to the following key components to ensure a successful transition:
 Prepare a training plan with the project team
 Prepare a lane acceptance testing and inspection plan  Prepare a system acceptance test plan and unit tests
The Sentry team’s project schedule considers the following key factors:
 Review of existing conditions, parking design and services  Migration of Account information into SKIDATA as required (by others)
 Factory acceptance testing of all equipment
 Installation of the new network, garage infrastructure and testing  Installation and testing of data servers
 Installation and testing of bank card servers connected to the clearing house  Installation of new PARCS hardware in the parking facility  Training of COSM staff on the SKIDATA PARCS solution
Depending upon the mutually agreed upon timeframe between Sentry and COSM, Sentry would recommend cutting over individual car parks and managing these with the existing system side by side. 53 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Execution Strategies
Sentry prides itself on providing the highest quality installation services. The Sentry team is highly experienced in installing SKIDATA hardware, software and any parking component. Typically, an Installation and Cutover Plan is provided including a providing a pre-construction checklist. Sentry verifies that the site is ready for equipment installation to ensure that any discrepancies between the actual conditions and the design conditions are brought to COSM’s attention.

Sentry do not recommend proceeding until any major discrepancies have been resolved. Sentry takes great care using the project schedule to ensure the availability of a maximum number of operable lanes to meet peak period activity.

This includes the exploration of any existing infrastructure that can be incorporated into the project. Once provided the Notice to Proceed a complete implementation strategy will be developed in conjunction with COSM, via a managed Project Gantt chart, which will consider, at least:
 Anticipated Duration of Design Phase
 Discovery and Evaluation of Existing—As-built conditions  Acceptance Testing of equipment
 Installation of any new network infrastructure and testing  Installation of new Data Servers and testing
 Installation of new Credit Card services and connection to clearinghouse  Coordination with the removal of the existing PARCS
 Installation of new field equipment and training
 Integration and development of other services as required  Assistance with communicating the transition to the new operation Experience working on other City projects has shown that Sentry will require to manage and involve multiple stakeholders to completely understand the exact needs of the COSM and to thoroughly provide a plan of activity that means the requirements of all, these needs are not necessary detailed in the documented RFP and will emerge with further engagement (e.g. COSM department heads, multi-layered ICT departments, Parking operations and contract arrangements, transport budget and black periods, planning and permits, other integrated technologies) requiring flexibility and knowledge of their interests in order to ensure a contribution which leads to ultimate success.

The project deliverables are per the pricing and requirements, noting that the RFP requirements are broad, in some areas contrasting and open ended. There will need to be greater definition of a final design and an understanding of what is to be delivered in the initial phase of the project. 54 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Installation Design
Sentry prides itself on providing the highest quality installation services.

The Sentry team are highly experienced in installing SKIDATA hardware, software and any parking component. Typically, an Installation and Cutover Plan is provided including a providing a pre-construction checklist. Sentry verifies that the site is ready for equipment installation to ensure that any discrepancies between the actual conditions and the design conditions are brought to COSM’s attention.

Sentry shall provide COSM as soon as contract award drawings of equipment installation which indicate details on all equipment installation, location, orientation, and electrical and communication connections.

These will be made available for COSM’s review and approval. Sentry typically also performs a site inspection to verify any construction cleanup at the completion of our construction activities. Sentry shall notify COSM at least forty-eight hours prior to conducting the postconstruction inspection.

Before installing any field equipment, Sentry will co-ordinate with COSM IT team to install all the SKIDATA application software on the data management system servers. Sentry will install at the direction of COSM. All SKIDATA applications will be installed at the data center locations that were identified by COSM during the design phase.

Equipment Installation
Sentry shall co-ordinate all lane closures with COSM management team and all the SKIDATA equipment will be installed to the highest levels of SKIDATA’s recommendations. Any site preparation or island construction will be coordinated and communicated with COSM team.

Before Sentry installs the first lane equipment, Sentry will install and configure the workstations and printers.

Sentry will confirm that all the parking office equipment will function properly and communicate with the SKIDATA PARCS network and is fully operational.

Equipment Field Testing
After the lane equipment has been installed, Sentry will perform its post-installation field test to confirm that the communication and functionality of all devices in the lane are operating as required. Prior to the first field test, Sentry will provide COSM with the field test script for each device so that COSM can review and approve.

The field test will include testing of all individual lane equipment, the communications network, the subsystem controllers, the computer, workstation and the core SKIDATA reports. At the conclusion of all the field testing, Sentry will provide COSM will all the results and each lane can remain close until after the successful completion of lane testing.
55 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Device Acceptance Testing
Assuming the post-installation testing phase performs as expected, Sentry will assist COSM in performing the device acceptance test for each lane. Sentry has an extensive list of unit tests that can be reviewed in further detail at each location prior to going live. Sentry will assist in this process by providing one member of the team will full knowledge of the devices to assist with any issues that may arise. Sentry will also assist by providing the required number of test tickets, test media and test credentials per COSM’s requests.

After a successful device acceptance test, COSM can commission the device and open for public use. COSM may be prudent to reserve the right for the device to operate for a specified period of time prior to releasing other lanes for installation.

System Acceptance Testing
Depending on any other acceptance testing provided by COSM, Sentry will perform operational acceptance tests to operate the complete system for after all of the project has been completed. Sentry will record all the test data and provide COSM with a continuous log of system performance.

Training Approach
Sentry’s training department will provide a comprehensive training program and outline for COSM’s personnel on all hardware and software related topics of the PARCS. Standard training manuals used by Sentry will be tailored to meet COSM’s needs. It is our experience that manufacturer materials typically often prove to provide too much information and therefore are submitted along with a recommended abridged version written by Sentry that will be tailored for COSM.

Each trainee will be provided with a printout of the documentation, handouts and manuals covered in the respective training class. Sentry recommends training be held in its own offices where a full complement of items is specifically set up and available.

Sentry recommends that all operational decisions are made prior to the beginning of training and that an administrator is present at all classes of supervisor and maintenance personnel to provide feedback to operational questions to it employees that are not related to the functionality training of the PARCS.

Sentry will work with COSM on the appropriate training start and end times. Sentry’s training hours are typically Monday to Friday from 8 am to 6 pm local time but can be adjusted to COSM’s needs. Sentry proposes the training course to be undertaken two weeks prior to ‘Go Live’ during the first phase with any remedial training provided during Go Live.
56 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

5. As a separate sub section to the installation schedule, provide a Data Conversion Plan.

In the instance where registered parking accounts need to be converted, typically COSM will send their legacy data in one or more spreadsheets. The format is not necessarily important, so long as we can clearly identify the Account data (name, address, email, phone, etc.), the Parker data (name, maybe card number, billing rate, maybe license plates, etc.), and which Account each Parker belongs to. A lot of times, there will be one spreadsheet with Account information and one with Parker information, and Account Number appears in both spreadsheets (so details can be linked.) Once data is received in the correct format, Integrapark turn it into a format that Paris knows how to load it can be done within 24 hours. There are other processes which can be applied to allow this to be done in house where protecting information may be a concern. Paris can be added if the City does not already have a license.
a. Plan shall detail how each parking garage or lot will be brought on line with the new PARCS while the “yet to be converted” lots and garages continue operations under the current system.

At a more granular level, here are more detailed transition plan steps for a garage include.  Inspection and discovery of the suitability of existing conditions  Install the following components:
o SKIDATA software
o Firewall and switches
o Intercom server
o Antivirus software
 Connect to the server and test for at least 7 days before ‘Go Live’  Commence training parking staff on transitioning cardholder database o Parking staff will build the cardholder database with cardholder information  Work with COSM’s management on how best to inform customer of the day to day operational transition.  Pull all data cable to the POF machine locations and lane locations as required  Install POF machines and test (where the existing location replaces a POF, this is to be coordinated to minimize disruption.)
Ideally, Sentry crews will be on-site continuously to perform the following:
 Provide preparatory lane works.
 Close down one lane in each area at a time, and leave the adjacent lanes open for customers.  Remove existing and Install new SKIDATA gate then test the loops.  Remove existing and Install the new Exit or Entry Column  When one lane is complete, Sentry will cover the lane until ‘Go Live’.

As we move towards ‘Go Live’, the Sentry team will train the parking staff in preparation. When all the lanes have the SKIDATA equipment installed, the system will undergo full acceptance testing and move towards the agreed ‘Go Live’ date. At the ‘Go Live’ date, the following actions will occur by the Sentry team:
57 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
 On the day of the ‘Go Live’, the Sentry team will be on-site to turn on the SKIDATA POF machines  Sentry training team will be on-site during the ‘Go Live’ to instruct the parking team and do on-the-job training.
 Operations staff are to be available to communicate and manage the transition  Locations which have no redundant lanes and are operating in tandem at the site level can be managed to cut-over during the late hour (e.g. 2am), quietest day in order to minimize the number of outstanding tickets.

Preceding the transition, COSM should be pro-active in their communications to parkers of the forthcoming change and use the shift as an opportunity to engage with the parking public on any other audit or parking concern.
b. Plan shall discuss how both systems shall run in tandem until such a time that the news PARCS can take full control of all facilities.

The most important factor is COSM's predetermined priorities based on the least disruption to customers, fast transition and the most efficient project completion.

As outlined in the schedule, after the contract and procurement period begins, we will engage all parties to coordinate with civil, electrical, network requirements with the COSM’s relevant departments and related parties to define responsibilities and timelines. The COSM will need to permit the works.

For this project, the installation sequence is straight-forward with server and network first, lane equipment exchange and the pay on foot terminals installed at the end, testing as we progress. Sentry can step through many alternative suggestions to align with operational needs and methods to prevent customer confusion.

As we install, the lane devices we will bring online with the server for testing and acceptance as outlined in the schedule. If applicable and as specific locations conditions allow, existing PARCS can operate in parallel while the site is being installed. If there is to be planned disruption, this will be agreed early on for alternative means of access and revenue control to be in place for the outage window.

Where practical, after the Server and POFs are online at each site, lanes are installed sequentially and where possible alternative lanes are left in operation, so there is always a way to enter or exit the car park, regardless of the system you are using. For a full-cut over, some locations allow the lanes to be installed side by side and covered over, awaiting a late night go-live.

Where lanes cannot be closed at a particular location (e.g. a one entry and one exit garage or for some other another reason) once Server and POFs are installed, then Entries are converted during the evening, ready for the next day’s entries and the Exits are bought online during the morning to minimize the number of parkers with old ticket stock.

There are many specific tactics which are largely determined by COSM requirements and can be workshopped as final sequencing is determined.
58 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

6. Exceptions and Substitutions
Sentry’s proposal contains the following declarations where not otherwise stated. # Reference Clause Exception taken Proposal
SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION
1 RFP Page
46 B. Liquidated
Damages
Item 1. is restrictive and
responsibility can rest
with 3rd Party systems
and operators. Does
not consider the role of
minimization of loss by
failing over to alternate
means to operate.

If a service contract is signed,
Sentry can agree to response
time and the withholding of a
portion of monthly fee for
responses which do not meet
the agreed SLA.

Item 3. does not
consider a specialist
parts, new manufacture
or response required for
damage by accident,
mis-use etc.

Sentry recommends an available
parts list to be agreed.

Customer can rely on Sentry's
local warehouse, advanced part
replacement strategies.
2 RFP Page
47 F. Payment
Terms
Terms are request in
this clause. States "If
there are any
problems, operational
dissatisfaction, and/or
glitches before the
completion of the ninety
(90) - day period, the
count of days will restart
with day one (1) until a
full ninety (90)-day cycle
is completed without
problems in order to
release the final
payment.”
Deposit Check (50%) - On
Contact Signing
Installation Ready (30%) – Once
the Equipment is installation
ready, an invoice will be issued
Substantial Completion (10%) -
As the project Go-Live is
reached, the final invoice will be
issued.

We propose this updated
language: “If there are any
material problems, operational
dissatisfaction, and/or glitches
before the completion of the
ninety (90) - day period, the
count of days will restart with
day one (1) until a full ninety
(90)-day cycle is completed
without problems in order to
release the final payment.” We
are aiming to specifically
exclude common Operational
challenges associated with an
Operator's responsibilities.
59 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Technical
# Reference Clause Proposal
1 4. WARRANTY A Warranty will be extended to currently
possessed CoSM SKIDATA components
following inspection and certification by
Sentry.
2 A Each garage Warranty will start from their
first day of beneficial use or final acceptance,
whichever comes first.
3 5. ADD
ALTERNATE:

Extended
Warranty
The fee presented is a commercial estimate
allowing reasonable market comparison, but
cannot be guaranteed beyond 5 years.

7. DESIGN CRITERIA
4 B.2 This cannot be priced.
5 B.6 There is a range of requirement and scope
not clearly defined for this element - who,
what, where.
6 D.3 In accordance with the Amendment
responses, Sentry is proposing Payment
Express EMV terminals as a superior P2PE
solution, the option for Six Card exits.
8 D. 4 Sentry offers the priced option to install EMV
and separately can price options for NFC.
9 D.7 This remains an open item to be specified by
the City.
10 A
III) Sentry has provided reader for cards and
barcodes, but this remains an open item to
explore as it requires input, testing and
management by Third Parties.
d.
e.
11 Invoicing
Package
Sentry can supply pricing for the IntegraPark
PARIS system, if still required, once the
operation is fully defined.
12 B1 Lane Columns are IP43 rated and Easy.Cash
shelter if outside.
13 C1. May not provide audible instructions
throughout transaction process
60 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

12. BARRIER GATES
14 A. Sentry will use gate lengths and bollards
suitable for the lane.
15 G. SKIDATA barriers are design not to autoraise to avoid tail-gating, including manual raising by person.
16 Other Design Permits and Internet access to be
responsibility of the City.
17 Daktronics SKIDATA has a proven integration which can be priced
18 PC-DSS PCI PA-DSS Compliance – unknowable costs
of future compliance cannot be calculated
and the scope of PCI is to be agreed between
COSM IT, Operator and Sentry during the
design phase.
19 Existing Stock The existing (used) SKIDATA equipment owned and stored by COSM is assumed to
be re-used, if these are assessed to be
defective a change order for reconditioning
/ replacement will be issued.
20 Existing Datapark Assumption is existing system is to be rubbished by Sentry to its most efficient
way, if COSM requires careful preservation
or other disposal, this will need to be
priced.
21 Network Accces COSM IT must provide open firewall access and not delay Sentry’s scheduled works.

Delays will add cost to COSM.
61 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
The sequence of the following requested items is re-ordered for a consistent narrative.

6. Detailed price sheet with itemized costs

7. Detailed price list for on-going fees or subscription based services

13. List manufacturer of each primary component of system Please refer to separate price quotation

14. Recommended spare parts list w/pricing.

PARCS EQUIPMENT Quantity Unit Price Extended Price
Gate Arm 5 $505 $2,525
Sheer Bolts 100 $5 $500
POF Spare Cash Box 6 $1,209 $7,254
QR/2D reader 2 $2,900 $5,800
Coder Unlimited 2 $8,858 $17,716
Coder Unlimited feeder+ 2 $1,612 $3,224
SPARE PARTS TOTAL $37,019
ADD/ALTERNATE 10-year Extended Maintenance
Refer to agreement from 2013 and attached pricing.
62 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

8. Warranty/Extended Warranty/Service Agreement.

M. Warranty: Submit a copy of Warranty and clear details of procedures in the event of failure and instances that may affect validity or limitations of warranty.

Sentry Control Systems Warrants that all SKIDATA manufactured Parking and Revenue Control Systems (PARCS) provided by Sentry and delivered hereunder will be free of defects in material and workmanship for the period agreed. The purchaser shall be obligated to promptly report any failure to conform to this warranty, in written communication within said period, whereupon Sentry Control Systems shall, at its option, correct such nonconformity, by suitable repair to such product or, furnish replacements parts provided the purchaser has stored, installed, maintained and operated such product in accordance with good industry practices and has complied with specific recommendations of Sentry Control Systems. Accessories or products furnished by Sentry Control Systems and manufactured by others than SKIDATA shall carry whatever warranty the manufacturers have conveyed to Sentry Control Systems and which are passed on to the purchaser. Sentry Control Systems shall not be liable for any repairs, replacements, or adjustments to the product or any costs of labor performed by the purchaser or others without Sentry Control Systems’ prior written consent. The effects of corrosion, vandalism, improper use or installation, any act of God and normal wear and tear are specifically excluded. The purchaser shall not operate product which is considered to be defective without first notifying Sentry Control Systems in written communication of its intentions to do so.

Any such use of product will be at the purchasers’ sole risk and liability.

Refer to attached 8. SKIDATA Warranty

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
The response center is the initial point of contact for all service incidents. Initial service call is to be logged by the client’s representative with Sentry. Where condition is covered by Warranty, part will be repaired onsite, replaced with a working spare and returned for repair, depending on the service contract. In order to expedite a response, the following details should be supplied to Sentry when registering a service request.  Client Name, Customer or Contract Number, Client Contact (Name and Number/s)  Problem Description, to include lane/equipment details  Site specific details
 Required Response time, relative to defined priority of the service request  Client reference number or Purchase Order number (if applicable) In response, Sentry will provide client with:
 The technicians estimated time of arrival (ETA)
 The service request number confirming receipt of job
 Each completed service request will be accompanied by a job sheet detailing the contact, time and description of work carried out
Where it is possible to investigate an issue remotely, COSM will be notified of any online diagnostic results, provided the immediate solution and/or have it scheduled to be applied onsite. 63 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

9. Report samples.

D. Sample reports as defined throughout this document.

SKIDATA is strong on Auditing and has a range of ways to customize reports - refer to electronic attachments 9 for examples and the 2013 reply.

Daily Report
64 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Monthly Report
65 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

10. Sample training program.

N. Training Plan: Submit a comprehensive training plan.

Sentry’s training department will provide a comprehensive training program and outline for COSM’s personnel on all hardware and software related topics of the PARCS. Standard training manuals used by Sentry will be tailored to meet COSM’s needs. Each trainee will be provided with a printout of the documentation, handouts and manuals covered in the respective training class. Sentry recommends training be held in a classroom environment to achieve the best knowledge transfer. Sentry requests COSM HQ to provide a proper training location, which can host up to ten trainees per class or Sentry offers facilities in Van Nuys to travel to. The location requires network access to the PARCS so training can be performed using the installed equipment.

Sentry will work with COSM on the appropriate training start and end times, the number of participant and their roles will have determined the duration and class structure. In the instance where more training is required that the proposed or at a different time, then Sentry can schedule further sessions against an hourly rate. Sentry’s training hours are typically Monday to Friday from 8 am to 6 pm local time and can be adjusted to COSM’s needs.
2 Weeks Prior to Go Live

MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY
System Managers Class Supervisors Class - Maintenance Class 8 am -12 pm 9 am – 12 pm 9 am – 12 pm
1 pm - 5 pm 1 pm - 3 pm 1 pm – 3 pm
Total 8 hours Total 5 hours Total 5 hours
Sentry will submit a list of trainee’s who participated in the training class and shall inform COSM of all tasks covered. A custom certification program for COSM’s Maintenance Staff can be arranged upon request. During the Certification program, each trainee will be subject to a pass/fail certification test over the covered material. After the Go-Live the training team is available to respond to Operational enquiries and to refresh trainees on areas they may not immediately recall, in order to ensure the first days are as uninterrupted as possible.

Training Outline
Below are sample training outlines of the training topics to be covered for the following positions:
 Management staff
 Supervisor staff
 Maintenance staff
The content, group and structure will be tailored to suit the operational needs to the COSM. 66 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Management Staff Training
It is the most comprehensive of the training groups. It will focus on an overview of the system, a walkthrough of all the features available and their usage. Topics include:
 Terms and Definitions
o General Computer Terms
o SKIDATA Terms
 Pay Station (Cashier Screen)
o Logging On
o Shift Float
o Processing a Parking Ticket
o Manual Credit Card Payments
o Manually Selecting a Validation
o Producing a New Short Term
Parking Ticket
o Producing a “Lost Ticket”
o Replacing a Damaged Ticket
o Issuing a Belated Receipt
o Reading a Ticket or Permanent
Card
o Logging Off
 Main Menu - Money
o Reports
o Validations
o Cash Flow
o Shift Report
o Statistics
 Main Menu - Customers
o Customer Administration
o Present Cards
o Parking Movements
o Validation Provider
 Main Menu – Settings
o Parking Facility
o Pay Stations
o Automatic Payment Machine
o Articles
o Rate Management
o Holidays/Shopping Days
 Main Menu – Credit Cards and Debit Cards
o Account Settlement
o Present Credit Cards
o Parking Movement
 Main Menu – System
o Staff
o System Journal
o System Events
o File Synchronization
 Control Center
o Remote Barrier Control
o Adjusting Car Park Counters
 Report – Auditing
o Revenue Report – Revenue
Categories
o Revenue Report – Payment
Method
o Net Revenue Report
o Sales Report
o Payment Method Report
o Validation Report
o System Totals Report
o Car Park Balance Sheet
o Parking Duration Report
o Theoretical Revenue Report
o Fee Group Analysis Report
 Hardware Directions
 Monthly Maintenance
 Diagnosing & Resolving Common Faults
o Ticket Jam
o Coin Jam
o Barrier Break
o Emergency Mode
o Ticket Out
o Barrier Stuck Upright
o MBNC Removed
o MCC Removed
o PDL Activated
o Bank Note Tester Defective
o Barcode Unreadable/Defective or
Damaged Ticket
o Miss Used Ticket
o Printer Head Defective
o Key Products Only
o Out of Order
67 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Supervisor Training
This training is a selection from the management training curriculum that is determined by the experience of our training staff. It also includes many of the management topics and cashier topics.  Terms and Definitions
o General Computer Terms
o SKIDATA Terms
 Pay Station (Cashier Screen)
o Logging On
o Shift Float
o Processing a Parking Ticket
o Manual Credit Card Payments
o Manually Selecting a Validation
o Producing a New Short Term
Parking Ticket
o Producing a “Lost Ticket”
o Replacing a Damaged Ticket
o Issuing a Belated Receipt
o Reading a Ticket or Permanent
Card
o Logging Off
 Main Menu - Money
o Reports
o Cash Flow
o Shift Report
 Main Menu - Customers
o Customer Administration
o Present Cards
o Parking Movements
 Main Menu – System
o Staff
o System Journal
o System Events
o File Synchronization
 Control Center
o Remote Barrier Control
o Adjusting Car Park Counters
Hardware Directions:
 Monthly Maintenance
 Diagnosing & Resolving Common Faults
o Ticket Jam
o Coin Jam
o Barrier Break
o Emergency Mode
o Ticket Out
o Barrier Stuck Upright
o MBNC Removed
o MCC Removed
o PDL Activated
o Bank Note Tester Defective
o Barcode Unreadable/Defective or
Damaged Ticket
o Miss Used Ticket
o Printer Head Defective
o Key Products Only
o Out of Order
68 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
Maintenance Training
Maintenance training covers the physical components of the PARC solution. It includes the fundamental components of the system, common troubleshooting, and daily maintenance.  SKIDATA operator Monthly Maintenance
o Data Central (DAU) and Cashier Workstations
o Entry and Exit Columns
o Barrier Units
o Automatic Payment Machines
 Diagnosing & Resolving Common Faults
o Ticket Jam
o Coin Jam
o Barrier Break
o Emergency Mode
o Ticket Out
o Barrier Stuck Upright
o MBNC Removed
o MCC Removed
o PDL Activated
o Bank Not Tester Defective
o Barcode Unreadable
o Miss Used Ticket
o Hopper Time out
o Hopper Min
o Hopper Max
o Hopper Empty
o Ticket Shortage
o Printer Head Defective
o Key Products Only
o Out of Order

Follow up training and any additional training required will be identified during the training process. It is expected that needs may be identified during this process that should be addressed with additional training.

Sentry anticipates this need and is prepared to add classes or modify the curriculum when needed. 69 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

11. Sample punch list.

In addition, refer also to attached 11, for an example Daily Safety Log and an example Daily Progress Log. 70 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

12. List of Sub-Contractors.

K. List of sub-contractors, identifying nature of work.

1. DEDICATED PROJECT MANAGER
James Maglothin, P.E., PMP
James is the President and founding member of 20/20 Parking Consultants, LLC. 20/20 is a specialty consulting firm that provides an array of services related to the recommendation, design, and implementation of automated parking technologies and systems that increase customer service, operational efficiency, and parking program profitability.

James is proficient in all aspects of the project life cycle related to the successful implementation of state-of-theart parking technologies including system analysis and recommendation, cost estimating, financial feasibility, preparation of functional specifications, Request for Proposal package development, contract negotiation and award services, project management, construction administration, and acceptance testing. He has expertise in the design of parking-related civil, communication, and electrical infrastructure as well as construction administration during the execution of the designs.

Prior to founding 20/20, James served as the Director of Car Park Management Systems for Walker Parking Consultants, Inc., leading Walker’s national and global business sectors focused on off-street parking technology consulting. Prior to Walker he served as an Associate/Senior Project Manager for Kimley-Horn & Associates, Inc. focusing on recommendation, design and project management of complex parking technology implementations.

2. OPTIONAL ELECTRICAL
The use of subcontractors is not envisaged, however, we may engage Berg Electric (310) 337-1377 for electrical services.

14. 2013 Reply
Attached in electronic form is a copy of the 2013 – items in the 2016 reply take precedence were relevant. 71 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence

15. List of Attachments
Where practical Sentry has included supporting hard-copy materials, more extensive material, such as manuals are provided in electronic edition only for ease of review.

1. Financials (Electronic Only)
2013 Sentry Statements
2014 Sentry Statements
2015 Sentry Statements
2015 Kudelski (SKIDATA AG)
4a1. Data Submittals (Electronic Only)

1. Power.Gate

2. Axis P1204 Pinhole

3. UPS VA 500

4. UPS 1000

5.PX_SCR200

6.PX_Ingenico_IPP350

7.RP 58100

8. Prox-ii-cards

9. CoderBasic-Unlimited-Desktop

10. DoorReader

11.Commend GE300

12. CreditCash

13.EasyCash

14. BarrierGate

15.Cisco DataSheet

16.Endpoint

17.HP_DL380

18.PX_BRF210
19a. sweb eVAL explainer
19b. swebValidate

6. Pricing Offer
SKIDATA Pricing

8. Warranty (Electronic Only)
SKIDATA Warranty

9. Reports and Auditing Manuals (Electronic Only)
Administrative_Manual
Cashier Workbook
Reporting_Manual
Supervisor Workbook
ParkingLogic-Software-Modules
72 | P a g e
Commercial in Confidence
ParkingLogic-Articles
Reports
Customisable Reports
Report Samples Folder

11. Sample punch list (Electronic Only)
Example Daily Progress Log
Example Daily Safety Log

14. 2013 Reply (Electronic only)

COSM RFP

15. Mandatory Bid Forms
Executed forms.

Investment Summary
July 28, 2016
Quote Valid for 30 Days
Corporate HQ: Mid-Atlantic Office:
6611 Odessa Ave 21580 Beaumeade Circle, Suite 210
Van Nuys CA, 91406 Ashburn VA, 20147
Phone: (800) 246-6662 Phone: (202) 448-8954
Fax: (818) 786-2910
www.sentrycontrol.com
Purchasing Agreement with Terms & Conditions:
• Installation includes mounting equipment listed on the attached equipment list. Sentry will assemble and test the system and will verify that it operates properly. • Document Table “SENTRY CONTROL SYSTEMS’ SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES” defines Sentry’s responsibilities • Sentry will provide training as well as commissioning services associated with the items on this proposal. Additional training can be scheduled and will be provided at the rate of $950.00 per day. Initial Here:_____
• The cost of required permits is not included in this proposal. Initial Here:_____ • Payment Terms:The deposit stated above is due upon acceptance of this proposal. You will be billed Net 30 as equipment is delivered to Sentry, with the balance due upon completion. A cancellation or restocking charge of 40% may be assessed on cancelled orders. Special order items may carry up to 100% cancellation/restocking fee based on factory return policies. • This proposal is covered under the Mechanics Lien Laws. • Warranty commences on the date Sentry receives materials from the parts supplier. Initial Here:_____ • A performance bond is Required.
• Pricing Does Not include PLA—Union Labor Rates. Pricing Does include Prevailing Wage Labor Rates. Initial Here:_____ • Invoices not paid within the terms of this proposal are subject to Service Charges at the rate of 2.0% per month. In the event outside mediation is necessary for the collection of an unpaid invoice, the customer is responsible for collection costs and reasonable attorney's fees. • All Images are for display purposes only. Actual image may vary from options selected. • Purchaser covenants and agrees that it will fully and strictly comply with the acknowledgement documents and with all protocols and licenses outlined in the acknowledgement documents, as they may be amended by sentry and affiliated parties from time to time. Acknowledgement documents can be viewed at this HYPERLINK, whose address or destination folder may be changed from time to time. Initial Here: ___

SENTRY CONTACT CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Mike Brill
(818) 381-5226
[email protected]
Accepted By: Date:

Print Name: Sentry Approved By:

PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name: CITY OF SANTA MONICA - REINSTALL SKIDATA Asset Operator:

Account Name: CITY OF SANTA MONICA Asset Manager:

Proposal #: 164402 Asset Owner:

BILLING INFORMATION SHIPPING INFORMATION
City of Santa Monica
1717 4th Street #105
Santa Monica, CA 90401
City of Santa Monica
1717 4th Street #105
Santa Monica, CA 90401

LIMITED WARRANTY INVESTMENT SUMMARY
Warranty on Labor (Months):

Warranty on Parts (Months):
12 12
Total System Investment:

Deposit Amount:
$ 2,428,563
$ 1,214,282

SERVICE & MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (MONTHLY)
HTTP://WWW.SENTRYCONTROL.COM/SERVICES
Equipment:

Sales Tax:

Labor:

Freight:

Sub-Contracted Total:

Wage or Insurance Premiums:
$ 1,741,144
$ 157,248
$ 251,700
$ 29,222
$ 131,250
$ 76,499

SEE ATTACHED MAINTENANCE

PRICING

Page 2 of 10 ends

PAY ON FOOT STATION

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE

FULL SERVICE EASY CASH POF WITH HID
• 1. License, SQL 2008 SRV-CAL/V2, MS SQL
• 2. SFTW MS XP Embedded - Order with SKIDATA PC's only • 3. POF Easy.Cash Rack
• 4. POF-EC Bank Note Reader & Recycler
• 5. POF-EC Coder Unlimited
• 6. POF-EC Coder Unlimited Feeder+
• 7. POF-EC Crosswise Barcode
• 8. POF-EC Easy Cash Basic Unit (3-Color) - Order with 946010324
• 9. POF-EC Mag Stripe Reader (1 way)
• 10. Hardware LVPs
• 11. Weigand converter board for SKIDATA
• 12. ProxPoint Reader, Wiegand Output (Beige)
• 13. Hopperset for US
• 14. WEB KEY Unmanaged Setup Kit (Incl: 1 Grand Master Key, 2 User Keys, Configuration/Setup)
• 15. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse
$ 42,077 8 $ 336,616

CREDIT CARD ONLY POF
• 1. Basic Unit Credit.Cash V3
• 2. POF-CC Coder Unlimited
• 3. POF-CC Coder Feeder+
• 4. POF-CC Mag Stripe Reader (1 way)
• 5. POF-CC Crosswise Barcode
• 6. POF Credit.Cash Rack
• 7. License, SQL 2008 SRV-CAL/V2, MS SQL
• 8. SFTW MS XP Embedded - Order with SKIDATA PC's only • 9. Software Module LVPs
• 10. WEB KEY Unmanaged Setup Kit (Incl: 1 Grand Master Key, 2 User Keys, Configuration/Setup)
• 11. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse
$ 22,348 4 $ 89,392

Page 3 of 10 ends

LANE EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
EXIT POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID
• 1. Power.Gate-EXIT
• 2. CO UNLIMITED BU
• 3. CO UNLIMITED FEED+
• 4. CO UNLIMITED BC C
• 5. CO UNLIMITED 1x2 MAG
• 6. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Touchscreen 7"
• 7. Hardware LVPs
• 8. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 9. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 10. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 11. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 12. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 13. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 14. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 15. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 17,351 19 $ 329,676
EXIT POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID (HOUSING ONLY)
• 1. Power.Gate-EXIT
• 2 Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Touchscreen 7"
• 3. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 4. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 5. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 6. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 7. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 8. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 9. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 10. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 8,195 12 $ 98,340
ENTRY POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID
• 1. Power.Gate-ENTRY
• 2. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 3. CO UNLIMITED BU
• 4. CO UNLIMITED FEED
• 5. CO UNLIMITED BC C
• 6. CO UNLIMITED 1x2 MAG
• 7. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Graphic Display 7"
• 8. Hardware LVPs
• 9. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 10. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 11. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 12. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 13. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 14. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 15. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 15,871 12 $ 190,456
ENTRY POWER.GATE COLUMN UNLIMITED, HID (HOUSING ONLY)
• 1. Power.Gate-ENTRY
• 2. Power.Gate Ticket Tray - Small
• 3. Power.Gate/ Lite.Gate Graphic Display 7"
• 4. Power.Gate User Interface Illuminated
• 5. Power.Gate /Lite.Gate contour stripe illuminated
• 6. Power.Gate Interface extension large
• 7. Power.Gate Intercom analog
• 8. Power.Gate/Lite.Gate lock keyed the same
• 9. HID Proxpoint Plus
• 10. 12vdc, 1 amp, Reg. Adapter
$ 7,472 8 $ 59,776
POWER.GATE PRINT@HOME $ 1,597 51 $ 81,447

Page 4 of 10 ends

Corporate HQ: Mid-Atlantic Office:
6611 Odessa Ave 21580 Beaumeade Circle, Suite 210
Van Nuys CA, 91406 Ashburn VA, 20147
Phone: (800) 246-6662 Phone: (202) 448-8954
Fax: (818) 786-2910
www.sentrycontrol.com
BARRIER.GATE-ADA NON-ILLUMINATED
• 1 AC-Barrier.Gate-BASIC-US x (1)
• 2 AC-Barrier.Gate-CABLE-LOOPDE x (1)
• 3 AC-Barrier.Gate-DET x (1)
• 4 AC-Barrier.Gate-F-BOOM 2.5-2.34 x (1)
$ 4,028 40 $ 161,108
BARRIER.GATE-STANDARD ILLUMINATED 10'
• 1 AC-Barrier.Gate-BASIC-US x (1)
• 2 AC-Barrier.Gate-CABLE-LOOPDE x (1)
• 3 AC-Barrier.Gate-DET x (1)
• 4 AC-Barrier.Gate-BOOM YELLOW 3.0 x (1)
$ 3,734 11 $ 41,071
RDR DOOR READER W/ INTERCOM $ 3,169 8 $ 25,352

MOUNTING PLATE FOR COLUMNS & GATES
• 1. Mounting Plate - Lane Equipment x (1.00)
$ 231 102 $ 23,562
CO UNLIMITED BC C $ 207 45 $ 9,315

POINT-OF-SALE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
REPLACEMENT SKIDATA PAY ON FOOT BASEBOARD $ 3,267 35 $ 114,345

SKIDATA DESKTOP CODER UNLIMITED
• 1. DT Desktop Coder Unlimited x (1.00)
• 2. DT Crosswise Barcode x (1.00)
• 3. DT Mag Stripe Reader (1 way) x (1.00)
• 4. Hardware LVPs x (5.00)
$ 11,640 4 $ 46,560

EMV CREDIT CARD ACCEPTANCE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE

PAYMENT EXPRESS UNATTENDED EMV READER - CARD INSERT
SCR200 BUNDLE
• 1. Payment Express SCR 200
• 2. Payment Express UPT200 -Linux converter
• 3. Payment Express Activation Fee per terminal for Secure Card Reader 200
$ 658 78 $ 51,324
PAYMENT EXPRESS ATTENDED EMV READER WITH PINPAD (IPP350) • 1. Payment Express Ingenico iPP350 Series PINpad
• 2. Payment Express Activation Fee per terminal for IPP350 Terminal
$ 592 7 $ 4,144

ACCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
PINHOLE CAMERA $ 330 98 $ 32,340

Page 5 of 10 ends

SERVER/NETWORK EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
HP 5810 PC BUNDLE
• 1. HP5810 I5-4570S
• 2. Hard Drive , HP 500GB, SATA-600
• 3. 4GB Memory for HP5810
• 4. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional
$ 1,628 24 $ 39,060
APC RACK MOUNT -UPS 1500VA USB 2U $ 924 18 $ 16,632

KEYBOARD, MONITOR, MOUSE
• 1. MON Flat Screen Monitor 17" x (1.00)
• 2. USB Keyboard w/ Mouse x (1.00)
$ 158 8 $ 1,262
CABLE, BELDEN 4PR/CAT5/PL/BLUE $ 1 210 $ 107
CABLE, BELDEN 4PR/CAT5/PL/BLUE $ 1 200 $ 102
LICENSE, SYMANTEC ENDPOINT, 1YR, (1-24) $ 53 70 $ 3,710 LASER PRINTER $ 203 1 $ 203

ACCESS CARDS AND TAGS

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
RS2 HID PROXCARD II $ 3 2000 $ 6,000

ACCESSORIES / OTHER

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
SCAN OF DECK (NON-DESTRUCTIVE) $ 792 3 $ 2,376

SOFTWARE

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY EXTENDED TOTAL PRICE
HARDWARE LVPS CREDIT FOR EXISTING EQUIPMENT $ 289 -80 -$ 23,120 OPTIONAL ITEMS: INTERCOM

SENTRY PLANS TO USE THE EXISTING INTERCOMS

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
Commend GE300 5-8 Subscribers with Tel Card
• 1. G3 GE 300 IP-Intercom Server x (1.00)
• 2. G3 - Intercom subscriber card G3-GET-4B x (2.00)
• 3. G3 - License upgrade G3 GET-4B to G3-GET-4P x (1.00) • 4. Desk Station, Handset 6 Digit alphanumeric Display x (1.00)
• 5. G3 Telephone Interface Card x (1.00)
10 $ 85,269
Commend GE300 9-12 Subscribers with Tel Card
• 1. G3 GE 300 IP-Intercom Server x (1.00)
• 2. G3 - Intercom subscriber card G3-GET-4B x (3.00)
• 3. G3 - License upgrade G3 GET-4B to G3-GET-4P x (1.00) • 4. Desk Station, Handset 6 Digit alphanumeric Display x (1.00)
• 5. G3 Telephone Interface Card x (1.00)
4 $ 39,451

Page 6 of 10 ends

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
Payment Express BRF210 Contactless Antenna 85 $ 33,406
OPTIONAL ITEMS: SERVER/NETWORK EQUIPMENT

CITY TO PROVIDE SERVERS BASED ON SENTRY SPEC

PRICING IS LUMPSUM & INCLUDES APPLICABLE TAXES, LABOR, & FREIGHT

PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL PRICE
HP DL380 large scale Server with VM ware 2 $ 25,495

Page 7 of 10 ends

SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SUB-CONTRACTORS SENTRY WILL HIRE & MANAGE SUB-CONTRACTOR NAME:

SENTRY CONTROL SYSTEMS

SUB-CONTRACTOR TRADES SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY SUBTOTAL
PROJECT MANAGEMENT $ 120,000
PERFORMANCE BOND $ 11,250
SENTRY CONTROL SYSTEMS’ SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. LABOR TO RE-INSTALL THE NEW EXISTING COLUMNS AND PAY ON FOOT STATIONS SENTRY

2. CUSTOM SCOPE ITEM SENTRY

3. ALL 115 VAC POWER AT SENTRY SPECIFIED LOCATIONS AND CONNECTION OF SAME. SENTRY

4. ALL FINAL WIRING TERMINATIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS OR CONTROL CABLE ON SENTRY PROVIDED EQUIPMENT.

SENTRY

5. ALL NEW CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING AND JUNCTION BOXES AS SPECIFIED BY SENTRY. SENTRY

6. ALL REQUIRED LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATION OR CONTROL CABLE AND INSTALLATION OF SAME. SENTRY

7. THIS PROPOSAL ASSUME THAT THE EXISTING POF STATIONS, ENTRY AND EXIT COLUMNS ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER. ANY PARTS OR REPAIRS NEEDED IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PROPOSAL.

SENTRY

8. FINAL SYSTEM TESTING AND CHECKOUT. ALL OPERATIONAL TESTING. SENTRY

9. ON-SITE TRAINING OF THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO PROPERLY OPERATE THE INSTALLED SYSTEM.

SENTRY

10. SENTRY WILL REINSTALL THE EXISTING PAY ON FOOT STATIONS (29 FULL SERVICE AND 6 CREDIT

CARD ONLY) SENTRY ASSUMES THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER, ANY REPAIRS NEEDED ARE NOT

INCLUDED IN THE PROPOSAL
SENTRY

11. SENTRY WILL REINSTALL THE EXISTING 460 UNLIMITED CODERS INTO THE NEW HOUSINGS SENTRY

ASSUMES THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER, ANY REPAIRS NEEDED ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE

PROPOSAL
SENTRY

PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK & CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. EXISTING CONDUIT IS USABLE. CRUSHED, DAMAGED, OR UNUSABLE CONDUIT WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE ORDER BILLED AT TIME & MATERIALS, OR SUB-CONTRACTOR COST PLUS 20%, WHICHEVER IS LESS.

CUSTOMER

2. INTERNET ACCESS AT SERVER LOCATION CUSTOMER

3. NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS AND ALL SWITCHES BETWEEN THE SERVER AND ALL CAR PARKS CUSTOMER

EXCLUSIONS FROM PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES

SCOPE DESCRIPTION SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY

1. OBTAINING REQUIRED PERMITS. (FEES ASSOCIATED WITH THE PERMITS ARE EXTRA). EXCLUSIONS

2. SENTRY WILL PULL NEW COMMUNICATIONS CABLE THROUGH THE EXISTING CONDUIT. IF THE CONDUIT

PATH IS CRUSHED, DAMAGED OR FULL AND NEW CABLE CANNOT BE PULLED A CHANGE ORDER FOR NEW CONDUIT WILL BE PROVIDED TO THE CITY.

EXCLUSIONS

Page 8 of 10 ends

ON-GOING SERVICES PURCHASE AGREEMENT
This Purchase Agreement shall be governed by the terms and conditions of a certain Terms of Service Agreement by and between Sentry Control Systems LLC, a California corporation with its principal office located at 6611 Odessa Ave. Van Nuys, CA 91406-5746 (“Primary Service Provider”), and ___________________ “End-User” with its office located at __________________________.

Capitalized terms used in this Purchase Order and not otherwise defined shall have the same meaning as set forth in the body of the Terms of Service Agreement.

A. AUTHORIZED FACILITY

1. Authorized Facilities: ___________________, located at _____________________________ (“the end-user”). Other facilities are not authorized users under this Purchase Agreement.

2. The Operator, whom the approval to operate the facility was granted, and is responsible for paying the fees of the Services is ________________________.

3. Facility Manager:

Company:

Email:

Phone:

4. Supported Browser(s): Current releases of (i) Mozilla Firefox (ii) Microsoft® Internet Explorer (iii) Apple® Safari (iv) Google Chrome ® B. SUBSCRIPTION LICENSE TERM AND FEES; RATE STRUCTURE

1. Subscription License Term and Fees.

1.1 The periodic service/license fees shall be payable annually, in advance, based on the Rates below for the payment period applicable to the authorized facility described above. Fees are payable upon receipt of invoice from Sentry Control Systems LLC, except for the initial payment which is due upon the execution of this Purchase Order. Fees are payable periodically until this Purchase Agreement is terminated by Sentry Control Systems LLC in accordance with the Terms of Service Agreement or by Licensee for convenience as provided below.

1.2 All fees are non-refundable.

Page 9 of 10 ends

Rate
RECURRING ITEMS: E:VAL(R)

SERVICE START DATE QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ANNUAL TOTAL PRICE E:VAL SUBSCRIPTION ANNUAL
LICENSE TIER 3 11/23/2016 1 $ 10,000 $ 10,000
TOTAL $10,000
RECURRING ITEMS: SKIDATA

SERVICE START DATE QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ANNUAL TOTAL PRICE SW-EPI/LICENSE 11/23/2016 105 $ 300 $ 31,500
TOTAL $31,500
Invoices will be mailed on the 1st of the month prior to the beginning month of coverage.
*Go-Live Date is based on 1st operational day. Billing to start the following month of Go Live Date.

2. Termination for Convenience by Licensee; Guaranteed Payment. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Terms of Service Agreement or this Purchase Agreement, Licensee may terminate this Agreement and Purchase Order at any time for convenience, by providing at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Sentry Control Systems LLC; provided, however, that except for termination by Licensee for cause, in the event of any termination of this Agreement for any reason prior to the first anniversary of the Effective Date of this Purchase Agreement, none of the annual fee shall be refunded. In subsequent years, Licensee may terminate this Agreement and Purchase Order at any time for any reason, by providing at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Sentry Control Systems, LLC, and Licensee shall be entitled to a pro rata refund for services paid for but not delivered.

3. Taxes. Fees do not include taxes or duties. If Sentry Control Systems LLC is required to pay or collect any federal, state, local, value added, tax or duty on any fees charged under this Agreement, or any other similar taxes or duties levied by any governmental authority, excluding taxes levied on Sentry Control Systems LLC's net income, then such taxes and/or duties shall be billed to and paid by Licensee immediately upon receipt of Sentry Control Systems’ invoice and supporting documentation for the taxes or duties charged.

4. Late Charges. If Licensee does not make timely payment to Sentry Control Systems LLC of any amount payable hereunder, in addition to the remedies available to Sentry Control Systems LLC at law or equity, Sentry Control Systems LLC may collect interest on the sum then owing at the rate of 1.5% per month from the due date until payment by Licensee; provided, however, that in no event shall the aggregate interest charges exceed the maximum rate of interest which could be charged under applicable law.

Page 10 of 10 ends

C. CONSULTING, TRAINING, AND PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
Upon request, Sentry Control Systems LLC shall provide to Licensee consulting and/or training and/or professional services for the Service on a time and materials ("T&M") basis; that is, (i) Licensee shall pay Sentry Control Systems LLC for all the time spent performing such services, plus materials, taxes, and reimbursable expenses; and (ii) the rates for such services shall be Sentry Control Systems LLC's then-current standard rates when such services are provided, the current rates as of the Effective Date being $190. Charges shall be payable thirty (30) days from receipt of invoice.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this On-Going Services Purchase Agreement to be duly executed below.
___________________________ Sentry Control Systems, Inc.

By: ______________________________ By: ____________________________ (Signature) (Signature) Name: _____________________________ Name: _____________________________ Title: _______________________________ Title: ______________________________ Commerci
SENTR
2016

SERVICE
Welcome
Sentry pro
Maximize
contract o
together b
Illustrated
the Exten
are includ
ial in Confidenc
RY SERVIC

PROGRAM
to the SKIDA
ovides a rang
your “up tim
options of Bas
based on mo
d below is a g
ded, the Basi
ded.

BASI
Preventativ
SFTW Main
Anti‐Virus
Refresher
ce Sentry SKID
CE.CARE W

OVERVIEW
TA Service.Ca
ge of choices t
me” and exten
sic, Extended,
re than 15 ye
global overvie
ic service mod
C
ve.Care T
nt.Care
s.Care
r.Care
DATA Group –
WARRAN
are services p
to enable cus
nd the lifecyc
d, Premium an
ears of experie
ew of the serv
dules are incl

EXTENDED
Training.Care
Service.Care

2016
TY AND S
rogram, we a
stomers to se
cle of your inv
nd Premium P
ence support
vice activities
uded, and if y
PR
e Help
Secu
PCI Su
Opera

SUPPORT
are at your se
lect the level
vestment, se
Plus, these se
ting existing c
by agreemen
you elect Prem
EMIUM
Desk.Care
urity.Care
upport.Care
ations.Care
T PROGRA
ervice!
of service th
lect from fou
rvice activitie
customer’s ne
nt type, note
mium, all Bas
PREMIU
Wear Part
Upgrade
Response

P
AMS
at works for y
ur standard
es are groupe
eeds.
that if you el
sic and Extend
UM +
ts.Care
.Care
e.Care

Page 1 ends

you.
d
ect
ded
Commerci
SERVICE P
☒ B
 P
Ke
w
sy
cl
M
(“
co
te
re
d
ti
(“
u
to
 SO
Ke
so
A
su
is
 A
Ke
up
R
ac
u
 R
Ke
so
A
in
p
lis
co
Se
ial in Confidenc
PROGRAM M
BASIC SERV

REVENTATIV
eep your syst
will extend usa
ystem, our ro
leaning, lubric
Monthly, Quar
“Maintenance
orrection and
ests, measure
eplace parts o
uring regular
me, Monday
“Regular Wor
nder this Serv
o manufactur
OFTWARE M
eeping you cu
oftware intra
pplicable bia
upported rele
ssues, offer ap
ANTI‐VIRUS.CA
eeping you pr
pdates are ap
eview anti‐vi
ctive and fun
pdates are ap
EFRESHER.CA
eeping you up
oftware and h
nnual (one‐ti
n Sentry’s ons
reventative m
sting Sentry’s
onfirmation o
entry’s sched
ce Sentry SKID
MODULE DETA
VICE AGREE
E.CARE
tem in tip‐top
able life. Don’
utine mainten
cating, and re
rterly and Ann
e”). Systemat
d prevention o
ements, adjus
of the Equipm
working hou
through Frid
rking Hours”).
vices Agreem
rer’s recomm

AINTENANCE
urrent—We’ll
‐release upda
nnual (semia
eases and as r
pplicable feat
ARE
rotected—We
pplied.
rus server an
ctioning. Man
pplied.

ARE
p to speed—W
hardware refr
me) Software
site Training C
maintenance
s available Re
of attendance
uled offering
DATA Group –
AILS
EMENT MO
p shape— Pre
’t let neglect b
nance include
eplacement o
nual preventa
tic inspection,
of incipient fa
stments, lubr
ment as sched
rs of 8:00 a.m
ay, excluding
. At a minimu
ment will be m
endations.

E.CARE
l come and in
ates and hotfi
nnual) SKIDAT
released by th
ture enhance
e’ll come and
d antivirus ag
nage and regu
We’ll teach yo
resher trainin
e and Hardwa
Center locate
and SKIDATA
fresher Train
e will be prov
gs.
2016
ODULES
ventative me
breakdown yo
es inspection,
of the equipm
ative mainten
, detection,
ailures, includ
ication and la
duled by Sent
m. to 5:00 p.m
g public holida
um, all Equipm
maintained acc
nstall all the la
fixes provided
TA software i
he manufactu
ments or offe
d verify that y
gents to ensu
ularly verify t
ou how to use
ng for the term
are Refresher
d at a Sentry
reporting. A
ings offered o
ided by Custo
asures
our
ment.
nance
ding
abor to
ry
m. local
ays
ment
cording
atest and gre
d by the manu
intra‐release
urer) which a
er improved f
our anti‐virus
re signatures
that anti‐virus
e the new pro
m of your con
r training for C
facility. Topi
A predetermin
on a quarterly
omer four (4)
atest bi‐annu
ufacturer.
updates and
ddress report
functionality
s is active, run
s are up to da
s is active, run
ograms with o
ntract.

Customer for
ics include PA
ned schedule
y basis. Adva
to six (6) wee
P
ual SKIDATA
hotfixes (for
ted technical
may be provi
nning, and lat
te and agent
nning and lat
our annual
r term of cont
ARCS equipme
will be provid
nced notifica
eks prior to

Page 2 ends

ded.
test
s are
est
tract,
ent,
ded
tion /
Commerci
☒ EX
BASIC MO
 SE
G
re
La
w
 TR
Pr
eq
yo
U
Tr
m
C
at
fif
ial in Confidenc
XTENDED S
ODULES PLUS
ERVICE.CARE
Guaranteed se
egular hours.
abor to respo
wear and tear)
RAINING.CAR
roviding just
quipment to r
our exact syst
nlimited cust
raining Cente
maintenance a
ustomer four
ttendees per
fteen (15) bu
ce Sentry SKID
SERVICE AG
S THE FOLLOW
E
ervice—We’ll
ond to unsche
) performed i
RE
what you nee
reporting (SK
tem.
tomized train
er located at T
and SKIDATA
r (4) to six (6)
scheduled tr
siness days p
DATA Group –

GREEMENT
WING:
provide reme
eduled service
in response to
ed to know—S
KIDATA), unlim
ing for Custo
Training Site.
reporting. Re
weeks prior t
aining is requ
prior to the da
2016
T MODULE
edial mainten
e calls for rem
o Customer’s
Select the cou
mited for the t
mer for the t
Topics includ
equests to sch
to requested
uired. Training
ate and will b
ES
nance for all u
medial mainte
request duri
urse you need
term of your c
erm of the ag
de PARCS equ
hedule trainin
training date
g agenda will
e mutually ag
unscheduled s
enance (as a r
ng Regular W
d at any time,
contract. Full
greement, in
uipment, prev
ng will be pro
e. Minimum o
be establishe
greed upon b
P
service calls d
result of norm
Working Hours
, from PARCS
ly customizab
Sentry’s onsi
ventative
vided by
of four (4)
ed no less tha
by the parties.

Page 3 ends

during
mal
s.

S
ble to
te
an
.

Commerci
☐ PR

EXTENDE
 PC
Pl
as
da
ch
ar
sk
Sc
da
pa
m
in
o
fo
 O
M
to
lo
re
as
A
pa
se
re
 SE
A
In
 H
N
on
ex
O
se
ial in Confidenc
REMIUM S
D MODULES
CI SUPPORT.
lay your cards
ssist you with
ata encryptio
hanges. Then
re working an
kimmers exist
cheduling and
ata key encry
assword chan
minimum com
nspection to e
rder, no cred
or signs of tam
OPERATIONS.C
Making it easy
o rate change
ockout, article
eporting and
ssist you with
ssist with rat
assword lock
etup, softwar
eporting.

ECURITY.CAR
n extra meas
nstall and ma
ELPDESK.CAR
Need help, com
nline in real t
xperiencing.

Online, real‐tim
essions to ass
ce Sentry SKID
SERVICE AG
PLUS THE FO
CARE
s right—We’l
h the annual c
on changes an
we’ll check t
nd that no cre
t.
d assisting wi
yption change
nges. All pass
mplexity requi
ensure all lock
it card skimm
mpering of eq
CARE
y to operate—
es, validation
e and user gro
software cha
h every step.
e changes, va
out, article an
re setup chan
RE
sure of securit
nage quarter
RE
me to us—Wh
time during re
me access to
sist with comm
DATA Group –

GREEMEN
OLLOWING:
ll schedule an
credit card ke
nd OS passwo
to see if all loc
edit card
th credit card
es and OS
words will m
rements. Visu
ks are in work
mers exist, and
quipment.
—When it com
setup, passw
oup setup,
anges—we’ll
alidation setu
nd user group
ges and ad ho
ty—We’ll inst
ly OS updates
hen you can’t
egular busine
remote Servi
mon technica
2016
T MODULE
nd
ey
ord
cks
d
eet
ual
king
d
mes
word
p,
p
oc
tall and mana
s, firmware u
t figure somet
ss hours to re
ce Engineers
al issues.

ES
age your quar
pdates and s
thing out, cha
emotely troub
who are able
rterly Window
ecurity patch
at with our Se
bleshoot any i
e to launch re
P
ws OS updates
hes.
ervice Help De
issues you ma
emote service

Page 4 ends

s.
esk
ay be
e
Commerci
☐ PRE

PREMIUM
 W
W
U
Th
re
 U
O
ar
SK
m
W
ti
 R
Ex
Th
P
ial in Confidenc
EMIUM + M
M MODULES
WEAR PARTS.C
We’ll pick‐up t
UPS batteries,
hermal print
eplacement a
UPGRADE.CAR
On the upgrad
re operating
KIDATA softw
month interva
Windows licen
me and mate
ESPONSE.CA
xpedited resp
here are four
riority‐4 (the
ce Sentry SKID

MODULES AG
S PLUS THE
CARE
the parts—No
and locking a
heads, shear
as a result of n
RE
de—From upg
the most rece
ware upgrade
ls during the
nsing associat
erials basis.

RE
ponse to a ser
r priority leve
lowest priori
DATA Group –

GREEMENT

FOLLOWING
o charge for p
assemblies in
bolts, UPS ba
normal wear
grades to upd
ent versions a
licenses are i
term of the S
ted with Softw
rvice call plac
ls for service
ity). Each prio
2016
T —CUSTOM
G:
parts or instal
need of repa
atteries and lo
and tear.
dates for SKIDA
available, kee
included and
Services Agre
ware upgrade
ed by an auth
requests ran
ority level wil
MIZED PER CU
llation of ther
air or replacem
ocking assem
ATA software
eping you up t
provided at s
ement. Labor
es is not inclu
horized repres
ging from Pri
ll have a requ
USTOMER R
rmal print hea
ment.
mblies in need
e, we’ll make
to date.
sixteen (16) t
r and any req
ded and will
sentative.
ority‐1 (the h
uired respons
P

REQUIREMEN
ads, shear bo
d of repair or
sure your sys
o eighteen (1
uired hardwa
be quoted on
highest priorit
e time.

Page 5 ends

NTS
lts,
stems
18)
are or
n a
ty) to
Commerci
☒ A
Se
co
Fo
ye
co
ei
N
☒ A
Fo
su
 EX
Tw
 EX
8  EX
Tw
ial in Confidenc
DD EXTEN
entry offers P
omponent rep
ollowing the
ear two (Y2) t
omponents, s
ither by manu
NOT REQUIRE
DD ADDIT
or certain cus
upport is not
XTENDED.CO
wenty‐four (2
XTENDED.CO
:00 a.m. to 5:

XTENDED.CO
wenty-four (2
ce Sentry SKID
DED WAR
PARTS.CARE w
placement.

Manufacture
through year
software and
ufacturer def
D DURING ST
IONAL COV
stomers, 24/7
essential. Se
OVERAGE ONE
24) hours per
OVERAGE TWO
:00 p.m. on Sa
OVERAGE THR
24) hours per
DATA Group –
RANTY
when paired w
r Warranty P
five (Y5) (“Ex
hardware fo
fect or norma
TANDARD WA
VERAGE
7 availability o
ntry offers th
E when paired
r day basis Mo
O when paire
aturday throu
REE when pair
r day basis thr
2016
with Extended
eriod, Sentry
xtended Warr
r covered com
al wear and te
ARRANTY PE
of support is c
hree options:
d with an Ext
onday throug
ed with an Ext
ugh Sunday.
red with an E
roughout the
d Service.Care
y will supply a
ranty Period”
mponents are
ear (“Extende
RIOD.
critical, for ot
ended Service
gh Friday, exc
tended Servic
Extended Serv
year includin
e for full cove
n Extended W
). All PARCS e
e warrantied
ed Warranty”)
thers, the pre
e Agreement
luding public
ce Agreement
vice Agreemen
ng holidays.

P
erage of
Warranty cov
equipment
against failur
).
mium of stan
holidays.
t
nt

Page 6 ends

ering
re
ndby
Commerci
ANNUA
The below
Extended
Additiona

YE
1 1
1 For full te
We look f
ability to
will delive
ial in Confidenc
AL SERVICE
w agreement
d Warranty
al Coverage
EAR
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
erms and con
forward to for
have a predi
er the extens
ce Sentry SKID
E FEE BREA
options are c
☒
1☐ 2☐
BASIC
Pricing upo
request
ditions, pleas
rmalizing you
ctable range
sive operation
DATA Group –
AKDOWN
calculated wi
☐ 3☒
EX
on
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
se request th
ur service agr
of expenditu
nal life you se
2016
th:

XTENDED
247,190
457,302
469,662
482,021
494,381
506,740
519,100
531,459
543,819
556,178
e contract th
reement, allo
ure for budge
eek from you
PREM
Pricing
requ
hat interests y
owing you the
ting for the m
r SKIDATA sys
MIUM
g upon
uest
you.
e uptime you
many required
stem.

PREMIUM
Pricing upo
request

seek and the
d activities th

Page 7 ends

+
on
e
hat
Picture may vary from actual product
The universal multi-talent among parking
columns offers comprehensive possibilities for
the ticketing sector with the most modern and
diverse ticket technology. Expand your business
models; become part of urban solutions. Power.

Gate will support you at its best!
Marketing Terminal with Ticketing
• Comprehensive Advertising Opportunities
Get your equipment financed.
• Professional Image
A back-glowing, bright and high-resolution
display effectively draws attention to
logos, images and promo videos.

Save Money and Protect the
Environment
• Minimize Your Power Usage
Situational energy saving modes and no heating above
–20 °C (–4 °F) stand for a high energy effeiciency.
• Recyclable Materials
Ressource-efficient due to a high degree of reusability.

Optimize Your Investment
• Suitable for Every Budget
A customized solution for every application.
• Protect Your Investment
Future-proof due to flexible options for
expansions and installations.
• Save Money on Your Expenditures
Smooth investment expansion and renewals thanks to
the random miscibility of SKIDATA parking columns.

Efficiency Increase with Quality
• Optimized Service Planning
Great capacities and intelligent systems
reduce your service efforts.
• Elaborated Technology
Touch-free RFID and barcode technology guarantee
the highest level of reliability and low follow-up costs.

Your Business Card
• High-Quality Design
High-class materials and glowing features
blend elegantly into all types of architecture.
• Professional Image
Bi-directional video communicatin provides your
company with a face.
• Make a Lasting Impression
Expert-optimized operational guidance for look
and sound provide positive user experiences.

Power.Gate
456
347
1345
340
354
122
363
844
556
125°
354 143° 1577
90°
456
677
48 1000
©2015 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

The content provided herein is subject to change and possible editorial errors. Country-specific versions may vary. SKIDATA® is a registered trademark of SKIDATA AG in the USA, the European Union and other countries. Terms and conditions of the authorized SKIDATA distributor apply. The operator is fully responsible for compliance with any legal provisions applicable to the operation of the products. • Large ticket collecting box (holds approx. 3000 tickets) • Print@Home scanner with special optical array for paper tickets and Smartphones; supports various formats
• Receipt printer for entire credit card solution
• Barcode ticket insert reader for ‘classic’ ticketing Communication
• Analog intercom
• Integrated digital intercom (Ethernet or 2-Wire)
• Bi-directional (i. e., duplex) video communication
(solution includes camera hardware)
Display
• Bright high-resolution graphics display ensures good readability under any light conditions; supports clear, vivid display of commercials and videos (with automatic brightness adjustment);
800 × 480 pixels
• Outdoor capable touch screen for additional Parking Column control functions (can be operated while wearing protective gloves) • Sophisticated display modes support various applications and design options
• Illuminated control elements
• Visual and acoustic feedback provides additional user support Accessories
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks, supports configurable access permissions
• Various contact and interface extensions to suit a wide range of requirements
• Heating and cooling for extreme ambient temperatures • Infofield in the front
• AFILS Acoustic support for clear intelligibility
• Advertising panel
• Lane signal
Features
Design/Construction
• Unique design based on aluminum and high-grade synthetics, complemented by optional, stylish light elements
• Modular, easy to maintain construction
• Flexible extension options ensure maximum investment protection
• Weather-proof, thanks to use of durable high-grade materials, such as aluminum
• Ethernet interface for efficient system integration
• Large installation space for add-on modules
(e.g., PIN pad, credit card reader, etc.)
Operation
• Intuitive user interaction helps to ensure very high processing rates
Green Efficiency
• Optimised for low power consumption; without Coder no heating required down to −20 °C (−4 °F)
• Materials provide high degree of re-usability
Options
Design/Construction
• LED light bar serves as a stylish, illuminated eye-catcher • Housing available in custom colors
Ticket Processing
• Coder Unlimited ensures flexible ticket processing
• Coder Basic enables cross-wise bar code ticket processing and punch-hole validation
• RFID module for reading and encoding 13 MHz keycards • Double ticket intake (up to 2×7000 tickets, depending on ticket material and coder type) with automatic data carrier management
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 354 mm × 1345 mm × 456 mm (B × H × T) without options Weight approx. 30 kg
Operating voltage 100-240 V ±10 % / 50-60 Hz
Coding units Coder Unlimited or Coder Basic
Operating temperature with Coder 0 °C (32 °F) to + 50 °C (122 °F) in shade; + 40 °C (104 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature without Coder –20 °C (–4 °F) to + 50 °C (122 °F) in shade; + 40 °C (104 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature with additional cooling up to + 50 °C (122 °F) under sun exposure Operating temperature with additional heater down to –30 °C (–22 °F) Operating temperature with additional heater big down to –40 °C (–40 °F) Max. ambient humidity 90 % (non-condensing)
Support stand color Brushed, anodized aluminum
Cover color RAL 7037 Dusty Grey (varnished plastic)
Panel color RAL 7021 Black Grey (varnished plastic)
Declarations / Certifications CE, FCC, IC, CNRTLUS
Degree of protection based on IEC 60529 IP43
Systemrequirements Parking.Logic V07 or higher
SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 1.6a • 28.01.2016 all dimensions in mm all dimensions without options AXIS P1204 Network Camera
Miniature HDTV pinhole camera for discreet surveillance AXIS P1204 is a tiny pinhole HDTV 720p camera for exceptionally discreet indoor surveillance. It is ideal for capturing subjects at close range, and can be installed on or flush-mounted in walls or ceilings, or in limited spaces.

AXIS P1204 comprises two parts: a sensor unit with an 8 m (26 ft.) cable, and a main unit. The cable enables the sensor unit to be installed discreetly in tight places, and the main unit to be placed elsewhere. AXIS P1204 offers powerful event management capabilities with intelligent video features such as tampering alarm, motion detection and support for third-party applications.
> Functional and extremely discreet design
> Easy and flexible installation
> HDTV 720p
> Edge storage
> Multiple H.264 streams
Datasheet
AXIS P1204 Network Camera
Camera
Image sensor Progressive scan RGB CMOS 1/4”
Lens Fixed iris, Fixed focus

3.7 mm, F2.5
Horizontal angle of view: 57°
Light sensitivity 1.2-10000 lux
Shutter time 1/24500 s to 1/6 s
Video
Video
compression
H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG
Resolutions 1280x720 to 320x180
Frame rate Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in all resolutions Video streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG
Controllable frame rate and bandwidth, VBR/CBR H.264
Image settings Compression, Color, Brightness, Sharpness, Contrast, White balance, Exposure control, Exposure zones, Backlight
compensation, Fine tuning of behavior at low light, Rotation, Text and image overlay, Mirroring of images, Privacy mask, Axis’ Corridor Format
Network
Security Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPSaencryption, IEEE 802.1Xanetwork access control, Digest authentication, User access log, Centralized Certificate Management
Supported
protocols
IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPSa, SSL/TLSa, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnPTM, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, SFTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP,

DHCP, ARP, SOCKS, SSH
System integration
Application
Programming
Interface
Open API for software integration, including VAPIX®
and AXIS Camera Application Platform; specifications at www.axis.com
AXIS Video Hosting System (AVHS) with One-Click Connection.

ONVIF Profile S; specification at www.onvif.org
Analytics Video motion detection, Active tampering alarm Support for AXIS Camera Application Platform enabling
installation of AXIS Video Motion Detection 3, AXIS Cross Line Detection, AXIS Digital Autotracking and third-party applications, see www.axis.com/acap
Event triggers Analytics, External inputs, Video loss
Event actions File upload: FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share and email Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP
External output activation
Video recording to edge storage
Pre- and post-alarm video buffering
Built-in
installation aids
Pixel counter
Data streaming Event data
General
Casing Main unit: Polycarbonate casing
Sensor unit: Metal casing (aluminum)
Memory 256 MB RAM, 128 MB Flash
Power Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 2 (max

6.49 W)
8-28 V DC max 4.7 W
Connectors RJ45 for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE
RJ12 for the sensor unit
Terminal blocks for power, 1 alarm input and 1 output
Edge storage Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card Support for recording to dedicated network-attached storage (NAS)
For SD card and NAS recommendations see www.axis.com
Operating
conditions
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
Main unit: Humidity 10-85% RH (non-condensing)
Sensor unit: Humidity 10-85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage
conditions
-40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F)
Approvals EN 55022 Class B, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-1, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B, ICES-003 Class B, VCCI Class B, C-tick AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class B,
KCC KN22 Class B, KN24, IEC/EN/UL 60950-1,
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6 Class 4M4,
IEC 60068-2-27 Class 4M3, 60068-2-78 Class 3K3
Dimensions 27 x 21.5 mm (1 1/16 x 7/8 in)
Weight Main unit: 109 g (0.24 lb)
Sensor unit: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Included
accessories
Mounting kit, Installation Guide, Windows decoder 1-user license, AVHS Authentication key
Optional
accessories
AXIS T8120 Midspan 15 W 1-port, AXIS P7701 Video Decoder, AXIS P8221 Network I/O Audio Module
Video
management
software
AXIS Camera Companion, AXIS Camera Station, Video
management software from Axis’ Application Development
Partners available on www.axis.com/techsup/software
Languages German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese
Warranty Axis 3-year warranty and AXIS Extended Warranty option, see www.axis.com/warranty
a. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/), and cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

More information is available at www.axis.com
www.axis.com
©2014 - 2015 Axis Communications AB. AXIS COMMUNICATIONS, AXIS, ETRAX, ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks or trademark applications of Axis AB in various jurisdictions. All other company names and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. We reserve the right to introduce modifications without notice. 1496752/EN/M1.4/082015
Back-UPS™
350/500
User Manual
EN 990-9230A 06/2013
Inventory
1 Connect the Battery
3 Check the Building
Wiring Fault Indicator
4 Connect Equipment
6 Switch On the
Back-UPS
In compliance with Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations, the Back-UPS is shipped with theinternal red battery wire disconnected. The Back-UPS will not operate until the internal red wire isconnected to the battery. Once connected, allow the Back-UPS to charge for a full eight hours priorto use.Note: Small sparks may occur during battery connection. This is normal. a. Open the battery compartment, as shown.b. Pull the battery about half way out, as shown.
c. Connect the red battery wire to the positive
battery terminal.
d. Push the battery into the battery compartment
and re-install the cover, as shown.
• This UPS is intended for indoor use only. • Do not operate this UPS in direct sunlight, in contact with fluids, or where there is excessive dust or humidity. • Be sure the air vents on the UPS are not blocked.

Allow adequate space for proper ventilation.
• The battery typically lasts for two to three years.

Environmental factors impact battery life. Elevated ambient temperatures, poor quality AC power, and frequent short duration discharges will shorten battery life. • Connect the UPS power cable directly to a wall
outlet. Do not use surge protectors or extension cords.

Plug the Back-UPS into a wall outlet, as shown.

If the red Building Wiring Fault indicator on therear panel of the Back-UPS is lit, one of thefollowing conditions exists: • Open or high resistance ground • Hot or neutral polarity reversed • Overloaded neutral circuitA lit indicator means that a potential shockhazard exists. Improper building wiring shouldbe corrected by a qualified electrician. Do notuse the Back-UPS until the condition thatcaused the fault is corrected.Note: Improper building wiring will not prevent the Back-UPS from operating, but it will limit itsprotection capability. It may also result inequipment damage that is not covered by the APCby Schneider Electric Equipment ProtectionPolicy.

The rear panel of the Back-UPS consists of thefollowing elements:Battery Back Up Outlets (qty. of 3). Theseoutlets provide battery back-up, surge protection,and Electro-magnetic Interference (EMI)filtering. In case of power outage, battery poweris automatically provided to these outlets. Power(AC or battery) is not supplied to these outletswhen the Back-UPS is switched Off. Connect acomputer, monitor, and external disk or CDROM drive to these outlets.

External
Drive
Computer
Monitor
Scanner
Printer
Fax
Note: Allow the Back-UPS to charge for a full eighthours prior to use.Press the push-button on the front panel of theBack-UPS.Observe that the following events occur after pressing and releasing the push-button: • The green On-Line indicator flashes. • The yellow On Battery indicator lights while the Self-Test is being performed.
• When Self-Test has successfully completed,
only the green On Line indicator will be lit.
• If the internal battery is not connected, (see
Step 1 above) the green On Line indicator and
red Replace Battery indicator will light. TheBack-UPS will also emit a chirping sound.

On Line
On Battery
Overload
Replace Battery
7 There are four status indicators (lights) on the frontpanel of the Back-UPS (On Line, On Battery,Overload, and Replace Battery).On Line (green) - is lit whenever AC power is powering the Battery Backup outlets.

On Line
On Battery
Overload
Replace Battery
Overload (red) - is lit whenever power
demand has exceeded the capacity of the BackUPS.

Continuous Tone - this alarm issounded whenever the BatteryBackup outlets are overloaded.

Circuit Breaker - the circuitbreaker button located on the rearpanel of the Back-UPS will stickout if an overload condition forcesthe Back-UPS to disconnect itselffrom AC power. If the buttonsticks out, disconnect nonessential equipment. Reset thecircuit breaker by pushing thebutton inward. 5 Connect the Phone
Line to Surge Protection
The telephone ports provide lightning surge protection for any device connected to the telephoneline (computer, modem, fax or telephone). Thetelephone ports are compatible with Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) and DigitalSubscriber Line (DSL) standards, as well as allmodem data rates. Connect as shown.

Wall Outlet
Modem/Phone/Fax
Replace Battery (red) - is lit whenever thebattery is near the end of its useful life, or ifthe battery is not connected (see above). Abattery that is near the end of its useful life hasinsufficient run-time and should be replaced.

Chirps for 1 Minute Every 5Hours - this alarm is soundedwhenever the battery has failed theautomatic diagnostic test.

TO COMPUTER

USB PORT
RJ-45 to USB
CABLE
Connect USB Cableand Install Software(optional)
NOTE: Macintosh Users - for full USB performance, use OS 10.1.5 or higher.If Autoplay is not enabled on the computer, proceedas follows:1. On the computer desktop of the display, doubleclick on My Computer.2. Double-click on the CD-ROM drive icon and follow the on-screen instructions.

Follow the
on-screen
instructions.

Status Indicators and Alarms
In situations where the Back-UPS or connected equipment appears too sensitive to input voltage, it may be necessary to adjust the transfer voltage. This is a simple task requiring use of the front panel push button. Toadjust the transfer voltage, proceed as follows:

1.Plug the Back-UPS into the AC power source. The Back-UPS will be in a Standby Mode (no indicators lit).

2.Press the front panel push button fully inward for 10 seconds. All indicators on the Back-UPS will flash to acknowledge going into Programming Mode.

3.The Back-UPS will then indicate its current Sensitivity Setting, as shown in the following table.

4.To select the Low Sensitivity setting, press the push button until the yellow indicator is flashing.

5.To select the Medium Sensitivity setting, press the push button until the yellow and red indicators (second and third from the top) are flashing.

6.To select the High Sensitivity setting, press the push button until yellow and both red indicators (bottom three) are flashing.

7.To exit without changing the Sensitivity Setting, press the push button until the green indicator is flashing.

8.Once in Programming Mode, if the push button is not pressed within 5 seconds, the Back-UPS will exit Programming Mode; all indicators will extinguish.

Indicators
Flashing
Sensitivity
Setting
Input Voltage
Range
(for AC
operation)
Use When
1 (yellow)
Low 88 - 142 Vac Input voltage is extremely low or high.

Not recommended for computer loads.
2 (yellow, and
red)
Medium
(factory default)
92 - 139 Vac Back-UPS frequently goes On Battery.
3 (yellow, red,
and red)
High 96 - 136 Vac Connected equipment is sensitive to
voltage fluctuations (recommended).

On Battery (yellow) - is lit whenever the battery of the Back-UPS is powering equipment connected to the Battery Backup Outlets.

Four Beeps Every 30 Seconds - thisalarm is sounded whenever the BackUPS is running On Battery. Considersaving work in progress.

Continuous Beeping - this alarm issounded whenever a low battery condition is reached. Battery run-time isvery low. Promptly save any work inprogress and exit all open applications. Shutdown the operating system, computer and the Back-UPS.

Transfer Voltage and Sensitivity Adjustment (optional)
Surge Only Outlets (qty. of 3). These outlets arealways On (when AC power is available) and are not controlled by the On/Off switch. These outlets
do not provide power during a power outage. Connect a printer, fax machine or scanner to these outletsBlack Velcro Straps (qty. of 2 - not shown). Forconvenience, two velcro traps have been includedand can be used to manage power cords. to the Back-UPS
2 Placement / Power
Installation
Inspect the package contents upon receipt. Notify the carrier and dealer if there is any damage.

Read the Safety Guide supplied with this unit before installing the UPS. bu001c
© 2013 APC by Schneider Electric. APC, the APC logo, Back-UPS, and PowerChute are owned by Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S., or their affiliated companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

Safety and General
Information
User Documentation
Troubleshooting Back-UPS Storage
Use the tables below to solve minor Back-UPS installation and operation problems. Consult or callSchneider Electric IT (SEIT) Technical Support for assistance with problems that cannot be resolved usingthis document:

Possible Cause Procedure
Back-UPS will not switch on
Back-UPS not connected to an ACpower source.

Check that the Back-UPS power plug issecurely connected to the wall outlet.

Back-UPS does not power computer/monitor/external drive during an outage Internal battery is not connected. Check the battery connections. (See “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document.

Back-UPS operates on battery although normal AC voltage exists Back-UPS circuit breaker“tripped”.

Disconnect non-essential equipment from theBack-UPS. Reset the circuit breaker (locatedon the rear panel of the Back-UPS) by pushing the circuit breaker button fully inwarduntil it catches.

Back-UPS does not provide expected backup time
Back-UPS is excessively loaded. Unplug non-essential Battery Backup connected equipment, such as printers and plug them into Surge Only outlets.Note: Devices that have motors or dimmer switches (laser printers,heaters, fans, lamps, and vacuum cleaners, for example) should not beconnected to the Battery Backup outlets.

A red indicator is lit
Battery is not connected properly. Check the battery connections. Consult “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document. It shows how toaccess the battery and connect the wires.

Connect the Back-UPS to another wall outlet or have a qualifiedelectrician check the building wiring.

Red indicators are flashing
Back-UPS failure. Call SEIT Technical Support for service.

Specifications
Before storing, charge the Back-UPS for at least eight hours. Store the Back-UPS covered and upright ina cool, dry location. During storage, recharge the battery in accordance with the following table:

Please contact SEIT Technical Support to troubleshoot the unit before returning it to APC by SchneiderElectric.

Storage Temperature Recharge Frequency Charging Duration 23o to 86oF (-5o to 30oC)
86o to 113oF (30o to 45oC)
Every 6 monthsEvery 3 months
8 hours8 hours
Order Replacement Battery
The typical battery lifetime is 3-6 years (depending on the number of discharge cycles and operatingtemperature). A replacement battery can be ordered over the phone from APC by Schneider Electric, orthe battery can be ordered on-line from the APC by Schneider Electric web site (go tohttp:\\www.apc.com, a valid credit card is required).When ordering, please specify Battery Cartridge RBC2.

Battery Replacement
Battery replacement is a safe procedure. The Back-UPS can be left on with the equipment connectedduring this procedure. Do not replace the battery when the Back-UPS is On Battery. Refer to the SafetyGuide for additional information.Please consult the "Connect Battery" diagrams (a through d) on the front page of this document whenperforming the following procedures:1. While viewing the Back-UPS from the front, lay the Back-UPS on its left side (diagram a).2. Slide the battery compartment cover off of the Back-UPS (diagram a).3. Grasp the tab attached to the battery and slide the battery partially out of the case. Grab the battery firmly and pull it straight out. The battery wires will disconnect as the battery is pulled out (diagram b).

4. Carefully unpack the new battery. Retain the packing carton so that the old battery can be recycled.5. Insert the new battery halfway into the Back-UPS (diagram d).6. Connect the wires to the new battery as follows:7. Red Wire - to red (positive) terminal8. Black Wire - to black (negative) terminal9. Note: Small sparks at the battery terminals are normal during connection.10.Carefully insert the battery fully into the Back-UPS.11.Slide the battery compartment cover back into place.12.The Replace Battery indicator will shut off within the 14-day self-test interval, or when the BackUPS is switched On.

The old battery must be recycled. Deliver the battery to an appropriate recycling facility or return it toAPC by Schneider Electric in the packing carton that came with the new battery. Additional recyclinginformation is provided with the new battery.

Replace Battery indicator lit and an alarm sounds when the Back-UPS is turned on Internal battery not connected. Check the battery connections. Consult “Connect the Battery” under “Installation” on the front page of this document. It shows how toaccess the battery and connect the wires. © 2013 APC by Schneider Electric. APC, the APC logo, Back-UPS, and PowerChute are owned by Schneider Electric Industries S.A.S., or their affiliated companies. All other trademarksare property of their respective owners.

Service
If the unit requires service, do not return it to the dealer. Follow these steps:

1. Review the Troubleshooting section of the manual to eliminate common problems.

2. If the problem persists, contact Schneider Electric IT (SEIT) Customer Support through the APC by Schneider Electric Web site, www.apc.com.
a. Note the model number and serial number and the date of purchase. The model and serial numbers are located on the rear panel of the unit and are available through the LCD display on select models. b. Call SEIT Customer Support and a technician will attempt to solve the problem over the phone. If this is not possible, the technician will issue a Returned Material Authorization Number (RMA#). c. If the unit is under warranty, the repairs are free. d. Service procedures and returns may vary internationally. Refer to the APC by Schneider Electric Web site for country specific instructions.

3. Pack the unit in the original packaging whenever possible to avoid damage in transit. Never use foam beads for packaging. Damage sustained in transit is not covered under warranty.

4. Always DISCONNECT THE UPS BATTERIES before shipping. The United States Department of Transportation (DOT), and the International Air Transport Association (IATA) regulations require that UPS batteries be disconnected before shipping. The internal batteries may remain in the UPS.

5. Write the RMA# provided by Customer Support on the outside of the package.6. Return the unit by insured, pre-paid carrier to the address provided by Customer Support.

Warranty
The standard warranty is two (2) years from the date of purchase. Schneider Electric IT (SEIT) standardprocedure is to replace the original unit with a factory reconditioned unit. Customers who must have theoriginal unit back due to the assignment of asset tags and set depreciation schedules must declare such aneed at first contact with an SEIT Technical Support representative. SEIT will ship the replacement unitonce the defective unit has been received by the repair department, or cross ship upon the receipt of avalid credit card number. The customer pays for shipping the unit to SEIT. SEIT pays ground freighttransportation costs to ship the replacement unit to the customer.

APC by Schneider Electric IT Customer Support
For country specific customer support, go to the APC by Schneider Electric Web site, www.apc.com.

Select models are ENERGY STAR® qualified.

For more information go towww.apc.com/site/recycle/index.cfm/energy-efficiency/energy-star/.

This UPS is certified to comply with California Battery Charger System regulations. For more information go towww.apc.com/site/recycle/index.cfm/energy-efficiency/cec-battery-charger/.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant topart 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energyand, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determinedby turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or moreof the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Locate the label on the bottom of this device that contains, among other information, the FCC registrationnumber [US: 1XH-USA-25572-XP-N]] and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this device. If requested,this information must be provided to the telephone company.If you experience trouble with this equipment, you disconnect it from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line. In most areas,the sum of the RENs of all devices on any one line should not exceed five (5.0). If too many devices areattached, they may not ring properly.

Input Voltage (on line)
Worldwide
EMI Compliance
Check the wall outlet that supplies power tothe Back-UPS using a table lamp. If the lampbulb is very dim, have the AC voltagechecked by a qualified electrician.Disconnect non-essential equipment from theBack-UPS. Reset the circuit breaker (locatedon the rear panel of the Back-UPS) by pushing the circuit breaker button fully inwarduntil it catches. If the circuit breaker resets,switch the Back-UPS on and reconnect theequipment one-at-a-time. If the circuitbreaker trips again, it is likely that one of theconnected devices is causing the overload.

Back-UPS circuit breaker “tripped”.Very low or no AC voltage.

Move computer, monitor, or external drive power cord plug to theBattery Backup outlets.

The wall outlet that the Back-UPS isconnected to does not supply ACpower to the unit.Computer, monitor or external disk/CD-ROM drive is plugged into aSurge Only outlet.The Overload indicator is lit ifequipment connected to the BatteryBackup outlets is drawing morepower than the Back-UPS can provide.Battery requires replacement. The battery should be replaced within two weeks (see “Order Replacement Battery”). Failure to replace the battery will result inreduced run-time during a power outage. Move one or more equipment power plugs to the Surge Only outlets.

Battery requires replacement.Back-UPS battery is weak due torecent outage and has not had timeto recharge.

Charge the battery. The battery charges whenever the Back-UPS isconnected to a wall outlet. Typically, eight hours of charging time areneeded to fully charge the battery from total discharge. Back-UPSrun-time is reduced until the battery is fully charged.Replace battery (see Order Replacement Battery). Batteries typicallylast 3-6 years, shorter if subjected to frequent power outages or elevated temperatures.

Frequency Limits (on line)On Battery WaveshapeMaximum LoadEMI ClassificationShipping WeightWeightOperating TemperatureStorage TemperatureSize (H x W x D)Typical Recharge TimeOperating and StorageRelative HumidityOn Battery Run-Time 92 - 139 Vac
47 - 63 Hz (autosensing)
Stepped Sine Wave
350 VA - 210 W 500 VA - 300 W
8 Hours
32o to 104oF (0o to 40oC)
15o to 113oF (-15o to 45oC)
5 to 95% non-condensing

6.5 x 3.6 x 11.2 inches (16.5 x 9.2 x 28.5 cm)
350 VA - 12.9 lb (5.9 kg) 500 VA - 13.8 lb (6.3 kg)350 VA - 14.0 lb (6.4 kg) 500 VA - 14.9 lb (6.8 kg) FCC/DOC Class B Certified
350 VA - 13.8 Minutes typical - desktop computer and 17 inch (43.2 cm) monitor.
500 VA - 10.7 Minutes typical - desktop computer and 21 inch (53.3 cm) monitor.

Your Power Solutions Partner
> Compact, integrated UPS system provides clean, uninterruptible backup power, ensuring your system will remain up and running during power outages > Wide range Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) without going to batteries extends battery life, even during periods of surge or sag in voltage from utility power > External communications via RS-232 port and optional Ethernet SNMP interface provides local or remote monitoring and control
> Independently programmable control and report relays allow tracking and controlling of key functions
> User-friendly LCD display allows "at-a-glance" monitoring and troubleshooting > Temperature compensated battery charging protects battery from over charging at extreme temperatures
> A wide operating temperature range of -40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F)* is suitable for the most extreme operating environments
Alpha Micro 1000
UPS
The Alpha Micro Series provides constant, reliable backup power for Access Control, Security, Public Utility and Telecommunications applications in a compact all-in-one enclosure. The Alpha Micro UPS Series provides the same functionality as the Alpha FXM Series, for lower power applications in a single, easy to install cabinet. Optional add-on battery cabinets support applications where longer backup times are required. The system is available in either North American (120Vac/60Hz) or International (230Vac/50Hz) variants. * This applies to the UPS module only. Batteries may require a heater mat at lower temperatures. Output power derates after 50°C Canada: Burnaby, British Columbia Tel: 604 436 5900 Fax: 604 436 1233 United States: Bellingham, Washington Tel: 360 647 2360 Fax: 360 671 4936 Alpha Technologies reserves the right to make changes to the products and information contained in this document without notice.

Alpha Technologies Ltd. For more information visit www.alpha.ca member of The Group™
#0480019-00 Rev B (03/2011)
Alpha Micro 1000 UPS
Consult your Alpha representative for P/N configurations Electrical
>North America
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Input:

Nominal voltage: ............120Vac
Nominal frequency:........60Hz
Current:...........................8.8A nominal
Voltage range: ................85 to 175Vac
Output:

Current:...........................8.3A nominal
Voltage regulation: .........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power @ 50°C:................1000W/VA
>International
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Input:

Nominal voltage: ............230Vac
Nominal frequency:........50Hz
Current:...........................4.6A nominal
Voltage range: ................150 to 328Vac
Output:

Voltage: ..........................230Vac
Current:...........................4.3A nominal
Voltage regulation: .........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power @ 50°C:................1000W/VA
Performance / Features
Run time*:..........................4 x 18Ah batteries - 28 mins *Run time on battery power can vary based on loads, temperature and battery.

Other battery options are available.

Mechanical
Agency Compliance
Electrical safety:................UL1778, CSA 22.2 No. 107.3, EN50091-1-2, EN60950
Marks: ...............................CCSAUS , CE**
EMI: ...................................Level A FCC, CISPR22, EN55022 NEMA: ...............................3R
**CE applies to 230Vac version only
>Alpha Micro
Dimensions mm 500H x 358W x 294D
inches 19.7H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 19.7kg (43.4lbs)
>Alpha Micro XL
Dimensions mm 776H x 358W x 294D
inches 30.6H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 19.7kg (49.8lbs)
>Alpha Micro XL3
Dimensions
mm 1330H x 358W x 294D
inches 52.4H x 14.1W x 11.6D
Weight
(without batteries) 22.6kg (69.2lbs)
CONTACT US:

NZ: 0800 PAYMENT (729 6368) AU: 1800 006 254
[email protected]
www.paymentexpress.com
Ingenico
iPP350 Series PINpad
Overview
The iPP350 Series is the most Paymark/ENZ compliant and innovative retail PINpad available today. It covers every possible payment method including the latest contactless ‘tap and go’ technology, providing a rapid payment process and future-proof option for any merchant.

At a Glance
• Lightweight, stylish and compact (168 x 83 x 40 mm), only 267g • Plug and Play Contactless payment module
• Tailored design for the retail market
• USB or RS232 powered
• Anti-theft system
• Paymark and ENZ certified, fully EMV compliant
• PA-DSS certified

SPECIFICATIONS
Processor
Main processor - Thunder (ARM9), 450 MIPS
Memory
128 MB Flash, 16MB SDRAM
OS
Telium 2
SAM Slots
3 Card Reader(s)
Magnetic stripe - triple track
Smart card - EMV L1, 500 000 insertions
Contactless - integrated reader
Display
TFT colour display QVGA 2.7”(320x240)
Keypad
15 keys, raised marking, backlit
Audio
Powerful buzzer
Connectivity
USB2.0 device
RS232
Ethernet 10/100
Power Supply
USB 5V 500 mA
RS 232 5V or 12 V
Ethernet POE compliant with 802.3af
Size
168 x 83 x 40 mm
Weight
267g
Environment
5° to +45°C operating temperature
85% HR to +55°C operating humidity
PCI Pin Transaction Security
PCI PTS V2 & V3 certified

FEATURES & BENEFITS
• Contactless ‘tap and go’
• ARM7 crypto processor dedicated
to handle all security-based
functionality
• PINpad is approved to authorise
transactions over any internet
connection removing the need
for dedicated phone lines
• Incredibly fast transaction times
– up to 10 times faster than other
EFTPOS systems
• The iPP300 series is integrated
with all leading POS systems
• Reduce your reconciliation time
with DPS’s feature rich web based
reporting tools
• USB Plug and Play - easy to install
• Kensington security slot anti-theft
system
• Optional PIN privacy shield for
additional peace of mind
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 1 HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Front View

1. 5.25” external optical drive 5. NIC link indicator LED

2. Power/ Diagnostic LED 6. Hard Drive LED

3. NIC link indicator LED 7. Power button

4. 2 USB 2.0 ports with sliding door
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 2 Rear View

1. 24 Volt USB + PWR port 10. PS/2 keyboard port

2. Two (2) Full-Height Slots* 11. VGA port

3. RS232 serial COM3 12. 3 USB 2.0 ports

4. RJ-45 LAN jack 13. 2 USB 3.0 ports

5. RS232 serial (power configurable) COM1 port 14. RS232 serial (power configurable) COM2 port

6. PS/2 mouse port 15. DisplayPort

7. 240W EPA – Active PFC power supply (no line
switching required)

16. RJ12 cash drawer port

8. Line in audio jack 17. One (1) PCIe x16 Slot (wired as x16)** – shown is optional three (3) port 12 Volt USB +Power Card

9. Line out audio jack 18. One (1) PCIe x16 Slot (wired as x4)** – shown is optional three (3) port 12 Volt USB + Power Card
* Can be configured either as two (2) PCI x1 or two (2) PCIe x1 Full-Height slots. Shown is optional 2 Port RS232 serial (power configurable) Card, COM4 port (left) and COM3 port (right port).
**A variety of cards are available to populate slots, dependant on riser choice and connectors utilized. For full details, please contact your HP sales representative for configuration choices.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Overview
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 3 Introduction
Get the flexibility and expandability to control everything from the store floor to the back office with the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810, an all-around high-performer that stands up to the rigors of a retail environment so you can focus on making sales.

At A Glance
 UEFI BIOS developed and engineered by HP for better security, manageability and software image stability  Intel Q87 Express chipset supporting Intel 4th generation Intel ® Core™ processors, featuring Intel HD Graphics and vPro Technology (available with select processors)
 One of the following pre-installed operating systems:
o Genuine Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro 64-bit1
o Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail 64-bit o Genuine Microsoft Windows 7 Pro 32-bit or 64-bit2,3 (available through downgrade rights from Windows 8.1 Pro) o Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded POSReady7 32-bit or 64-bit o FreeDOS
 Intel I217LM GbE integrated network connection
 DDR3L Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM)  Integrated dual independent monitor support via VGA and digital DisplayPort v1.2 interfaces  Discrete graphics options available
 90% high efficiency energy saving power supply
 ENERGY STAR 6.0 qualified models available (dependent upon the desired configuration)  Can be configured with multiple hard disk drives in a RAID array  Industry leading Design for Environment standards
 Protected by HP Services, including standard 3-3-3 warranty and warranties up to 5-5-5 (terms and conditions vary by country; certain restrictions and exclusions apply)
 Tool-less serviceability features for easier upgrades and repairs  40°C ambient thermals standard.
 Optional HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover Available
 Tool-less serviceability for easy upgrades and repair  I/O ports including cash drawer port.
 Configurable Full-Height expansion slots; must choose either a PCI x1 Riser or PCIe x1 Riser. The choice of riser will affect which cards can be utilized.
 Either the PCI Riser or the PCIe Riser contain a Serial Port Connector, and if this connector is populated by a Serial Card then one of the riser bays is covered and cannot be used NOTE: All models and features may not be available in all countries [1] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8.1. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8.1 functionality. [2] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. [3] This system is preinstalled with Windows 7 Pro software and also comes with a license and media for Windows 8 Pro software. You may only use one version of the Windows software at a time. Switching between versions will require you to uninstall one version and install the other version. You must back up all data (files, photos, etc.) before uninstalling and installing operating systems to avoid loss of your data.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 4 Operating Systems
Preinstalled Genuine Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro 64-bit1
Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Retail 64-bit Genuine Microsoft Windows 7 Pro 32-bit or 64-bit2,3 (available through downgrade rights from Windows 8.1 Pro)
Genuine Microsoft Windows Embedded POSReady7 32-bit or 64-bit FreeDOS
Tested Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard (32-bit & 64-bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit)
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard (64-bit)
Certified Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop†
[1] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8.1. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8.1 functionality.
[2] Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. [3] This system is preinstalled with Windows 7 Pro software and also comes with a license and media for Windows 8 Pro software. You may only use one version of the Windows software at a time. Switching between versions will require you to uninstall one version and install the other version. You must back up all data (files, photos, etc.) before uninstalling and installing operating systems to avoid loss of your data † The following features are not supported by Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop:
 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Plus
 HP ProtectTools
 HP Blu-ray Writer playback of commercial movies
 DisplayPort video interface
 HP 2nd serial port adapter
 Power Management features
 Systems configured with Linux do not qualify for ENERGY STAR Value Added Software (included with all models; not included when configured with FreeDOS) HP ProtectTools Security Suite HP Vision Diagnostics
HP Software Management Agent PDF Complete Corporate Edition HP Computrace Microsoft Office 2013 Starter
HP Client Management Solutions (available for free download from the Internet) http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy
HP SoftPaq Download Manager HP Systems Software Manager HP Client Catalog for Microsoft SMS HP Client Automation Starter Retail Solutions Services and Features
Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) Factory Express Deployment and Lifecycle Services QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 5 Intel® vPro™ Technology* Intel® Standard Manageability
HP Global Series Services Trusted Platform Module (TPM) v1.2** *
Intel® vPro™ Technology available on models with Intel® Core™ i7 and Intel® Core™ i5 processors. **TPM module disabled where restricted by law, i.e. Russia.

Service and Support
On-site warranty and service1: This limited warranty and service offering delivers parts, labor and on-site repair for terms up to 5 years. Response time is next business day2 and includes free telephone support3 24 x 7. Global coverage2 ensures any product purchased in one country and transferred to another non-restricted country will remain fully covered under the original warranty and service offering. Some countries/regions do not offer one year onsite and labor. 1 Terms and conditions may vary by country. Certain restrictions and exclusions apply 2 On-site services may be provided pursuant to a service contract between HP and an authorized HP third party provider, and is not available in certain countries. Global service response times are based on commercially reasonable best effort and may vary by country 3 Technical telephone support applies only to HP configured, HP and HP qualified third party hardware and software. Toll-free calling and 24 x 7 support may not be available in some countries.

Chipset
Intel® Q87 Express
Processor
Intel® Celeron® Processors
Intel® Celeron® G1820 Processor

2.7GHz
2MB cache, 2 cores, 2 threads
Intel® GT1 – HD Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1333 MT/s data rate
Intel® Pentium® Processors
Intel® Pentium® G3420 Processor

3.2GHz
3MB cache, 2 cores, 2 threads
Intel® GT1 – HD Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i3 Processors
Intel® Core™ i3-4150 Processor

3.5GHz
3MB cache, 2 cores, 4 threads
Intel® HD Graphics 4400
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® Core™ i3-4430 Processor

3.0GHz
6MB cache, 4 cores, 4 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i5 Processors
Intel® Core™ i5-4570S Processor
Up to 3.6GHz Max. Turbo Frequency (2.9GHz Base Frequency) 6MB cache, 4 cores, 4 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Supports Intel® vPro™ Technology and Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 6 Intel® 4th Generation Core™ i7 Processors
Intel® Core™ i7-4770S Processor
Up to 3.9GHz Max. Turbo Frequency (3.1GHz Base Frequency) 8MB cache, 4 cores, 8 threads
Intel® GT2 – 4600 Graphics
Supports DDR3 memory up to 1600 MT/s data rate
Supports Intel® vPro™ Technology and Intel® Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) NOTE: Multi-Core is designed to improve performance of certain software products. Not all customers or software applications will necessarily benefit from use of this technology. 64-bit computing system required. Performance will vary depending on your hardware and software configurations. Intel’s numbering is not a measurement of higher performance.

Intel® vPro™ Technology
HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 platforms featuring this technology include processors that are part of the Intel 2013 Stable Image Platform Program (SIPP) designed to ensure the stability promise inherent in the value proposition of the HP RP5 Model 5810, thus making this model the most stable, secure, and manageable platforms available to retailers today.

Intel Advanced Management Technology (AMT) v9.0 – An advanced set of remote management features and functionality which provides network administrators the latest and most effective tools to remotely discover, heal, and protect networked client systems regardless of the system's health or power state. AMT 9.0 includes the following advanced management functions:
 Power Management (on, off, reset)
 Hardware Inventory (includes BIOS and firmware revisions  Hardware Alerting
 Agent Presence
 System Defense Filters
 SOL/IDER
 Cisco NAC/SDN Support
 ME Wake-on-LAN
 DASH 1.1 compliance
 IPv6 Support
 Fast Call for Help - a client inside or outside the firewall may initiate a call for help via BIOS screen, periodic connections, or alert triggered connection
 Remote Scheduled Maintenance - pre-schedule when the Retail System connects to the IT or service provider console for maintenance. Remote Retail Systems can get required patches, be inventoried, etc by connecting to their IT console or Service Provider when it's convenient
 Remote Alerts – automatically alert IT or service provider if issues arise  Access Monitor – Provides oversight into Intel® AMT actions to support security requirements  PC Alarm Clock
 Microsoft NAP Support
 Host Base set-up and configuration
 Management Engine (ME) firmware roll back
 Wireless AMT functionality on Point of Sale/Desktop (WoDT)  Enhanced KVM resolution
Redundant Array of Independent Drives (RAID)
Flexible implementation:
 DriveLock is supported while in RAID mode. Users can manage the DriveLock password from within F10 Setup.

Locked drives will be displayed as such in the RAID option ROM interface.  Hard drive information can be viewed within F10 Setup while in RAID mode. Previously, the hard drives will not QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 7 appear in Drive Configuration when switching to RAID mode.  The RAID Setup Utility (accessed through CTRL-I) can be protected by the F10 Setup password.

NOTE:

RAID 1 is the only RAID configuration offered via HP factory configurations. The pre-configured systems:
 are complete RAID systems and have both drives installed.  have the necessary Option ROM configuration.
 are pre-loaded and pre-installed with all required Intel software.  include a preinstalled operating system that is mirrored mode out of the box.

Please refer to the HP White Paper titled “Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) and Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) on HP Compaq PCs” at: http://www.hp.com for more information and instructions.

DDR3 Synchronous DRAM NON-ECC System Memory
The HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 supports the 4th generation Intel® Core™ processor family. Based on a new microarchitecture, the processor is designed for a two-chip platform consisting of a processor and Platform Controller Hub (PCH). Unlike previous generations, the 4th generation Intel® Core™ processor includes an Integrated Memory Controller (IMC). The IMC supports DDR3/DDR3L protocols with two independent, 64-bit wide channels each accessing one or two DIMMs.
 Two channels of non-ECC DDR3/DDR3L unbuffered dual in-line memory modules (UDIMM) or DDR3/DDR3L unbuffered small
 Outline dual in-line memory modules (U-DIMM) with a maximum of two DIMMs per channel  Single-channel and dual-channel memory organization modes  Data burst length of eight for all memory organization modes  Memory data transfer rates of up to 1600 MT/s; actual supported data transfer rate determined by the configured processor.
 64-bit wide channels
 DDR3/DDR3L system memory I/O voltage of 1.5V
 Theoretical maximum memory bandwidth of:
o 21.3 GB/s in dual-channel mode assuming 1333 MT/s
o 25.6 GB/s in dual-channel mode assuming 1600 MT/s
CAUTION: You must shut down the Retail System and disconnect the power cord before adding or removing memory modules. Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always supplied to the memory modules as long as the Retail System is plugged in to an active AC outlet.

Adding or removing memory modules while voltage is present may cause irreparable damage to the memory modules or system board.

Memory Configurations:

Maximum Memory Supports up to 32 GB of DDR3 SDRAM using DIMM modules. Slot 1 is black and must always be populated. Not all memory configurations possible are represented below.

NOTE:

For systems configured with more than 3 GB of memory and a 32-bit operating system, all memory may not be available due to system resource requirements. Addressing memory above 4 GB requires a 64-bit operating system.

Total Memory Slot
Channel A Channel B
1 (black) 2 (white) 3 (white) 4 (white)
4 GB 4 GB
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 8 (dual channel symmetric)
8 GB
(dual channel symmetric)
4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB
16 GB
(dual channel symmetric)
4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB
32GB
(dual channel symmetric)
8 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB
NOTE: The Intel Q87 Express chipset includes a built-in Management Engine (ME), which allocates memory for manageability functions.

Management Engine memory is shared with system memory. If the POS System contains a single U-DIMM, 16 MB of memory is pre-allocated for it at system startup. If the POS System contains two U-DIMMs, 32 MB of memory is pre-allocated. This memory is not made available to the operating system, just as pre-allocated video memory is not available.

Front View Quantity Supported Position Controller

3.5-inch SATA Hard Drive 3 1, 2*, 3 SATA
Optical Drive Bay or Carrier for
Hard Drive
1 2 SATA
External HDD can be connected through optional external ESATA port. 3 Drive maximum NOTE: When ESATA is installed, either the 2nd HDD (if applicable) or ODD (if applicable) cannot be used. * For CRU Removable storage in lieu of ODD
Data Storage Drives
SATA Hard Disk Drives
HP 500GB SATA 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
HP 2TB SATA 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
HP 500GB SATA 3.0 Removable Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
Note: For hard drives, GB = 1 billion bytes. TB = 1 trillion bytes. Actual formatted capacity is less. Up to 30 GB (for Windows 8.1) of system disk is reserved for the system recovery software.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 9 SATA SED Hard Disk Drives
HP 500GB SATA SED 3.0 Hard Disk Drive (3.5")
7,200 rpm, 16MB cache, 6.0 GB/s, NCQ, Smart IV
Solid State Drives (2.5” Drives use a 3.5" drive cage adapter) HP 32GB 2.5” SSD
HP 64GB 2.5” SSD
HP 128 GB M.2 PCIe SSD
HP 128GB 2.5” SSD
HP 256GB 2.5” SSD
HP 128GB 2.5” SED SSD
HP 256GB 2.5” SED SSD
Optical Disc Drive
HP SATA DVD-ROM Drive
Note: Optical drives are optional or add on features. Duplication of copyrighted material is strictly prohibited. Actual speeds may vary. Double Layer media compatibility will widely vary with some home DVD players and DVD-ROM drives. Note that DVD-RAM cannot read or write to 2.6GB Single Sided/5.2 Double Sided-Version 1.0 Media.

Security Solutions and Capabilities
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21
Stringent security (via BIOS)2
SATA port disablement (via BIOS)
Drive lock
RAID configurations
HP ProtectTools Security Software Suite
Serial, parallel, USB enable/disable (via BIOS)
Optional USB Port Disable at factory (user configurable via BIOS) Power Configurable Serial Ports (COM 1, 2, 3 and 4 ) via the HP BIOS Removable media write/boot control
Power-On password (via BIOS)
Setup password (via BIOS)
HP Hood Sensor
TPM 1.2 Embedded Security Chip* integrated with Broadcom NIC HP ProtectTools Security Software Suite with BIOS Configuration (serial (all 4), parallel, USB enable / disable), Credential Manager, Smart Card Manager (sold separately)
Three (3) port 12 Volt USB + PWR Card (sold separately) Two (2) port Power Configurable RS232 Serial Card COM 3 & 4 (sold separately) Wall Mount (sold separately)
HP Desktop Security Lock Kit (lock and cable) (sold separately) Security Cable with Kensington lock (sold separately)
HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover (sold separately)
1 TPM module disabled where use is restricted by law; for example, Russia. 2 This setting is defaulted to disable, but when enabled, the PW jumper will not clear the BIOS pre-boot authentication passwords.

NOTE: TPM module disabled where use is restricted by law; for example, Russia.

I/O Ports
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 10 USB USB 2.0:

Front: Two (2), covered
Rear: Three (3)
USB 3.0:

Rear: Two (2)
USB 24V One (1) 24V powered USB
Serial Two (2) RS-232 (power configurable) ports standard Parallel One port available as an option*
eSATA One port available as an option*
RS-232 Two (2) RS-232 powered configurable ports optional (for a total of 4*) USB+PWR 12V Two (2) USB+PWR 12V cards optional (three (3) 12 Volt USB+ PWR per card) for a total of 6* PS/2 One (1) color-coded support for keyboard (purple)
One (1) color-coded support for mouse (green)
RJ-12 One (1) RJ-12 Cash Drawer port
Video One (1) VGA
One (1) DisplayPort v1.2 and One (1) DisplayPort v1.2 as an option* Provides integrated dual independent monitor support
DVI output Available via optional DisplayPort to DVI Adapter Audio Rear: Line input (supports microphone or line input) and line out All ports are 3.5mm in diameter
NOTE: See Audio/Visual section for information on re-taskable audio ports NIC One (1) Industry standard RJ-45 port accesses the integrated network interface controller *These options occupy slot openings so less slots will be available when the options are installed Serial Ports (Power Configurable in HP Bios) – detail
1 and 2: Powered Configurable serial port expansion card installation that supplies two additional serial ports (COM3 and COM4)
3 and 4: Two Power Configurable serial ports, COM1 and COM 2, are standard on the POS System.

Slots
Full-Height Total of Two (2) Full-Height Slots, with a Choice of either:

1.) PCI x1 - Two (2) each: 4.2" full height, 6.6" length, 25W max. power

2.) PCIe x1 - Two (2) each: 4.2" full height, 6.6" length, 10W max. power Half-Height Total of Two (2) Half-Height:

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 11 PCIe x16 (wired as x4) - One (1) each: 2.5" low profile, 6.6" length, 10W max. power PCIe x16 (wired as x16) - One (1) each: 2.5 low profile, 6.6" length, 25W max. power Bays
External 1 each 5.25”
Internal HDD 2 each 3.5”
Controllers
Hard drive SATA
Supports up to SATA 6.0 Gb/s
SATA interfaces One (1) SATA 2.0
Two (2) SATA 3.0
Host SATA Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Revision 1.2. The specification includes a description of the hardware/software interface between system software and the host controller hardware Network Interface Connections
Intel I217LM GbE Network Connection (integrated)
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless PCIe CLink NIC (optional) Intel I210-T1 PCIe x1 Gb NIC (optional)
Broadcom NetXtreme GgE PCIe NIC (optional)
NOTE: The integrated network connection is required to support Intel vPro Technology. 802.11 requires wireless access point and internet service. Availability of public wireless access points limited. Gigabit Ethernet speeds may vary.

Graphics
Integrated:

Intel HD Graphics (integrated)
Intel HD Graphics 4600
Discrete:

NVIDIA Quadro NVS 315 Graphics 1GB
NVIDIA Quadro NVS 510 Graphics 2GB
Note: HD content required to view HD images. Integrated Intel HD graphics uses part of the total system memory for video performance.

System memory dedicated to video performance is not available for other use by other programs.

HP DisplayPort to DVI-D Adapter
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter
Multi-Media
High Definition Audio (integrated) with Realtek ALC261 codec (all ports are stereo) Line-out and Line-In rear Ports (3.5mm)
Internal Speaker (standard)
Input/Output Devices
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail (optional)
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Standard Features and Configurable Components (availability may vary by country) c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 12 HP PS/2 Optical Mouse (optional)
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail (optional)
HP USB Optical Mouse (optional)
Miscellaneous Devices and Configurations
HP Parallel Port Adapter
HP Serial Port Adapter
HP Tower Stand
HP Rear Port/Cable Control Cover
HP RP5 Model 5810 PCI Riser Assembly
HP RP5 Model 5810 PCIe Riser Assembly
Three (3) port 12 Volt USB + Pwr Card
Two (2) port RS232 Serial (power configurable) COM 3 & 4 port card QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 13 Weights & Dimensions
(configured with 1 HDD & 1 ODD)
Chassis
(H x W x D)

13.3 x 14.9 x 3.95 in

33.8 x 37.9 x 10cm
System Volume 788 cu in

13.0 L
Packaging
(H x W x D)

23.38 x 19.68 x 9.00 in

59.38 x49.99 x22.85 cm
System Weight* 15.08 lb

6.84 kg
Shipping Weight* 16.28lb

7.34kg
Max Supported Weight
(desktop orientation)
* Exact weight depends on
configuration

77.0 lb

35.0 kg
Unit Environment and Operating Conditions
General Unit Operating Guidelines
 Keep the POS System away from excessive moisture, direct moisture and the extremes of heat and cold, to ensure that unit is operated within the specified operating range.
 Leave a 10.2-cm (4-in) clearance on front side and power supply side of the POS System to permit the required airflow.  If within an enclosure, the front side should be 100% open. The clearance between the system and the cabinet must be at least 10 mm (0.4 inch) on the sides and top and at least 50-mm (2-inch) clearance in the rear with power supply venting area 100% open per the above bullet.
 Never restrict airflow into the POS System by blocking any vents or air intakes.  Do not stack POS Systems on top of each other or place POS Systems so near each other that they are subject to each other's re-circulated or preheated air.
 Occasionally clean the air vents on the front, back, and any other vented side of the POS System. Lint, dust and other foreign matter can block the vents and limit the airflow.

Temperature Range Operating: 50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C)* Non-operating: -22° to 149° F (-30° to 65° C)
Relative Humidity Operating: 20% to 85% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating: 0% to 95% (non-condensing at ambient)
Maximum Altitude
(unpressurized)
Operating: 10,000 ft (3048 m)
Non-operating: 30,000 ft (9144 m)
* Operating temperature is de-rated 1.0 deg C per 300 m (1000 ft) to 3000 m (10,000 ft) above sea level, no direct sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10 deg C/Hr. The upper limit may be limited by the type and number of options installed.

Power Supply 240-watt – EPA90 power supply – Active PFC *This power supply meets ENERGY STAR compliance in
conjunction with a select range of processors and modules.

Operating Voltage Range 90 to 264 VAC
Rated Voltage Range 100 to 240VAC
Rated Line Frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating Line Frequency Range 47 – 63 Hz
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 14 Rated Input Current 4A
Efficiency 87/90/87% at 20/50/100% load
Power Supply Fan 90 mm variable speed fan
ENERGY STAR Compliant ENERGY STAR 6.0 compliant
Power Cord Length 6.0ft (1.8 3m)
Current Leakage (NFPA99) < 275 µA
ROM BIOS Information
Key features of the HP BIOS include:
 Deployment and manageability – HP BIOS provides several technologies that help integrate the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 into retail, such as PXE, remote configuration, remote control, and F10 Setup support for 12 languages.  Select models feature either Intel Standard Manageability or vPro Technology.  Stability – HP BIOS supports the HP stable product roadmap by releasing only critical BIOS changes to the factory and advanced change notification.
 Computrace agent – For tracking and tracing services, available in select countries, separate software and purchase of a subscription is required.
 Thermal and power management – The HP BIOS provides and enables thermal and power management technologies so component temperatures are managed for high reliability and to assist in operating the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 in any retail environment.
 Acoustic performance – Industry leading acoustic emissions across the range of operating conditions.  Serviceability – HP BIOS provides diagnostic and detailed service information.  Upgrades and recovery – HP BIOS provides numerous ways to upgrade the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810, including BIOS updates from within DOS (Flashbin), BIOS updates from within Windows (HPQFlash), HP Client Manager, and failsafe recovery. In addition, the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 BIOS Utilities tool enables replicated BIOS setup throughout the Enterprise; it is available from within the BIOS software and from the support website Additional HP BIOS Features
 Power-On password – Helps prevent an unauthorized user from powering on the system.  Administrator password – Also known as the setup password, this helps prevent unauthorized changes to the system configuration. If the administrator password is not known, the BIOS version cannot be changed and changes cannot be made to BIOS settings using F10 setup or under the OS.
 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) – Represents a significant innovation in power and configuration management, allowing operating systems and applications to manage power based on activity and usage. HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 use ACPI to provide power conservation features.  S5 Max Power Savings setting supports EU Lot6 requirement and allows the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 to power down below 1W is S5 (when turned off). When S5 Max Power Savings feature is enabled power to slots is turned off along with WOL functionality.

Other Features
 Advanced Configuration and Power Management Interface (ACPI). Allows the system to wake from a low power mode.

Controls system power consumption, making it possible to place individual cards and peripherals in a low-power or powered-off state without affecting other elements of the system.  System Management BIOS v2.7
 Intel Wired for Management support; industry wide initiative to make Intel architecture based Retail Systems, PCs, servers and mobile computers more inherently manageable out-of-the-box and over the network  Dual State Power Button; acts as both an on/off button and a suspend-to-sleep button QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 15 Serviceability Features
 Dual colored power LED on front of the HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 to indicate either normal or fault condition  Indicator Lights on front of system:

Power / Diagnostic LED Hard Drive LED
NIC Link LED NIC Activity LED
 Diagnostic LED Explanation Table:
o Number of 1-second red LED blinks followed by a 2-second pause, then repeats:
 2 – processor thermal protection activated
 3 – processor not installed
 4 – power supply failure
 5 – memory error
 6 – video error
 7 – PCA failure (ROM detected failure prior to video)  8 – invalid ROM, bootblock recovery mode
 9 – system not fetching code
 10 – system hang while loading an option ROM
 System/Emergency ROM
 NIC Link and activity LED's on front bezel
 Flash ROM
 CMOS Battery Holder for easy replacement
 Flash Recovery with Video Configuration Record Software  5 Aux Power LED on System PCA
 Processor ZIF Socket for easy Upgrade
 Over-Temp Warning on Screen (Requires IM Agents)
 Clear Password Jumper
 DIMM Connectors for easy Upgrade
 Clear CMOS Button
 NIC LEDs (integrated) (Green & Amber) - Rear
 Color coordinated cables and connectors
 Tool-less Hood Removal
 Front power button
 System memory can be upgraded without removing the system board or any internal components  Tool-less Hard Drive, Optical Drive Removal
NOTE: thumb screw release mechanism is used with the Ultra-slim Desktop chassis cover.

Additional Features Description
Intel® Standard Manageability
 Requires the utilization of the integrated network connection  Delivered with processors that are not part of the Intel Stable Intel Platform Program (SIPP)
 Intel Advanced Management Technology (AMT) v9.0
 Basic Retail SYSTEM management capabilities such as asset inventory, HW alerting, SOL/IDE-R, remote configuration, agent presence and system defense.
 DASH 1.1 compliance. Support for profile updates.
 Host VPN support for local management VPN tunneling
Intel Standard Manageability includes features of Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT). Intel AMT requires the Retail system to have an Intel AMT- QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 16 enabled chipset, network hardware and software, as well as connection with a power source and a corporate network connection. Setup requires configuration by the purchaser and may require scripting with the management console or further integration into existing security frameworks to enable certain functionality. For more information, see http://www.intel.com/technology/platform-technology/intel-amt/.

DASH 1.1 support (Desktop and Mobile
Architecture for System Hardware)
A standards initiative for representing out-of-band management capability for Retail Systems. It is a secure, web-services based successor to ASF.

ASF 2.0 support (Alert Standard Format) Industry-standard specification for network alerting in operating system-absent environments
TXT (Trusted Execution Technology) and
VT-d (Virtualized devices)
TXT allows for secure management (via TPM) and measured launch of VMM, as well as teardown of secrets in unexpected reset case. TXT support provided in select Intel processors
VT-d is a chipset technology that virtualizes directed I/O Together, TXT and VT-d may be used to support verified launch of a known trusted VMM that also may protect VMs from accessing each other's memory.

Computrace Computrace agent support standard
Towerable Orientation The chassis can be oriented as either a desktop or a tower.

Drive Protection System
DPS Access through F10 Setup during Boot
A diagnostic hard drive self test. It scans critical physical components and every sector of the hard drive for physical faults and then reports any faults to the user Running independently of the operating system, it can be accessed through a Windows-based diagnostics utility or through the Retail System's setup procedure. It produces an evaluation on whether the hard drive is the source of the problem and needs to be replaced
The system expands on the Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART), a continuously running systems diagnostic that alerts the user to certain types of failures
SMART Technology (Self-Monitoring,
Analysis and Reporting Technology)
SMART I – Drive Failure Prediction
SMART II – Off-Line Data Collection
SMART III – Off-Line Read Scanning with
Defect Reallocation
SMART IV – End-to-End CRC for hard drives
Allows hard drives to monitor their own health and to raise flags if imminent failures were predicted
Predicts failures before they occur. Tracks fault prediction and failure indication parameters such as re-allocated sector count, spin retry count, calibration retry count By avoiding actual hard drive failures, SMART hard drives act as "insurance" against unplanned user downtime and potential data loss from hard drive failure IOEDC: I/O Error Detection Circuitry
Detects errors in Read/Write buffers on HDD cache RAM
Interface in F10 setup provides confirmation of SMART IV support.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Audio
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 17 High Definition Audio
Type Integrated
HD Stereo Codec Realtek 2-channel ALC221 codec
Audio I/O Ports Rear Line-In/Microphone input (47-K ohm Input Impedance, function is configurable by audio driver)
Rear Line-Out* (200 ohms Output Impedance, expects at least a 10-K ohm load) Line-in and Line-out, both on rear.

All ports are 3.5mm in diameter
Internal Speaker Amplifier 1.5W amplifier for the internal speaker only. External speakers must be powered externally. Rear Line-in audio port is re-taskable as either Line-in or Microphone-In.

Multi-streaming Capable Multi-streaming can be enabled in the Realtek control panel to allow independent audio streams to be sent to/from the front and rear jacks.

Sampling 8 kHz – 192 kHz
Wavetable Syntheses
(software)
Yes – Uses OS soft wavetable
Analog Audio Yes
# of Channels on Line-Out
(mono/stereo)
Stereo (Left & Right channels)
Internal Speaker Yes
External Speaker Jack
(Line-Out)
Yes
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 18 Intel® I217LM GbE Network Connection (integrated)
Connector RJ-45
System Interface Integrated on PCA
Controller Intel I217LM GbE platform LAN connect networking controller Memory 24 KB FIFO packet buffer memory
Data rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
802.1P
802.1Q
802.2
Compliance 802.3
802.3ab
802.az
802.3u
Bus architecture PCI Express and SMBus
Data transfer mode PCIe-based interface for active state operation (S0 state) and SMBus for host and management traffic (Sx low power state)
Power requirement Requires 3.3V and 0.9V or just 3.3V with integrated regulators Power consumption 0.733 Watts
Boot ROM support Yes
Network transfer mode Full-duplex
Half-duplex (not supported for the 1000BASE-T transceiver) Network transfer rate 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
Environmental Operating Temperature: 32° to 185°F (0° to 85° C) Operating Humidity: 60% RH
Management WOL, auto MDI crossover, PXE, Multi-port teaming, RSS, Advanced cable diagnostic.

Alerting ASF 2.0 support, AMT 9.0 support
Intel Ethernet I210-T1 GbE NIC Card
Connector RJ-45
System Interface PCI Express x1
Controller Intel I210 Gigabit Ethernet Controller
Memory Integrated Dual 48K configurable transmit receive FIFO Buffers Data rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
Compliance IEEE 802.1P, 802,1Q, 802.2, 802.3, 802.3AB and 802.3u compliant, 802.3x flow control Bus architecture PCI Express 2.1
Data path width X1, 250 MB/s, Bi-directional interface
Data transfer mode Bus-master DMA
Hardware certifications FCC, B, CE, TUV- cTUVus Mark Canada and United States, TUV- GS Mark for European Union Power requirement Aux 3.3V, 3.0 Watts in 1000base-T and 2.0 Watts in 100Base-T Boot ROM support Yes
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 19 Network transfer mode Full-duplex
Half-duplex (not available for the 1000BASE-T transceiver) Network Transfer Rate 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps (actual rate limited by PCI Bus) Environmental Operating Temperature: 32° to 131°F (0° to 55° C) Operating Humidity: 85% at 131° F (55° C)
Dimensions 2.56 x 2.17 x 0.8 in (6.5 x 5.5 x 2.0 cm)
Management capabilities WOL, PXE, DMI, WFM 2.0
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n PCIe x1 WLAN Card
Wireless LAN standards IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
Interoperability Wi-Fi certified
Cisco Compatible Extensions Program compliant with Microsoft Windows 7, Windows Vista and XP (details at: http://www.hp.com/go/notebooks/WLAN)
1 Frequency band 802.11b/g/n 2.402 - 2.482 GHz
802.11 a/n 4.9 - 4.95 GHz (Japan)

5.15 - 5.25 GHz

5.25 - 5.35 GHz

5.47 - 5.725 GHz

5.825 - 5.850 GHz
Antenna structure 2 transmit; 2 receive (2x2)
Data rates 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11n: MCS 0 ~ MCS 15, (20MHz, and 40MHz)
Modulation Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
CCK, BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM
Security2
 IEEE and WiFi compliant 64 / 128 bit WEP encryption for a/b/g mode only  AES-CCMP: 128 bit in hardware
 802.1x authentication
 WPA, WPA2: 802.1x. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, TKIP, and AES
 WPA2 certification
 IEEE 802.11i
 Cisco Certified Extensions, all versions through CCX4 and CCX Lite  WAPI
Sub-channels Multinational support with frequency bands and channels compliant to local regulations.

Network architecture models Ad-hoc (Peer to Peer)
Infrastructure (Access Point Required)
Roaming IEEE 802.11 compliant roaming between band Access Points Output power3 2.4G: +13.5dBm minimum
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 20 (approximately) 5G: +12dBm minimum
Power Consumption Transmit mode 2.0 Watts
Receive Mode 1.6Watts
Idle mode4 250mW (WLAN Associated)
Idle mode 100 mW (WLAN unassociated)
Radio off 75mW
Power Management ACPI and PCI Express compliant power management 802.11 compliant power saving mode
Receiver sensitivity5 802.11g:-90 dBm (6 Mbps), -89 dBm (9 Mbps), -87 dBm (12 Mbps), -85 dBm (18 Mbps), -82 dBm (24 Mbps), -79 dBm (36 Mbps), -76 dBm (48 Mbps), -74 dBm (54 Mbps) 802.11b:-95 dBm (1 Mbps), -93 dBm (2 Mbps), -91 dBm (5.5 Mbps), -88 dBm (11 Mbps) 802.11g:-90 dBm (6 Mbps), -89 dBm (9 Mbps), -87 dBm (12 Mbps), -85 dBm (18 Mbps), -82 dBm (24 Mbps), -79 dBm (36 Mbps), -76 dBm (48 Mbps), -74 dBm (54 Mbps) 802.11n:-69 dBm (150 Mbps), -66 dBm (300 Mbps)
Antenna connections 2 U.FL type connectors (output impedance of 50 ± 2 ohms) Form Factor PCI-Express Half-MiniCard
Dimensions 0.12 x 1.06 x 1.18 in (3.1 x 26.8 x 30.0 mm) Weight Approx. 0.122 lb (55.7 g)
Operating voltage 3.3V +/- 9%
Temperature Operating 14° to 158° F (-10° to 70° C)
Non-operating -40° to 176° F (-40° to 80° C)
Humidity Operating 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Non-operating 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude Operating 0 to 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
Non-operating 0 to 50,000 ft (15,240 m)
LED activity LED Amber - Radio OFF; LED White - Radio ON OS Support Windows 8.1 Pro (64-bit)*
Windows 8.1 (64-bit)*
Windows 8 Pro (64-bit)*
Windows 8 (64-bit)*
Windows 7 Ultimate (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Ultimate (64-bit)**
Windows 7 Professional (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Professional (64-bit)**
Windows 7 Home Premium (32-bit)**
Windows 7 Home Premium (64-bit)**
Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11***
*Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com. **Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 7. This system may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware to take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windows-7/ for details. ***Most features not available on Linux.

Option kit contents PCIe x1 card with full height bracket, rf antenna, antenna cable, separate low profile bracket, software CD and warranty.

1. WLAN supplier's client utility is required for Cisco Compatible Extensions support with Microsoft Windows XP. WLAN may also be compatible with certain thirdparty software supplicants. WLAN supplier IHV extensions required for Cisco Compatible Extensions support for Microsoft Windows Vista.

2. Check latest software/driver release for updates on supported security features.

3. Maximum output power may vary by country according to local regulations.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Communications
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 21

4. In Power Save Polling mode and on battery power.

5. Receiver sensitivity is measured at a packet error rate of 8% for 802.11b (CCK modulation) and a packet error rate of 10% for 802.11a/g (OFDM modulation).

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 22 Intel HD Graphics (integrated)
VGA Controller Integrated
DisplayPort Multimode capable; supports HDCP, Display Port Audio (2 streams), HBR2 link rates and Multi-Stream Technology for a maximum of 3 displays (including the integrated panel) Memory Intel graphics do not have dedicated memory but utilizes some of the computer's system memory. The amount of memory used for graphics depending on the amount of system memory installed, BIOS settings, operating system, and system load. 32 MB is pre-allocated for graphics use at system boot time. Additional memory can be allocated at boot time by the BIOS for PAVP (Protected Audio Video Playback) support for playback of protected video content.

Maximum Graphics
Memory
Microsoft Windows 7
Up to 1.7GB
Windows 8
Up to 1.8GB
Note: The actual amount of maximum graphics memory can be less than the amounts listed above depending on your computer’s configuration.

Graphics/Video API
Support
 The Processor Graphics contains a refresh of the seventh generation graphics core enabling substantial gains in performance and lower power consumption. Up to 16 EU support.  Next Generation Intel Clear Video Technology HD Support is a collection of video playback and enhancement features that improve the end user's viewing experience o Encode/transcode HD content
o Playback of high definition content including Blu-ray Disc o Superior image quality with sharper, more colorful images  DirectX Video Acceleration (DXVA) support for accelerating video processing o Full AVC/VC1/MPEG2 HW Decode
 Advanced Scheduler 2.0, 1.0
 Windows 7
 Windows 8, Linux OS Support
 DirectX 11.1
 OpenGL 4.0
 Open CL 1.2
Resolution Refresh Rates (Hz)
800x600 60
1024x768 60
1280x600 60
1280x720 60
1280x800 60
1280x960 60
1280x1024 60
1360x768 60
1366x768 60
1440x1050 60
1440x900 60
1600x900 60
1600x1200* 60
1680x1050 60
1920x1080 60
1920x1200* 60
1920x1440* 60
2560x1440* 60
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 23 2560x1600* 60
* Only supported when using a DisplayPort connector
NVIDIA NVS 315 1GB PCIe x16 Graphics Card
Form Factor Low Profile: 2.713 × 6.15 in
Graphics Controller NVIDIA® NVS 315
Bus Type PCIe x16, 2.0 Compliant
Memory Size: 1GB, 64bit wide bus
Clock: 875 MHz
Memory Bandwidth: 14 GB/s
Connectors DMS-59, with support for dual VGA, dual DVI or dual DisplayPort with the appropriate adapter cable.

NOTE: Optional cable required for DVI and DisplayPort connectivity.

Display Max. Resolution Up to 2048 x 1536 VGA; 1920 x 1200 DVI; 2560 x 1600 DisplayPort Display Output Up to 2 displays in the following configurations  Dual DVI:
o Drives two DVI displays using optional HP DMS59 DVI Dual-head Connector Cable DL139A
 Dual DisplayPort:
o Drives two DisplayPort using optional HP DMS-59 to Dual DisplayPort kit XP688AA  Dual VGA:
o Drives two analog using the included HP DMS-59 to Dual VGA Cable Supported Display
Resolutions and Refresh
Rates
NOTE: Other resolutions may be available but are not recommended as they may not have been tested and qualified by HP.

Resolution Analog Connection Digital Connection
640x480 85 60
720x480 85 60
720x576 85 60
800x600 85 60
1024x768 85 60
1280x720 85 60
1280x768 85 60
1280x1024 85 60
1440x900 75 60
1600x1024 85 60
1600x1200 85 60
1680x1050 75 60
1920x1080 85 60-R
1920x1200 85 60-R
1920x1440 85 N/A
2048x1536 75 N/A
2560x1440 N/A 60*
2560x1600 N/A 60*
* Display Port Only
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 24 NVIDIA NVS 510 2GB Graphics Card
Form Factor Low Profile, 2.713 inches × 6.3 inches, single slot Graphics Controller NVS 510 GPU
Core Clock: 797 Mhz
Memory Clock: 891 Mhz
CUDA Cores: 192
Bus Type PCI Express™ x16 Generation 2.0
Memory 2GB DDR3
Connectors Four mini-DisplayPort.

Four mini-DisplayPort to DisplayPort adapters included. (DisplayPort to DVI-D, DisplayPort to VGA, DisplayPort to HDMI, and DisplayPort to Dual-Link DVI adapters available as separate accessories)
Maximum Resolution Mini-DisplayPort connectors support ultra-high-resolution panels (up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60Hz) NOTE: This card supports up to four displays. For Windows XP, only 2 active displays are supported.

RAMDAC Not Applicable
Image Quality Features 10-bit internal display processing, including hardware support for 10-bit scan-out Display Output DisplayPort with Multi-Stream Technology (MST) and High Bit Rate 2 (HBR2) support.

Digital Display Support

1. DisplayPort Output
 Drives four DisplayPort enabled digital display at resolutions up to 3840 × 2160 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking, when connected natively using the 4 DisplayPort connectors on the NVS 510 graphics card.
 DisplayPort Multi-Stream Topology (MST) Technology: Supports various combinations of display resolutions and number of displays when using DisplayPort multi stream topology technology - up to a maximum of 4 monitors at a resolution of 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking.

2. DVI-D Output
 Drives four digital displays at resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking using DisplayPort to DVI-D single-link cable adaptors.
 Drives four digital displays at resolutions up to 2560× 1600 at 60 Hz with reduced blanking using DisplayPort to DVI-D dual-link cable adaptors.

3. HDMI Output
 The NVS 510 graphics board is capable of driving four high definition (HD) panels up to resolutions of 1920 × 1080P at 60 Hz using DisplayPort to HDMI cable adaptors.

Analog Display Support

1. VGA display output
 Drives four analog displays at resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 60 Hz using DisplayPort to VGA cable adaptors.

Supported Graphics APIs Full Microsoft DirectX 11, Shader Model 5.0 support QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Graphics
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 25 Full OpenGL 4.3 support
Power consumption 33.4 Watts
Note Heatsink cooler design is active
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort plug and HDMI receptiacle
Adapter length 8.0 in (20.0 cm)
Adapter weight .10 lbs (.05 kg)
HP DisplayPort to DVI-D Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort and DVI-D single link connector
Adapter length 7.5 in (19.0 cm)
Adapter weight .10 lbs (.05 kg)
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter
Connectors DisplayPort and VGA connector
Adapter length 8 in (20 cm)
Adapter weight .1 lbs (.06 kg)
Max. vertical refresh rate 85 Hz
Display support 162 MHz RAMDAC
Display max resolution 1600x1200
Resolutions Supported Resolution Max refresh rate
640x480 85
800x600 85
1024x768 85
1280x720 85
1280x1024 85
1440x900 75
1600x1200 60
1680x1050 60
1920x1080 60-R
1920x1200 60-R
NOTE:

Other resolutions may be available but are not recommended as they may not have been tested and qualified by HP. Using the HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter may require an update to the graphics driver installed on your system. To install the most up-to-date graphics driver go to:
www.hp.com.

NOTE:
60-R denotes reduced blanking timings are used. Not all monitors support reduced blanking timing.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 26 Introduction:

HP Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) Hard Drives maximize the performance of HP Retail Systems by providing the technologies to meet your increasing storage demands with high-capacity drives offering superior reliability and performance.

SATA provides faster data transfer speeds, better system cooling airflow, more bandwidth, more headroom for speed increases in future generations and better data integrity. A next-generation technology, the SATA interface connects hard drives to the Retail System platform enabling easy aggregation of multiple hard drives into a single Retail System. This offers you the additional benefits of dedicated bandwidth, the ability to more easily identify device failures and scalability. The HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810 supports the latest SATA 6.0Gb/s specification.

HP Drive Lock
HP Serial ATA Hard Drives offer enhanced security via a new Drive Lock. When enabled, this ATA security feature set prevents software access to user data on the drive until one or two user-defined passwords are provided.

SMART IV Technology
Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) hard drive technology allows hard drives to monitor their own health and to raise flags if imminent failures are predicted. If the drive determines that a failure is imminent, the SMART hard drive technology enables the intelligent manageability or management software to generate a fault alert. While the current versions of SMART hard drives do a good job monitoring the data on the hard drive media, the ever increasing emphasis on reliability and quality has promoted HP to implement SMART IV technology which constantly checks that the data flow from host interface to media and media to host interface is not compromised. This is accomplished by inserting a 2 byte parity code into every 512 byte block in the data path of the hard drive's Cache RAM. This unique parity checking performed by HP's SMART IV technology hard drives, allows for more complete error detection coverage encompassing the entire data path between the host and the hard drive.

Smart IV is also known as IOEDC: I/O Error Detection Code.

Native Command Queuing
NCQ or Native Command Queuing is a SATA protocol extension that allows the hard drive to have several write or read commands outstanding at the same time. In contrast, normal non-queued operation requires each command to be completed before the next command is issued by the host system. Queuing allows the drive to complete the commands in the order that allows for best overall throughput. It also involves an advanced method of transferring data to or from the host, called First Party Direct Memory Access (FPDMA), which allows the hard drive and the host controller to manage the data transfers for multiple outstanding commands, without involving the host processor. NCQ can contribute to better performance but the results are dependent on many factors, including the access patterns of the various applications and operating system functions that are initiating drive accesses. Enabling NCQ features in the hard drive requires AHCI support from the host system BIOS, controller, and driver. AHCI support is typically implemented in RAID configurations.

NOTE: GB = 1 billion bytes. Actual available capacity is less.

HP Solid State Drives
HP 32GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 32,017,047,552 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 27 Logical Blocks 62,533,296
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 64GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 63,023,063,040 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Logical Blocks 123,091,920
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 128,035,676,160 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 256GB SATA Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 256,060,514,304 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 500,118,192
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 512GB Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 512,110,190,592 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 28 Buffer Size 512 MB
Logical Blocks 1,000,215,216
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128GB SATA SED Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 128,035,676,160 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 128 GB* M.2 PCIe SSD
Unformatted Capacity 128 GB*
Architecture NAND Flash Memory which has a high reliability and a high technology in a small form factor for using a SSD and supporting PCIe interface up to 4 lanes.

Form Factor PCIe SATAe Ultrathin
Dimensions
(Width x Length x Thickness) .899 x 3.149 x .146 in (22 x 80 x 3.73 mm) Bandwidth Performance -
Performance measured using
IOMeter 2008 on Windows 8
64bit. Actual performance may
vary depending on use
conditions and environment.

Sustained Sequential Read (128KB): Up to 920 MB/ss
Sustained Sequential Write (128KB): Up to 430 MB/s
Random Read (4KB): up to 8500 IOPs
Random Write (4KB): up to 32000 IOPs
Power
Allowable voltage 3.3V ± 5%
Total power consumption: 5.8 W (Active) ; 80 mW; (Idle) MTBF 1.5 M hours
Environmental
(all conditions, noncondensing)
Operating Temperature: 32° to 158° F (0° to 70° C)
Relative Humidity (operating): 5% to 95%
Shock: 1,500 G
Regulations
Safety TUV UL CB c-UL-us TUV
UL CB
c-UL-us
TUV

EMC/EMI CE (EU)
BSMI (Taiwan)
KCC (South Korea)
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 29 VCCI (Japan)
C-Tick (Austrailia)

FCC (USA)
* For solid state disk drives, GB means 1 billion bytes. Actual formatted capacity is less. Up to 16GB for Windows 7 and up to 36GB for Windows 8.1 is reserved for system recovery software. ** The product achieves a mean time between failure (MTBF) based on population statistics not relevant to individual units.

HP 256GB SATA SED Solid State Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 256,060,514,304 bytes
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 Gb/s
Buffer Size 256 MB
Logical Blocks 500,118,192
Height (nominal) 7mm
Width (nominal) Physical size: 70mm
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C
HP 500GB Hard Disk Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 16 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 13 ms
Full-Stroke: 25 ms
Height (nominal) 0.374 in/9.5 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 2.5 in/63.5 mm
Physical size: 2.75 in/69.85 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 500GB SED Hard Disk Drive (2.5” with caddy)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 32 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 30 Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 13 ms
Full-Stroke: 25 ms
Height (nominal) 0.267 in/6.8 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 2.5 in/63.5 mm
Physical size: 2.75 in/69.85 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 500GB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 500,107,862,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 16 MB
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP 1TB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 1,000,204,886,016 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 32 MB
Logical Blocks 1,953,525,168
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 31 HP 2TB Hard Disk Drive (3.5”)
Capacity 2,000,409,772,032 bytes
Rotational Speed 7,200 rpm
Interface Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0
Synchronous Transfer Rate
(maximum)
Up to 6 GB/s
Buffer Size 64 MB
Logical Blocks 3,907,050,336
Seek Time (typical reads,
includes controller overhead,
including settling)
Single Track: 2.0 ms
Average: 11 ms
Full-Stroke: 21 ms
Height (nominal) 1 in/25.4 mm
Width (nominal) Media diameter: 3.5 in/88.9 mm
Physical size: 4 in/101.6 mm
Operating Temperature 41° to 131° F
5° to 55° C
HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure
Introduction
The HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure supports up to 3 Gb/s SATA transfer rates along with Gold DIN connectors that are rated for 30,000 insertions and removals. Robust all-metal construction provides superior cooling while protecting the hard drive during transportation and storage. A powered key lock prevents theft or accidental removal during operation and a temperature sensing fan ensures sufficient airflow across the hard drive based on workload.

The HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure consists of two components; a receiving frame and a removable drive carrier. Install the receiving frame into the 5.25" optical storage bay and then relocate your primary system hard drive or secondary hard drive to the removable drive carrier. Then insert the drive carrier into the receiving frame and you have a fully configured removable hard drive.

Interface Type Compatible with 3.5” SATA controllers
Dimensions (W x L x H) 5.73 x 7.87 x 1.61 in (14.6 x 20 x 4.1 cm) Weight 1.56 lbs (707 g) (not including hard drive)
HP DX115 Removable Drive Enclosure
Introduction
The HP DX115 Removable Enclosure is a rugged drive carrier and receiving frame for internally mounting a SATA hard drive into the 5.25 inch optical drive bay in the HP RP5 Retail System.

The DX115 supports one 3.5" SATA (Serial ATA) hard disk drive.  HP DX115 Removable HDD Frame/Carrier - A receiving frame and carrier for a SATA hard disk drive. The receiving frame installs in one of the 5.25" optical bays in the HP RP5 Retail System. The carrier holds the HDD and has a quick release handle for insertion/removal. You can install any HP supported 3.5" disk in the carrier.  HP DX115 Removable HDD Carrier - Use this carrier for adding spare or additional drives. Hard Drive purchased separately.

QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Data Storage Drives
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 32 Performance and Features
Enclosure with centered drive carrier ensures no interference with the system bezel. Drive spin/power up/down button. Power, spin & fan failure indicator. Drive activity indicator (system-dependent). "Soft Start" circuitry & anti-static device protection.

Cable-less drive connector. Rugged construction; drive is protected in the event of physical trauma. Mating connectors provide 25K insertion rating for multiple insertions and removals. Integrated fan assures proper drive cooling. Key lock functions independently from drive power
Interface Type Compatible with 3.5” SATA controllers
Dimensions (W x H x D) 147.6mm W x 41.1mm H x 205mm L
(5.81” W x 1.62” H x 8.08” L)
Weight Frame and Carrier: 1.73 kg (3.8 lbs)
Carrier: 0.45 kg (1 lbs)
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 33 HP DVD-ROM Drive
Height 5.25-inch, half-height, tray-load
Orientation Either horizontal or vertical
Interface type SATA/ATAPI
Disc capacity Single layer: Up to 4.7 GB (6 times capacity of CD-ROM) Double layer: Up to 8.5 GB (12 times capacity of CD-ROM) Dimensions (W x H x D) 5.9 x 1.7 x 8.0 in (15.0 x 4.4 x 20.3 cm) Weight (max) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Read speeds DVD+R/-R/+RW/
-RW/+R DL /-R DL
Up to 8X
DVD-ROM Up to 16X
DVD-RAM Up to 5X
CD-ROM, CD-R Up to 40X
CD-RW Up to 32X
Removable Storage - Media
Compatibility - DVD-ROM
Media Read Write
CD-ROM Yes No
CD-R Yes No
CD-RW Yes No
DVD-ROM Yes No
DVD-ROM DL Yes No
DVD-RAM Yes No
DVD+R Yes No
DVD+R DL Yes No
DVD+RW Yes No
DVD-R Yes No
DVD-RW Yes No
DVD-R DL Yes No
Access times
(typical reads, including
setting)
Random DVD: < 140 ms (typical), CD: < 125 ms (typical)
Full Stroke DVD: < 250 ms (seek), CD: < 210 ms (seek)
Cache Buffer 2 MB (minimum)
Data Transfer Modes ATA PIO mode 4 (16.7 MB/s); ATA Multi-word DMA mode 2 (16.7 MB/s); ATA UltraDMA Mode 3 (44.4 MB/s -default)
Power Source SATA DC power receptacle
DC Power Requirement 5 VDC ± 5%-100 mV ripple p-p
12 VDC ± 5%-200 mV ripple p-p
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 34 DC Current 5 VDC - <1000 mA typical, < 1600 mA maximum
12 VDC -< 600 mA typical, < 1400 mA maximum
Environmental
(all conditions
non-condensing)
Temperature 41° to 122° F (5° to 50° C)
Relative Humidity 10% to 90%
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature
86° F (30° C)
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail
Physical characteristics Keys 104, 105, 106, 107, 109 layout (depending upon country) Dimensions (L x W x H) 18.0 x 6.4 x 0.98 in (45.8 x 16.3 x 2.5 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) minimum
Electrical Operating voltage + 5VDC ± 5%
Power consumption 50-mA maximum (with three LEDs ON)
System interface USB Type A plug connector
ESD CE level 4, 15-kV air discharge
EMI - RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft® PC 99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Languages 38 available
Keycaps Low-profile design
Switch actuation 55-g nominal peak force with tactile feedback Switch life 20 million keystrokes (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Contamination-resistant switch membrane
Key-leveling mechanisms For all double-wide and greater-length keys Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)
Microsoft PC 99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Acoustics 43-dBA maximum sound pressure level
Environmental Operating temperature 50° to 122° F (10° to 50° C) Non-operating temperature -22° to 140° F (-30° to 60° C) Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing at ambient) Operating shock 40 g, six surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, six surfaces
Operating vibration 2-g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4-g peak acceleration
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 35 Drop (out of box) 26 in (66 cm) on carpet, six-drop sequence Drop (in box) 42 in (107 cm) on concrete, 16-drop sequence Approvals UL, CSA, FCC, CE Mark, TUV, TUV GS, VCCI, BSMI, C-Tick, MIC Ergonomic compliance ANSI HFS 100, ISO 9241-4, and TUVGS Kit contents Keyboard Installation Guide
Warranty Card Safety and Comfort Guide
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail
Physical characteristics Keys 104, 105, 106, 107, 109 layout (depending upon country) Dimensions (L x W x H) 18.0 x 6.4 x 0.98 in (45.8 x 16.3 x 2.5 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) minimum
Electrical Operating voltage + 5VDC ± 5%
Power consumption 50-mA maximum (with three LEDs ON)
System interface PS/2 6-pin mini din connector
ESD CE level 4, 15-kV air discharge
EMI - RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft® PC 99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Languages 38 available
Keycaps Low-profile design
Switch actuation 55-g nominal peak force with tactile feedback Switch life 20 million keystrokes (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Contamination-resistant switch membrane
Key-leveling mechanisms For all double-wide and greater-length keys Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)
Microsoft PC 99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Acoustics 43-dBA maximum sound pressure level
Environmental Operating temperature 50° to 122° F (10° to 50° C) Non-operating temperature -22° to 140° F (-30° to 60° C) Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing at ambient) Operating shock 40 g, six surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, six surfaces
Operating vibration 2-g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4-g peak acceleration
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 36 Drop (out of box) 26 in (66 cm) on carpet, six-drop sequence Drop (in box) 42 in (107 cm) on concrete, 16-drop sequence Approvals UL, CSA, FCC, CE Mark, TUV, TUV GS, VCCI, BSMI, C-Tick, MIC Ergonomic compliance ANSI HFS 100, ISO 9241-4, and TUVGS HP PS/2 Optical Mouse
Dimensions (H x L x W) 1.46 x 2.48 x 4.53 in (3.70 x 6.29 x 11.50 cm) Weight 3.53 oz (100g; +10g/- 5 g)
Environmental Operating temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40° C) Non-operating temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60° C)
Operating humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing at ambient) Non-operating humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Operating shock 40 g, 6 surfaces
Non-operating shock 80 g, 6 surfaces
Operating vibration 2 g peak acceleration
Non-operating vibration 4 g peak acceleration
Drop
(out of box)
80 cm height onto asphalt tile over concrete or equivalent, 5- drop in 5 direction except the cable face
Electrical Operating voltage 5 VDC ± 10%
Power consumption 100mA
System consumption PS/2 mini-din connector
ESD CE level 4, 15 kV air discharge
EMI-RFI Conforms to FCC rules for a Class B computing device Microsoft PC99 - 2001 Functionally compliant
Mechanical Resolution 800 DPI
Tracking speed 10 in/s (25.4 cm/s) maximum
Acceleration ± 15%
Switch actuation 65±20 gf
Switch life 3,000,000 operations (using Hasco modified tester) Switch type Low force micro-switches
Tracking mechanism life 80km
Cable length 6 ft (1.8 m)
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Input/Output Devices
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 37 Microsoft PC99 - 2001 Mechanically compliant
Scroll wheel Width 6 mm
Diameter 22.5 ± 0.2 mm
Maximum rotation speed 50 gf-cm
Switch type Light force micro-switch
Switch life 1 million operations
Mechanical life Max 200,000 revolutions
Regulatory Approvals UL/cUL, FCC, CE Mark, TUV/GS, VCCI, KCC, BSMI, C-Tick Compatibility Operating system support Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 7, Windows 7 Professional, Windows Vista Business 64*, Windows Vista Business 32*, Windows Vista Home Basic 32*, Windows XP
Professional or Windows XP Home 32* (no driver is required for this device. Native support is provided by the operating system.), xpe, ce.net, Linux, XP-64
*Certain Windows Vista product features require advanced or additional hardware. Windows Vista Upgrade Advisor can help you determine which features of Windows Vista will run on your computer. To download the tool, visit http://www.windowsvista.com/upgradeadvisor. For Windows Vista system requirements, visit
http://www.windowsvista.com/systemrequirements.

HP USB Optical Mouse
Dimensions (H x L x W) 1.5x 4.5 x 2.5 in (3. 7x 11.5 x 6.3 cm) Weight 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) (Typical weight with cable)
Cable length 70.9 in (180 cm)
System requirements Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 7, Windows 7 Professional, Windows Vista Business 64*, Windows Vista Business 32*, Windows Vista Home Basic 32*, Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home 32* (No driver is required for this device. Native support is provided by the operating system.), xpe, ce.net, Linux, XP-64 QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 38 Eco-Label Certifications &
declarations
This product has received or is in the process of being certified to the following approvals and may be labeled with one or more of these marks:
 US ENERGY STAR ®
 IT ECO declaration
 EPEAT Gold registered in the United States. See http://www.epeat.net for registration status in your country.

Energy Consumption 115 VAC 230 VAC 100 VAC
Normal Operation 38.55W 38.62W 38.42W
Sleep (Energy Star low power
mode)

2.65W 2.90W 2.70W
Off 0.93W 1.12W 0.92W
NOTE:

Energy efficiency data listed is for an ENERGY STAR® compliant product if offered within the model family. HP computers marked with the ENERGY STAR® Logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR® specifications for computers. If a model family does not offer ENERGY STAR® compliant configurations, then energy efficiency data listed is for a typically configured model.

Heat Dissipation* 115 VAC 230 VAC 100 VAC
Normal Operation 132 BTU/hr 132 BTU/hr 131 BTU/hr
Sleep 9 BTU/hr 10 BTU/hr 9 BTU/hr
Off 3 BTU/hr 4 BTU/hr 3 BTU/hr
* Heat dissipation is calculated based on the measured watts, assuming the service level is attained for one hour.

Declared Noise Emissions
(in accordance with
ISO 7779 and ISO 9296)
System Fan Off Sound Power
(LWAd, bels)
Sound Pressure
(LpAm, decibels)
Idle 3.7 28
Fixed Disk
(random writes)

3.8 29
Batteries This battery(s) in this product comply with EU Directive 2006/66/EC Batteries used in the product do not contain:
 Mercury greater the 5ppm by weight
 Cadmium greater than 10ppm by weight
Battery size: CR2032 (coin cell)
Battery type: Lithium
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 39 Additional information  This product is in compliance with the Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) directive – 2002/95/EC.
 This HP product is designed to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive – 2002/96/EC.
 This product is in compliance with California Proposition 65 (State of California; Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986).
 This product is in compliance with the IEEE 1680 (EPEAT) standard at the Gold where HP registers commercial desktop products. See http://www.epeat.net for registration status in your country.
 Plastics parts weighing over 25 grams used in the product are marked per ISO 11469 and ISO1043.
 This product contains 7.5% post consumer recycled plastic (by wt.)  This product is 91.3% recyclable when properly disposed of at end of life.

Packaging Materials
 External:
o Corrugated – 1320 g
 Internal:
o Polyethylene low density foam – 196 g
 The corrugated packaging material varies in recycled content:
o North America – at least 25% recycled content
o Asia – at least 62% recycled content (Singapore at least 80%) o Europe – at least 50% recycled content
 The Polyethylene low density Foam packaging material varies in recycled content:
o North America – 100% (Pre-consumer or Post-industrial) o Asia – 10%
o Europe – 7%
RoHS Compliance Hewlett-Packard is committed to compliance with all applicable environmental laws and regulations, including the European Union Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive.

HP's goal is to exceed compliance obligations by meeting the requirements of the RoHS Directive on a worldwide basis. By July 1, 2006, RoHS substances will be virtually eliminated (virtually = to levels below legal limits) for all HP electronic products subject to the RoHS Directive, except where it is widely recognized that there is no technically feasible alternative (as indicated by an exemption under the EU RoHS Directive).

Material Usage This product does not contain any of the following substances in excess of regulatory limits (refer to the HP General Specification for the Environment at:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/supplychain/gen_specifications.html):
 Asbestos
 Certain Azo Colorants
 Certain Brominated Flame Retardants – may not be used as flame retardants in plastics  Cadmium
 Chlorinated Hydrocarbons
 Chlorinated Paraffins
 Formaldehyde
 Halogenated Diphenyl Methanes
 Lead carbonates and sulfates
 Lead and Lead compounds
 Mercuric Oxide Batteries
 Ozone Depleting Substances
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Technical Specifications - Environmental Data
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 40  Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBBs)
 Polybrominated Biphenyl Ethers (PBBEs)
 Polybrominated Biphenyl Oxides (PBBOs)
 Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB)
 Polychlorinated Terphenyls (PCT)
 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – except for wires and cables, and certain retail packaging has been voluntarily removed from most applications.
 Radioactive Substances
 Tributyl Tin (TBT), Triphenyl Tin (TPT), Tributyl Tin Oxide (TBTO)  Nickel finishes that release greater than 0.5 micro-grams/cm2/week, measured according to EN 1811:1998, are not used on any product surface designed to be frequently handled or touched by users.

Packaging HP follows these guidelines to decrease the environmental impact of product packaging:
 Eliminate the use of heavy metals such as lead, chromium, mercury and cadmium in packaging materials.
 Eliminate the use of ozone-depleting substances (ODS) in packaging materials.  Design packaging materials for ease of disassembly.
 Maximize the use of post-consumer recycled content materials in packaging materials.  Use readily recyclable packaging materials such as paper and corrugated materials.  Reduce size and weight of packages to improve transportation fuel efficiency.  Plastic packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11469 and DIN 6120 standards.

End-of-life Management
and Recycling
Hewlett-Packard offers end-of-life HP product return and recycling programs in many geographic areas. To recycle your product, please go to: http://www.hp.com/go/reuse-recycle or contact your nearest HP sales office. Products returned to HP will be recycled, recovered or disposed of in a responsible manner.

The EU WEEE directive (2002/95/EC) requires manufacturers to provide treatment information for each product type for use by treatment facilities. This information (product disassembly instructions) is posted on the Hewlett Packard web site at: http://www.hp.com/go/recyclers.

These instructions may be used by recyclers and other WEEE treatment facilities as well as HP OEM customers who integrate and re-sell HP equipment.

Hewlett-Packard Corporate
Environmental Information
For more information about HP's commitment to the environment:

Global Citizenship Report
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/gcreport/index.html Eco-label certifications
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html ISO 14001 certificates:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/operations/envmanagement.html QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 41 Communication Devices
Part #
Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Plus NIC FS215AA
Intel Ethernet I210-T1 GbE NIC E0X95AA
Intel 7260 802.11 a/b/g/n PCIe x1 WLAN Card F2P07AA
NOTE:

The use of a discrete network interface connection card (wired or wireless) will disable the vPro Technology features.

Graphics Solutions
Part #
NVIDIA NVS 315 1GB Graphics Card E1U66AA
NVIDIA NVS 510 2GB Graphics Card C2J98AA
HP DMS59 DVI Dual-head Connector Cable DL139A
HP DMS-59 to Dual DisplayPort Adapter XP688AA
HP DisplayPort Cable Kit VN567AA
HP DisplayPort To Dual Link DVI-D Adapter NR078AA
HP DisplayPort To DVI-D Adapter FH973AA
HP DisplayPort to HDMI Adapter BP937AA
HP DisplayPort to VGA Adapter AS615AA
HP USB Graphics Adapter NL571AA
Hard Disk Storage Drives
Part #
HP 500GB SATA (6.0Gb/s) Hard Disk Drive QK554AA
HP 1TB SATA (6.0Gb/s) Hard Disk Drive QK555AA
HP 128GB Solid State Drive QV063AA
128GB M.2 PCIe SSD J8W51AV
HP DX115 Removable HDD Frame/Carrier FZ576AA
HP DX115 Removable HDD Carrier NB792AA
HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure (frame & carrier) RY102AA HP Removable SATA Hard Drive Enclosure (carrier only) RY103AA Input / Output Devices
Part #
HP PS/2 Standard Keyboard for Retail J4A10AA
HP USB Standard Keyboard for Retail J4A11AA
HP 2-port Powered Serial Port Card QP906AA
HP 12V PUSB Entry Card QP905AA
HP PS/2 Optical Mouse QY775AA
HP USB Optical Mouse QY777AA
System Memory
Part #
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 42 HP 4GB DDR3-1600 MHz DIMM B4U36AA
HP 8GB DDR3-1600 MHz DIMM B4U37AA
Multimedia Devices
Part #
HP DVD-ROM Drive AR629AA
HP SuperMulti Drive QS208AA
HP Blu-ray Writer Drive B4F70AA
Security Devices
Part #
HP Chassis Security Kit AR639AA
HP Business PC Security Lock PV606AA
HP Wall Mount/Security Sleeve VN570AA
Accessories
Part #
HP rp5800 Trim Bezel – with ODD Opening QP910AA
HP Integrated Work Center Stand QP897AA
HP Tower Stand VN569AA
HP Serial Port Adapter PA716A
HP Parallel Port Adapter KD061AA
HP Rear Port / Cable Control Cover QP909AA
Retail Solutions Specific Accessories
Part #
HP Standard Duty Cash Drawer QT457AA
HP USB Standard Duty Cash Drawer E8E45AA
HP Heavy Duty Cash Drawer FK182AA
HP Flip-Top Cash Drawer BW867AA
HP Till with Locking Cover QT458AA
HP Flip-Top Till with Locking Cover BZ335AA
HP Imaging Barcode Scanner BW868AA
HP Imaging Barcode Scanner 7-foot Cable BZ337AA
HP Linear Barcode Scanner QY405AA
HP Presentation Barcode Scanner QY439AA
HP Wireless Barcode Scanner E6P34AA
HP POS Pole Display FK225AA
HP Graphical Pole Display QZ704AA
HP Mini MSR with Brackets FK186AA
HP POS Keyboard without MSR FK221AA
HP POS Keyboard with MSR FK218AA
HP Powered USB Thermal Receipt Printer FK224AA
HP Serial/USB Thermal Receipt Printer BM476AA
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
After-Market Options (availability may vary by region)
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 43 HP Hybrid POS Printer with MICR FK184AA
Epson H6000IV Hybrid POS Printer D9Z51AA
Epson T88V PUSB Receipt Printer E1Q93AA
EpsonT88V Serial USB Receipt Printer D9Z52AA
HP Value PUSB Receipt Printer F7M67AA
HP Value Serial/USB Receipt Printer F7M66AA
HP USB Y Cable (for Serial USB Receipt Printer) BM477AA HP Cable Pack for Dual Cash Drawers QT538AA
HP L5006tm 15-inch LCD (SAW) Touchscreen Monitor RB146AA HP L5009tm 15-inch LCD (APR) Touchscreen Monitor VK202AA HP L1506x 15-inch LED Monitor (Non-Touchscreen) LL543AA HP L6010 10.4-inch Monitor (Non-Touchscreen) A1X76AA
HP Dual Position Stand for L6010 A1X79AA
HP L6015tm 15-inch (PCAP) Touchscreen Monitor A1X78AA
HP L6017tm 17-inch (PCAP) Touchscreen Monitor A1X77AA
HP Height Adjusting Stand for L6015/17tm A1X81AA
HP Integrated Barcode Scanner E1L07AA
HP Retail Integrated Fingerprint Reader QZ672AA
HP Retail Integrated Webcam QZ673AA
HP Retail Integrated Dual-Head MSR QZ700AA
HP rp5800 Terminal Enclosure Assembly QQ971AA
HP rp5800 Integration Tray Assembly QQ972AA
HP Display Pole Mount Assembly QQ973AA
HP Optional Display Arm Assembly QQ974AA
QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
Summary of Changes
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 44 Date of change: Version History: Description of change:

May 16, 2014 V7 May Changed
Added Add document ID to footnotes section, LCD Pole Display and 7-in CFD
December 8, 2014 From v7 to v8 Added Intel Core i3-4150, 128GB M.2 PCIe SSD QuickSpecs HP RP5 Retail System, Model 5810
c04304464 — DA - 14956 Worldwide — Version 8 — December 8, 2014 Page 45 Copyright © 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

All rights reserved. Microsoft, Windows 8.1, Windows 7, and Windows POSReady 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel, Core, and Pentium are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
hidglobal.com

PHYSICAL ACCESS SOLUTIONS
ProxCard® II Card
Durable, Value Priced Proximity Access Card
THE RF-PROGRAMMABLE PROXCARD® II PROXIMITY
ACCESS CARD IS THE INDUSTRY CHOICE FOR A COSTEFFECTIVE SOLUTION TO PROXIMITY ACCESS CONTROL. Proven, Reliable Technology – Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable
environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Convenient To Use – Can fit into a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge.
Cross-reference – A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration.
Security – Offers over 137 billion unique codes.
Long Life – Passive, no-battery design allows for an infinite number of reads.
Durability – Strong, flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking.
Companion Products– 1321 Photo pouch overlay
1324 PVC Direct print overlay
The RF-programmable ProxCard® II proximity access card is the industry choice for a cost-effective solution to proximity access control.

Features:
Offers universal
compatibility with all
HID proximity readers.
Provides durable
packaging and
consistent read range.
Provides an external
number for easy
identification and
control.
Supports formats up to
85 bits, with over 137
billion codes.
Custom pre-printed
artwork available.
A PVC overlay allows
for on-site photo ID
using most direct image
printers.
Using HID’s
ProxProgrammer®,
card vendors can
ship ProxCard II
proximity cards,
custom programmed
to their customers’
requirements, from their
own inventory. Enables
smaller order quantities
and overnight delivery.
(Check with vendor for
availablilty.)

SPECIFICATIONS
© 2011 HID Global Corporation. All rights reserved. HID, the HID logo, ProxCard logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HID Global in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
2012-05-14-hid-proxcardii-cards-ds-en
North America: +1 949 732 2000
Toll Free: 1 800 237 7769
Europe, Middle East, Africa: +44 1440 714 850
Asia Pacific: +852 3160 9800
Latin America: +52 55 5081 1650
hidglobal.com
ProxCard® II Card
Base Part Number 1326
Typical Maximum*
Read Range
ProxPoint® Plus reader-up to 3” (7.5 cm)
MiniProx® reader-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
ThinLine® II reader-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
ProxPro® reader-up to 8” (20 cm)
ProxPro® II reader-up to 9”(22.9 cm)
Prox80™-up to 5.5” (14 cm)
MaxiProx® reader-up to 24” (60 cm)
Dimensions 2.135” x 3.385” x 0.075” MAX.
(5.4 x 8.6 x 0.19 cm)
Operating
Temperature -50° to 160° F (-45° to 70° C)
Options
External card numbering
(inkjet only; no laser engraving)
Custom artwork (text or graphics)
Weight 0.24 oz. (6.8 gm)
Warranty Lifetime

3.385"
(8.6 cm)

0.075"
(0.19 cm)
MAX.

2.135"
(5.4 cm)
MAX.

NOTES:
*Dependent on local installation conditions.

Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 1 | 8 Datasheet
Compact and suitable for networks, the GE 300 Intercom
Server is ideal for Intercom systems where small, manageable units are combined to form a network. Each GE 300 acts as an Intercom IP-Server that controls the different interfaces:
interface cards for speech, control and indication functions and communication with other systems such as video
systems, door and gate control, telephone systems, and
more. The simple modular construction of the basic operating system enables continuous upgrading for new applications and features. The latest design results in the system being physically compact and conforming to the highest standards of electronic reliability. All kinds of Intercom stations, 2‑wire, 4-wire as well as IP-stations, can be connected to the GE 300. Connection of the special GEI 300 interface housing also allows cards from the GE 800 to be used.

Compact System Intercom IP-Server GE 300

1. GE 300
Basic housing including power supply, with five plug-in slots. Up to 40 IP-subscribers (or 20 analogue or 20 digital). One AF input (for music or alarm); two inputs for floating contacts; two relay outputs; configuration via Ethernet or RS 232.

2. GEZ 300
Expansion housing including power supply with 5 plug-in slots.

Up to 80 subscribers together with basic housing. Basic housing required.

3. GEI 300
Interface housing with two slots for G8-interface cards. Basic housing required.

GE 300
1 2
3 GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 2 | 8 datasheet
Technical Data - Benefits
Benefits
• Compact plastic housing suitable for wall mounting
• Easy installation and start-up
• More than 150 standard features
• Latest Intercom technology
• For all kinds of Intercom stations (IP, digital or analogue) • Digital networking over IP, 2-wire lines, E1 or ISDN
• Integrated functions for door/gate control, alarms,
conferences and central control desks
• Plug&Play CCTV integration
• Flexible expansion by means of different feature packages • Wide range of applications
• User-friendly configuration with PC software (included in extent of supply)
Extent of Supply
• GE 300 / GEZ 300 / GEI 300 incl. short reference, cable bearers, screws and dowels
The types of GE 300 and GEZ 300 differ in extent of supply:
• GE 300, GEZ 300: without power supply unit/transformer • GE 300EU: incl. 24 V DC power supply unit
• GE 300CA: incl. 24 V DC power supply unit with adapters for

AUS, USA, UK
• GEZ 300EU: incl. transformer 230 V Europa
• GEZ 300AU: incl. transformer 230 V AUS
• GEZ 300US: incl. transformer 120 V USA
• GEZ 300UK: incl. transformer 230 V UK
Expansion
Subscribers: Outputs: Inputs:

Basic expansion: 0 2 2
Maximum expansion: see “Plug-in Position of the Cards”
Technical Data GE 300
Power supply: 24 V DC +/–5% / 30 W / 20 subscribers*
Emergency power consumption: 200 mAh (without cards)
cards: see corresponding data sheet
Power consumption: maximum (All Call): 30 W
Frequency range: 50 to 15 kHz (–3 db)
Distortion: less than 0.9%
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 1650 g (3.64 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting
Relay outputs: max. switching capacity: 60 W / 62.5 VA, max. switching current: 2A
max. switching voltage: 60 VDC / 40 VAC
Music input: max. 800 mVrms at 10 kΩ, 16 kHz
Inputs IN1, IN2: for floating contacts,
max. line resistance: 1.5 kΩ
Technical Data GEZ 300
Power supply: 24 V AC +/–5% / 40 VA / 20 subscribers
24 – 35 V DC / 40 W / 20 subscribers
Emergency power consumption: 200 mAh (without cards)
cards: see corresponding data sheet
Power consumption: maximum (All Call): 40 VA
Frequency range: 50 to 15 kHz (–3 db)
Distortion: less than 0.9%
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 2300 g (5 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting
*power supply of up to 16 digital subscribers without GEI 300 power supply of up to 12 digital subscribers with GEI 300 (with inserted card)
Options when in need of more digital subscribers:
– using external power supply for the stations – or
– using the 70 W power supply unit C-PA70W24V for the GE 300; has to be ordered separately.

In order to be able to use the full capacity of the power supply unit, an appropriate configuration in CCT 800 is required, therefore see manual GE 300 („Power Management“).

Technical Data GEI 300
Power supply: from GE 300 or GEZ 300
Emergency power consumption: without cards:
no power consumption
Operating temperature range: 0° C to +50° C (32° F to 122° F) Storage temperature range: –30° C to +60° C (–22° F to 140° F) Relative humidity: 20% to 80% not condensing
Measurements of the housing: 310 x 210 x 77.5 mm
(12.21 x 8.27 x 3.05 inch)
Weight including package: approx. 1200 g (2.65 lbs)
Mounting: Wall mounting
GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 3 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Precautions
• This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
• GEZ 300: Defective power cables of the transformer may not be repaired or changed. In case of defective power cables, the whole transformer must be changed.
• Mounting and installation of the Intercom Server GE 300 and of the equipment may be carried out by authorised service personnel only.
• Cards may be inserted or removed only with voltage switched off.
• Before exchanging of cards, ESD precautions must be observed. The M3 screw nut of the motherboard G3-GEM (see “Mounting, Cable Run” on page 6) is used as grounding point for Wrist Strap Grounding.

Configuraton via IP
The GE 300 Intercom Servers are automatically recognized in local networks by CCT 800 1.3 for configuration (reachable via layer 2).

Configuration via RS232
For configuration of the GE 300 a 9-way D-Submin connection cable is required (1:1, plug on Server side, socket on PC side):

GND 5 5
NC 4 4
NC 6 6
NC 7 7
NC 8 8
NC 9 9
RXD 3 3
TXD 2 2
NC 1 1
GE 300 (9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-submin jack) PC
NC = not connected
This cable can be purchased at an electric outfitter or ordered with the type “X-KAB-CCT“.

GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 4 | 8 datasheet
Installation
plug-in cards for ge 300
Subscriber Cards with Speech Storage
G3-IP IP Subscriber Card for up to 8 IP-Intercom stations, basic card for 4 subscribers with feature level B, upgrades to 8 subscribers and feature level C, D or P can be activated by licence keys G3-GED Subscriber Card for 4 digital 2-wire Intercom stations, basic card with feature level B, upgrade to feature level C, D or P can be activated by a licence key
G3-GET Subscriber Card for 4 analogue 4-wire Intercom stations, basic card with feature level B, upgrade to feature level C, D or P can be activated by a licence key
G8-TEL4 * Telephone Subscriber Card with 4 analogue FXS ports e.g. for telephones, card is available in feature level C or D Input/Output Cards
G3-16A Plug-in card with 16 relay outputs (4 of which are make, open or switch over contacts, 12 only as make contacts) G3-16E Plug-in card with 16 inputs for floating contacts, with or without line monitoring.

Read in of 5 operation states (Idle, Active 1, Active 2, Short, Line break) G3-8E8A Plug-in card with 8 inputs for floating contacts and 8 relay outputs (make, open or switch over).

Read in of 5 operation states with inputs (Idle, Active 1, Active 2, Short, Line break) Interface Cards
G8-V24-PRO * Programmable V24-card with 2 RS 232-interfaces, of which one can be configured as RS 422 G3-TEL Telephone interface with one FXO port, e.g. for connection to an analogue subscriber of a telephone system or directly to a standard telephone line
G8-SELCALL * Radio interface for connection of selective-call radio systems to Intercom systems, available for selective tones according to ZVEI and CCIR.

G8-AUD-2 * Digital Audio-Recording-Card with 2 audio channels (IN/OUT) and two relay contacts, basic card in feature level B, upgrade to feature level D can be activated by a licence key G8-AUD-4 * Digital Audio-Recording-Card with 4 audio channels (IN/OUT) and four relay contacts, basic card in feature level B, upgrade to feature level D can be activated by a licence key IP-Networking
G3-LAN GE 300 IP network card for connections via Ethernet, up to 8 LAN-connections, bandwidth for up to 8 simultaneous conversations, music programs or radio channels in full quality HDSL-, ISDN- and Multiplexer-Networking
G8-CNET-W * High-speed network card for connections via 2 wires (multi channel – HDSL) with a length of up to 4 km (2.48 miles), bandwidth for up to 12 conversations, music programs or radio channels, up to 4 Servers in series or 100 Servers in a tree structure G8-CNET-E1 * High-bitrate network card for connections via transmission routes that conform to the E1 standard, connection to multiplexer or media converter, bandwidth for up to 10 conversations, music programs or radio channels, up to 4 Servers in series or 100 Servers in a tree structure
G3-S0-I * Network card for connection via the S0-interface of an ISDN connection, bandwidth for two conversations (G3-S0-I one conversation) between two Servers networked via S0
VoIP-Interfacing
G8-IAX * Interface card for up to 8 trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the IAX2 protocol, basic card with 4 connections and feature level B, upgrades to 8 connections and feature level C or D can be activated by licence keys G3-IAX Interface card for up to 4 trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the IAX2 protocol, basic card with 2 connections and feature level B, upgrades to 4 connections and feature level C or D can be activated by licence keys G8-VOIPSERV * Server card for trunk connections to VoIP Servers, which support the SIP protocol, or directconnection of SIP telephones as main or substations
G3-IF Powerful interface card with up to 2 virtual TCP/IP-interfaces, standard Commend-Intercom-protocol and 2 RS 232 for connection of extern systems
* For use in a GE 300 IP-Intercom Server these cards require the GEI 300 Interface housing GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 5 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Plug-in Position of the Cards
The plug-in cards can be inserted in the following slots:

GE 300 GEZ 300 GEI 300 Maximum number of cards
Card type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 max. per
GE 300
max. per
GEZ 300
max. per
GEI 300
G3-GET           - - 5 5 -
G3-GED           - - 5 5 -
G3-IP           - - 5 5 -
G3-8E8A           - - 5 5 -
G3-16A           - - 5 5 -
G3-16E           - - 5 5 -
G3-TEL           - - 5 5 -
G3-IF           - - 5 5 -
G3-LAN 1           - - together 1 1 -
G3-IAX           - - 5 5 -
G8-IAX - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-VOIPSERV 3 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 23
G8-V24-PRO - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-SELCALL 2 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 12
G8-CNET-E1 1 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 21
G8-CNET-W 1 - - - - - - - - - -   - - 21
G8-AUD - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G3-S0-I - - - - - - - - - -   - - 2
G8-TEL4 - - - - - - - - - -  - - - 1
1 Only one G3-LAN, one licence L3-LAN-4 or CNET-W/E1 cards may be used simultaneously 2 The second slot of the GEI 300 is occupied by the G8-V24-PRO delivered with the G8-SELCALL 3 Min. G8-VOIPSERV Rev. AB
GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 6 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Mounting, Cable Run
GEZ 300
GE 300
/ 2
4 /
4 /
A
B
C
D
GEI 300
SW2
+24V
M3
Expansion
housing
RJ11-Socket
Cable bearer Cable bearer
Grounding point
for wrist strap
grounding
max. 120 mm (4.7 inch)
max. 120 mm (4.7 inch) 110 cm
(4.3 inch)
140 cm
(5.5 inch)
290 mm (11.4 inch)
306 mm (12.1 inch)
180 mm (7.1 inch)
206 mm (8.1 inch)
24VAC
supply
Analogue
Digital
Analogue
GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 7 | 8 datasheet
Installation
Connection Diagram
24 VAC 24 VAC
+30V
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
GE 300
AA
BB
AC
BD
GEI 200
GEI 300
GEZ 300
GEI 300
+
+
-
-
GEZ 300
GEI 300)
G3-16A
G3-GED-4
G3-16A
G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
G3-GET-4 G3-GET-4
Status-LED
Status-LED
ON
OFF
IP
RS232
IN2
IN1
MUSIC
+24V
M3
OUT1
OUT1 OUT2
OUT2
+
+
-
-
Power
potential free outputs
Slot number
Expansion plug
Expansion plug
Music / Alarm
input
potential free
inputs
Slot number
Slot 11 Slot 12
(or
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
30 VDC
supply
optionally
instead of
24 VAC
optionally:
30 VDC
output
max. 100mA
Attention: For GE 300 and GEZ 300
two separate power supply units
have to be used!
GE 300
Datasheet Version 2.1/0913 | Errors and omissions excepted | Products may change in the interest of technical improvements without notice. www.commend.com P 8 | 8 datasheet

AUSTRIA

SLOVENIA
RUSSIA

HUNGARY
Commend Österreich GmbH
Tel. +43-1-715 30 79
www.commend.at

CROATIA
SERBIA

BOSNIA-HERZEGOVINA

MONTENEGRO

MACEDONIA
KOSOVO

ALBANIA
Commend Adria d.o.o.

Tel. +385-1-369 11 23
www.commend.hr
FRANCE Commend France S.A.S.

Tel. +33-149 18 16 40
www.commend.fr

NETHERLANDS

BELGIUM

LUXEMBURG
Commend Benelux B.V.

Tel. +31-76-200 01 00
www.commend.nl
ITALY Commend Italia S.R.L.

Tel. +39-035-95 39 63
www.commend.it

SWITZERLAND

LIECHTENSTEIN
Commend AG
Tel. +41-44-955 02 22
www.commend.ch
Europe
USA
CANADA

LATIN AMERICA
Commend Inc.

Tel. +1-201-529-2425
www.commendusa.com
America
Commend International GmbH
Tel. +43-662-85 62 25
www.commend.com
Other countries
SWEDEN
NORWAY

FINLAND

DENMARK

ICELAND
Commend Business Hub Nordic
JNT Sound System AB
Tel. +46-8-99 30 60
www.jnt.se
GERMANY Schneider Intercom GmbH
Tel. +49-211-88285-333
www.schneider-intercom.de
POLAND C&C Partners Telecom Sp.z o.o.

Tel. +48-65-525 55 55
www.ccpartners.pl

UNITED KINGDOM

IRELAND
Commend UK Ltd
Tel. +44-1279-87 20 20
www.commend.co.uk

SLOVAKIA

CZECH REPUBLIC
Commend Slovakia spol. s r.o.

Tel. +421-2-58 10 10 40
www.commend.sk
SPAIN

PORTUGAL
Commend Ibérica S.L.

Tel. +34-91-395 24 98
www.commend.es
Asia-Pacific
SINGAPORE Commend Business Hub Asia
Isolectra Far East Pte. Ltd
Tel. +65-6272-2371
www.commend.com.sg
CHINA Commend Business Hub China
Tel. +86-21-52 13 19 28
www.commend.cn

AUSTRALIA

NEW ZEALAND
Commend Australia
Tel. +61-3-9729-3700 (Melbourne)
Tel. +61-2-4655-5738 (Sydney)
www.commend.com.au
ISRAEL Sberlophone Ltd
Tel. + 972-4-834 10 32
www.sberlophone.co.il
Africa
SOUTH AFRICA Commend Business Hub South Africa
Evolving Management Solutions (Pty) Ltd
Tel. +27-11-274 6665
www.commend.co.za

ALGERIA

TUNISIA

MOROCCO
Commend France S.A.S.

Tel. +33-149 18 16 40
www.commend.fr

COMMEND
A Strong Network | Worldwide
www.skidata.com Picture may vary from actual product
The cashless option among SKIDATA
pay-on-foot machines provides full cashless
payment support for your customers – it's easy,
quick and secure. Credit.Cash lets you present
your business with a modern design while benefitting from highly reliable technology and low maintenance costs.

Utilizing potential
• Modern ticketing
Take advantage of Print@Home, RFID, magstripe and
barcode technologies.
• Planned growth
Easy-to-install extension options support new
business models and numerous co-operation
options.

Your business card
• Demonstrating presence
Credit.Cash's modern design matches both
contemporary and traditional architecture while giving
your business proper exposure.
• Individual style
Accentuate your unique corporate presence with your
logo and company colors.

Eliminating risks
• Intelligent key management
Operator.Services ‘Webkey’ brings full transparency to
your key management.
• Refined technology
Internationally proven technology guarantees high
reliability and availability.
• No initial cash required
Easily cut costs and risks.

Paying cashless
• Cashless payment made easy, fast and secure
No need to handle cash – and accounting gets
easier, too!
• Make the cost efficiency work for you!
Increase your presence through several cost-efficient
pay-on-foot machines
Credit.Cash – Your benefits
• Cashless payment
Patrons can pay conveniently by credit card – no
need for complicated cash management.
• Smart looks
Present your business in a modern design based
on your company colors.
• Safe investment
Maximizing benefits at minimum risk.

Credit.Cash
518 (20.394'')
455 (17.913'')
423 (16.654'')
(13.622'')
(13.386'')
(12.323'')
(7.283'')
(6.220'')
1045 (41.142'')
340
346 158
(21.811'') 554
(21.811'') 554
(13.071'')
332
(13.622'')
346
(28.504'') 724
(28.504'') 724
(13.071'')
332
<50 (1.969'')
110°
313
185
© 2012 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

The content provided herein is subject to change and possible editorial errors. Country-specific versions may vary. SKIDATA® is a registered trademark of SKIDATA AG in the USA, the European Union and other countries. Terms and conditions of the authorized SKIDATA distributor apply. The operator is fully responsible for compliance with any legal provisions applicable to the operation of the products. • Extremely easy to operate by staff
Options
Design/Structure
• Illumination attachment (integrated “Parking” sign, space for custom logo or other symbols)
• Pedestal (optionally with or without front door panel) • Pedestal “elevated” (optionally with or without front door panel)
• Wall-mount console
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks
(supports configurable permissions
Coder/ticket technology
• Coder Unlimited (supported data carrier formats depend on modules selected)
• Coder Basic (for cross-wise barcode and validation via hole punch)
• RFID Module (for reading and writing of keycards)
• RFID Module 13 MHz (for keycards and contract parker) • Print@Home Scanner
Features
Design/Structure
• Compact, modern design
• Basic unit powder coated steel enclosure and design
elements made from polycarbonate
• Expansion bays for add-on components, such as pin pad, credit card terminal, and fiscal printer
• Analog intercom station, alarm function, call button and 3 soft keys,
• Uninterruptible power supply (ensures proper transaction management in case of power failure)
• Heater, cooling fan, and power supply
• Issuing of up to 3000 receipts
• Control unit, complete with hard disk
Operation
• TFT 14.5 cm (5.7'') color display, break-proof monitor screen • Ergonomically arranged user interaction controls
• User guidance with graphic color display and illuminated pictograms
• Users can switch on-screen language at any time
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 340 mm x 1045 mm x 455 mm / 13.39" x 41.14" x 17.91" (w x h x d) – without pedestal Height with Pedestal “elevated” 1769 mm / 69.65"
Power supply 230 V AC / 50-60 Hz; 120 V AC / 60 Hz
Power consumption 600 W (with heater on)
Temperature range during
operation
−25 °C to +50 °C (−13 °F to +122 °F) ambient temperature; unit not directly exposed to sunlight
Color of enclosure and
illumination attachment
RAL 9007 (gray aluminum)
Color of plastic front-panel
elements
RAL 7043 (traffic gray B)
Color of front panel RAL 9007 (gray aluminum), RAL 7021 (black-gray) Color of pedestal RAL 7021 (black-gray)
Ticket slot Pantone 114 U (yellow)
Supported data carrier formats SKIDATA barcoded, magstripe, keycard ISO/ISO RFID TK-/TKC-Unlimited (barcode and magnetic strip tickets)
keycard basic/unlimited/ca13/advanced/venue, keytix light, keywrist light, VP-Card with barcode
Declarations /
Certifications
CE, FCC, IC, CNRTLUS (only 120 V variant), ADA (in combination with pedestal APM STD BASE item code: 946010700), Ukr-Sepro
Degree of protection based on
IEC 60529
IP 43, when installed in a protected location according to the installation manual SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 4.8 • 23.04.2014 all dimensions in mm www.skidata.com Picture may vary from actual product
Make paying on foot even easier for your
patrons. The standard model of the
SKIDATA range of pay-on-foot machines
combines a modern design with versatile
functionality and proven technology. Take
advantage of ultimate reliability and availability.

Convenience for you and your patrons
• Easy, intuitive user interaction
Excellent ergonomic usability - even for wheelchair
users - helps to promote throughput.
• Easy to maintain
Easy.Cash is low in maintenance and related costs.

Your image builder
• Look & Feel
Modern design highlights your business
competence.
• Corporate Identity
On request, Easy.Cash is also available in your
corporate colors.

More security
• Intelligent key management
Operator.Service ‘Webkey’ brings full transparency to
your key management.
• Refined technology
Internationally proven technologies - such as the
flexible, self-refilling cash processing unit - ensures ultimate system reliability and availability.

Easy.Cash - Your Benefits
• Modern look & feel
Easy to operate, with a stylish design for maximum
business exposure.
• Proven functionality
Reliable technology for profit-yielding business
models.
• Protected investment
Maximizing benefits at minimum risk.

Easy.Cash
518 (20.394")
455 (17.913")
423
(16.654")
1045 (41.142")
158 (6.220")
700 (27.559")
198
(7.795")
674 (26.535")
110 °
>50
(1.969")
346(13.622")
346 (13.622")
554 (21.811")
692 (27.244")
724 (28.504")
692 (27.244")
© 2011 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

Options
Design/Structure
• Illumination attachment (integrated “Parking“ sign, coin and bill symbols, space for custom logo)
• Pedestal (optionally with or without front door panel) - see specific factsheet
• Pedestal “elevated” (optionally with or without front door panel) - see specific factsheet
• Wall-mount console
• Locking system with mechanical or electronic locks (supports configurable permissions)
Cash management system
• Banknote validator SC83 for up to 48 bill denominations in 4 directions, complete with bill stacker box for up to 600 bills • Bill to Bill banknote recycler: handles up to 23 bill denominations in 4 directions; stacker box for up to 1,000 banknotes and 2 selfrefilling change-giving drums for approx. 110 bills • Extra coin container (2x approx. 1,000 coins; non-self-refilling), incl. lockable front panel
Coder/ticket technology
• Coder Unlimited (supported data carrier formats depend on modules selected)
• Coder Basic (for cross-wise barcode and validation via hole punch)
• RFID Module (for reading and writing/coding of keycards) • Print@Home Scanner
Features
Design/Structure
• Compact, modern design
• Basic unit powder coated steel enclosure, and controls and design elements made from polycarbonate
• VDS certified enclosure construction
• Built-in alarm system, intercom station (analog), call button, three soft keys, and buffer memory (ensures proper transaction management in case of a power failure)
• Heater, cooling fan, and power supply
• Expansion bays for add-on components, such as pin pad, credit card terminal, and fiscal printer
• Issuing of up to 3,000 receipts
• Control unit, complete with hard disk
Operation
• 5.7" TFT color display, break-proof monitor screen
• Ergonomically arranged user interaction controls
• User guidance with graphic color display and illuminated pictograms
• Users can switch on-screen language at any time
• Extremely easy to operate by staff
Cash handling system
• Electronic coin validator, accepts up to 16 different coins (including 2 programmable token)
• 4 compact coin containers (each approx. 250 coins)
• Self-locking coin box, made from high-grade stainless steel • Compact coin containers come with lockable covers
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 700 mm x 1045 mm x 455 mm / 27.559" x 41.142" x 17.913" (w x h x d) – without pedestal
Power supply 240 V AC / 50 Hz; 120 V AC / 60 Hz
Power consumption 600 W (with heater on)
Temperature range during operation -25 °C to +50 °C (-13 °F to + 122 °F) ambient temperature; unit not directly exposed to sunlight
Color of enclosure and illumination attachment RAL 9007 (grey aluminum) Color of plastic front-panel elements RAL 7043 (traffic gray B) Color of front panel RAL 9007 (gray aluminum), RAL 7021 (black-gray) Color of pedestal RAL 7021 (black-gray)
Ticket slot Pantone 114 U (yellow)
Supported data carrier formats SKIDATA barcoded, magstripe, keycard ISO/ISO RFID Norms and Standards / Certifications CE mark, UL, FCC, VDS, FDA, ADA (in combination with pedestal APM STD BASE item code: 946010700)
Protection class IP 23 (outdoor use requires protective roofing) SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 5.3 • 16.03.2011 all dimensions in mm Picture may vary from actual product
A system for all purposes and applications!
No barriers for you and your applications – but a
distinct boundary for your parking facility!
Quick Movements, Longer Booms
• Boom lengths up to 4,5 meters (14,76 ft) in one
single variation of the basic device with optional
magnetic lock to prevent misuse.
• Configurable opening times: openings are up to 15%
quicker than other systems.

High-Quality, Energy-Optimized
Components
• High-quality design that is the best in its field.
• Special focus on the use of energy-saving
components.
• Operation in a wide range of temperatures possible
without any extra heating or ventilation.

Entirely New Applications
• Display of various symbols via the integrated lane
signal.
• Surveillance using a built-in video camera that is safe against vandalism.
• Unique: Colored joint barrier boom using RGB LEDs
for safety and recognisability.

The Intelligent System Without Column
• The inexpensive solution for your long-term parking
facility: You only need the barrier gate, no column.
• Integrable RFID readers solve the task of parking facility monitoring.
• Small amount of components.
www.skidata.com
Barrier.Gate
369 (14.53")
965 (37.99")
281 (11.06")
max. 4500 (177.17")
1005 (39.57")
251 (9.88")
1149 (45.24")
2150 (84.65") / ADA 2340 (92.13")
382 (15.04")
4 x Ø12 x 90°
(4 xØ 0.47" x 90°)
Ø 185 (7.28")
280,7 (11.02")
251 (9.88")
2058 (81") / ADA 2248 (88.5")
max. 2900 (114.17")
©2014 SKIDATA AG. All rights reserved.

Options
Barrier arms
• Standard: Color: Traffic Yellow RAL 1023/translucent; nonilluminated for lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft) • Multi-color version: Color: white/translucent, with interior RGB LEDs for optional illumination of barrier arm in red, yellow and green to indicate closed, opening, and open
states, respectively; lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft)
• Jointed barrier arm: Overhead clearance: 2,07 m (6,8 ft) or 2,25 m (7,38 ft); Lengths 2,5 m (8,2 ft) or 2,9 m (9,5 ft) Functional modules
• Up to two double loop detectors for detection of vehicles and passage direction
• Bi-directional red warning light to indicate moving barrier arm
• Beeper for acoustic indication of barrier motion
• Crash guard, made from stainless steel
• Interface for illumination options and optional loop detectors • Interface for up to 16 additional I/Os
• Barrier lock for Webkey system
• Lock for installation in locking systems
• White contour stripe
• Backlight for contour stripe
Features
• Housing made from high-impact resistant plastic;
support stand manufactured from anodized aluminum
• Integrated drive gear motor with frequency converter control and slipping clutch
• Self-locking drive (stops motion in case of power failure) • Barrier breakage detector
• Variable opening times, configurable in accordance with barrier arm length
• Barrier arms made from GRP
• Barrier arm lengths up to 4,5 m (14,76 ft)
• Barrier arms are easy to mount
• Versions for left-hand and right-hand traffic
Standard Version
• Parking barrier with mounting plate, main body
manufactured from aluminum, drive motor and washer
for barrier arm installation
• Electronic control assembly with data connection to
Power.Gate, Lite.Gate or Column.Gate parking column
• Yellow contour stripe
• Triangular key for opening the housing
Te c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Dimensions 382 mm x 1149 mm x 369 mm / 15,04" x 45,24" x 14,53" (w x h x d) Weight 48 kg (105,82 lbs) (without barrier arm)
Operating voltage 100-240 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / Maximum current 1,8 A at 240 V or 4,8 A at 100 V With heater for 220-240 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / 3,8 A maximum current With heater for 100-127 V ±10% / 50-60 Hz / 8,1 A maximum current Temperature range Standard: −20 °C to +50 °C (−4 °F to +122 °F) Cold Kit (heater): −40 °C to +50 °C (−40 °F to +122 °F) Hot Kit: −20 °C to +55 °C (−4 °F to +131 °F)
Support Stand - Color Light Gray RAL 7035 (Anodized Aluminum) Top Section - Color Dusty Gray RAL 7043 (Plastic)
Base Section - Color Traffic Gray RAL 7043 (Die-Cast Aluminum) Contour Stripes - Color Traffic Yellow RAL 1023
Degree of protection IP44
System Requirements SKIDATA Online Stack 3.0 resp. Parking.Logic V 05.00.04 Declarations / Certifications CE
SKIDATA AG • Untersbergstraße 40 • A-5083 Grödig/Salzburg [t] +43 6246 888-0 • [f] +43 6246 888-7 • [e] [email protected] [w] www.skidata.com • Version 1.4 • 14.11.2014 all dimensions in mm © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 1 of 14 Data Sheet
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
Cisco Small Business
Build a Powerful, Easy-to-Use Basic Business Network at an Affordable Price The key to succeeding in today’s competitive business environment is investing resources wisely – knowing how to separate the essential from the extraneous and get the most value for your dollar. As the backbone of your business and productivity applications, the small business network clearly falls into the “essential” category. But that doesn’t mean you need the most advanced feature set on the market.

With Cisco®200 Series Smart Switches, you can achieve business-class network security and performance without paying for advanced network management features that you will not need. When you need a reliable solution to share network resources and connect computers, printers, and servers, but low cost is a top priority, Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches provide the ideal solution.

Figure 1. Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches
The Cisco 200 Series (Figure 1) is a series of affordable smart switches that combine powerful network performance and reliability with the essential network management features you need for a solid business network.

These expandable Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet switches provide basic management, security, and quality-ofservice (QoS) features beyond those of an unmanaged or consumer-grade switch, at a lower cost than managed switches. And with an easy-to-use web user interface, Cisco Discovery Protocol, and Cisco Smartports, you can deploy and configure a rock-solid business network in minutes.

Business Applications
Whether you need basic high-speed connectivity for your computers and servers or a comprehensive voice, data, and wireless technology solution, Cisco 200 Series switches can meet your business needs. Possible deployment scenarios include:
● High-speed desktop connectivity. Cisco 200 Series switches can quickly and securely connect employees working in small offices with one another and with all of the servers, printers, and other devices they use. High performance and reliable connectivity help speed file transfers and data processing, improve network uptime, and keep your employees connected and productive. © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 2 of 14 ● Highly secure wireless connectivity. Cisco 200 Series switches work with Cisco and third-party wireless solutions to extend the reach of your network. Employees can work productively from conference rooms and common areas, collaborate in any office, and access business applications from wherever they are.

With their security features, Power over Ethernet (PoE), Auto Smartports, VLAN, and QoS, these switches are the perfect foundation to add business-grade wireless to a network. ● Unified communications. The Cisco 200 Series provides QoS features to enable you to prioritize delaysensitive traffic in your network and let you converge all of your communications solutions – such as IP telephony and video surveillance – onto a single Ethernet network. Cisco offers a complete portfolio of IP telephony and other unified communications products designed for small businesses, and Cisco 200 Series switches have been rigorously tested to help ensure easy integration and full compatibility with these and other vendor products.

Features and Benefits
Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches provide all of the features you need to create a basic business-class network at an affordable price. These features include:
● Easy configuration and management: Cisco 200 Series switches are designed to be easy to deploy and use by small businesses or the partners that serve them. Simple-to-use web-based interfaces reduce the time it takes to deploy, manage, and troubleshoot your network. Key features include:
◦ Cisco Discovery Protocol and Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP-MED) automatically detect all the devices connected to your network and then automatically configure themselves for the appropriate connectivity and instruct the devices to use appropriate voice VLAN or QoS parameters. ◦ Cisco Smartports technology provides for more advanced capabilities and hands-on control by automatically configuring ports with specific levels of security, QoS, and availability according to the type of connected device, based on Cisco best practices and pretested configurations. The Auto Smartports feature automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This capability facilitates zerotouch deployments. ◦ Cisco FindIT Network Discovery Utility works through a simple toolbar on the user’s web browser to discover Cisco devices on the network and display basic information, such as serial numbers and IP addresses, to aid in the configuration and speed the deployment of Cisco Small Business products. For more information, and to download the utility, visit www.cisco.com/go/findit. ● Performance and reliability: Cisco 200 Series switches have been tested to deliver the high availability and performance you would expect from a Cisco switch and help you prevent costly downtime. The switches speed file transfer times, improve slow and sluggish networks, keep your vital business applications available, and help your employees respond more quickly to customers and each other. With a network based on Cisco 200 Series switches, you can address all of your business communications and connectivity needs and reduce the total cost of ownership of your technology infrastructure. ● Power over Ethernet (PoE): Cisco 200 Series switches are available with PoE on both Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet models. This capability simplifies the deployment of IP telephony, wireless, video surveillance, and other solutions by allowing you to send data and power to network endpoints over the same network cable. With no need for separate power supplies or outlets for IP phones, IP cameras, or wireless access points, you can speed up deployment and installation and take advantage of advanced communications technologies quickly, and at a lower cost. © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 3 of 14 ● Network security: Cisco 200 Series switches provide security and network management features you need to maintain a high level of security for your business, keep unauthorized users off the network, and protect your business data. The switches provide integrated network security to reduce the risk of a security breach, with IEEE 802.1X port security to control access to your network. Denial-of-service (DOS) attack prevention increases network uptime in the presence of an attack. ● IP telephony support: Cisco 200 Series switches include QoS features to prioritize delay-sensitive services such as voice and video, simplify unified communications deployments, and help ensure consistent network performance for all services.
● Networkwide automatic voice deployment: Using a combination of Cisco Discovery Protocol, LLDPMED, Auto Smartports, and Voice Services Discovery Protocol (VSDP) – a unique patent-pending Cisco protocol – customers can deploy an end-to-end voice network dynamically. The switches in the network automatically converge into a single voice VLAN and set of QoS parameters and then propagate them out to the phones on the ports where they are discovered. For example, automated voice VLAN capabilities let you plug any IP phone (including third-party phones) into your IP telephony network and receive an immediate dial tone. The switch automatically configures the device with the right VLAN and QoS parameters to prioritize voice traffic.
● IPv6 support: As the IP network addressing scheme evolves to accommodate more devices, you can make sure that your network is ready. Cisco 200 Series switches provide native support for IPv6 alongside traditional IPv4. That means you can take full advantage of IPv6-enabled operating systems and applications in the future, without having to upgrade your network equipment. ● An energy-efficient solution: Cisco 200 Series switches are designed to be energy efficient and ecofriendly without compromising performance. They help conserve energy by optimizing power use, which helps protect the environment and lowers your energy costs. Power-saving features include:
◦ Energy-Efficient Ethernet (EEE, the IEEE 802.3az standard), supported on all Cisco 200 Series Gigabit Ethernet switch models. EEE improves the efficiency of network equipment and provides standardized signaling mechanisms that can enable rapid transitions between normal operation and low power idle (LPI) states in systems on either end of the physical layer link. ◦ Automatic power down on Gigabit Ethernet ports when a link is not active. ◦ Embedded intelligence to adjust power based on cable length on Gigabit Ethernet models. ◦ Fanless design in most models, which reduces power consumption, increases reliability, and provides quieter operation.
● Additional Gigabit Ethernet ports: The Cisco 200 Series provides more ports per switch than other switches in the market, giving you more flexibility to connect and empower your business. Gigabit Ethernet models feature 26- and 50-port switches, versus traditional devices that offer 20 or 44 ports with 4 shared ports. The Cisco 200 Series also offers mini Gigabit Interface Converter (mini-GBIC) expansion slots that give you the option to add fiber optic or Gigabit Ethernet uplink connectivity to the switch. With the ability to increase the connectivity range of the switches, you have more flexibility to design your network around your unique business environment, and to easily connect switches on different floors or across the business. ● Peace of mind and investment protection: Cisco 200 Series switches offer the reliable performance, investment protection, and peace of mind you expect from a Cisco switch. When you invest in the Cisco 200 Series, you gain the benefit of:
◦ Cisco limited lifetime warranty to protect your investment. © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 4 of 14 ◦ Rigorous testing to help ensure easy integration and compatibility with other Cisco networking and communications products, including the complete Cisco Small Business portfolio. ● Limited lifetime warranty: The Cisco 200 Series switches come with the Cisco Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty, with return-to-factory replacement, a 1-year limited warranty for fans and power supplies, and a 90-day limited software warranty. In addition, Cisco offers software updates for bug fixes for the warranty term and telephone technical support at no charge for the first 12 months following the date of purchase. To download software updates, go to www.cisco.com/cisco/web/download/index.html. ● World-class support: To extend the support coverage beyond the warranty provisions, choose the Cisco Small Business Support Service, which helps you get the most value from Cisco Small Business solutions, providing peace of mind at an affordable price. The subscription-based service offers software upgrades and updates, access to the Cisco Small Business Support Center, next-business-day hardware replacement (if needed), and telephone and online chat support. To learn more, visit www.cisco.com/go/smbservices.

To find out where Cisco Small Business Support Service is available by country, go to https://supportforums.cisco.com/community/netpro/small-business/sbcountrysupport. ● Multiple language options: The Cisco 200 Series is available in seven languages: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, and simplified Chinese. All product documentation and most user interfaces are translated, giving you the ability to select your preferred language.

Product Specifications
Table 1 gives the product specifications for the Cisco 200 Series Switches.

Table 1. Product Specifications
Feature Description
Performance
Switching capacity and
forwarding rate Model
Capacity in Millions of Packets per Second
(mpps) (64-byte packets)
Switching Capacity in Gigabits
per Second (Gbps)
SF200-24 6.55 8.8
SF200-24P 6.55 8.8
SF200-24FP 6.55 8.8
SF200-48 10.12 13.6
SF200-48P 10.12 13.6
SG200-08 11.9 13.6
SG200-08P 11.9 13.6
SG200-10FP 14.88 20.0
SG200-18 26.78 36.0
SG200-26 38.69 52.0
SG200-26P 38.69 52.0
SG200-26FP 38.69 52.0
SG200-50 74.41 100.0
SG200-50P 74.41 100.0
SG200-50FP 74.41 100.0
Layer 2 Switching
Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP)
Standard 802.1d STP support
Fast convergence using 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree [RSTP]), enabled by default © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 5 of 14 Feature Description
Port grouping Support for IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) ● Up to 4 groups
● Up to 8 ports per group with 16 candidate ports for each (dynamic) 802.3ad link aggregation VLAN Support for up to 256 VLANs simultaneously (out of 4096 VLAN IDs). 16 VLANs supported in SG200-08 and SG200-08P
Port-based and 802.1Q tag-based VLANs
Voice VLAN Voice traffic is automatically assigned to a voice-specific VLAN and treated with appropriate levels of QoS Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) versions 1
and 2 snooping
IGMP limits bandwidth-intensive multicast traffic to only the requesters; supports 256 multicast groups Head-of-line (HOL) blocking HOL blocking prevention
Security
IEEE 802.1X
(Authenticator role)
802.1X: RADIUS authentication, MD5 hash
Port security Locks MAC addresses to ports, and limits the number of learned MAC addresses Storm control Broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast DoS prevention DoS attack prevention
Quality of Service
Priority levels 4 hardware queues
Scheduling Strict priority and weighted round-robin (WRR) Queue assignment based on differentiated services code point (DSCP) and class of service (802.1p/CoS) Class of service Port based, 802.1p VLAN priority based, IPv4/v6 IP precedence/type of service (ToS)/DSCP based, Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Rate limiting Ingress policer, per VLAN and per port
Standards
Standards IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ad LACP, IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3x Flow Control, IEEE 802.1D (STP), IEEE 802.1Q/p VLAN, IEEE 802.1w RSTP, IEEE 802.1X Port Access Authentication, IEEE 802.3af, RFC 768, RFC 783, RFC 791, RFC 792, RFC 793, RFC 813, RFC 879, RFC 896, RFC 826, RFC 854, RFC 855, RFC 856, RFC 858, RFC 894, RFC 919, RFC 922, RFC 920, RFC 950, RFC 951, RFC 1042, RFC 1071, RFC 1123, RFC 1141, RFC 1155, RFC 1350, RFC 1533, RFC 1541, RFC 1542, RFC 1624, RFC 1700, RFC 1867, RFC 2030, RFC 2616, RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3164, RFC 2618
IPv6
IPv6 IPv6 host mode
IPv6 over Ethernet
Dual IPv6/IPv4 stack
IPv6 neighbor and router discovery (ND)
IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration
Path maximum transmission unit (MTU) discovery
Duplicate address detection (DAD)
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) version 6
IPv6 over IPv4 network with Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) support IPv6 QoS Prioritize IPv6 packets in hardware
Multicast Listener Discovery
(MLD) snooping
Deliver IPv6 multicast packets only to the required receivers IPv6 applications Web, ping, Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), RADIUS, syslog, DNS client
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 6 of 14 Feature Description
IPv6 RFCs supported RFC 2463: ICMP version 6
RFC 3513: IPv6 address architecture
RFC 4291: IPv6 addressing architecture
RFC 2460: IPv6 specification
RFC 2461: Neighbor discovery for IPv6
RFC 2462: IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration
RFC 1981: Path maximum transmission unit (MTU) discovery RFC 4007: IPv6 scoped address architecture
RFC 3484: Default address selection mechanism
RFC 4214: ISATAP tunneling
RFC 4293: MIB IPv6: Textual conventions and general group RFC 3595: Textual conventions for IPv6 flow label
Management
Web user interface Built-in switch configuration utility for easy browser-based device configuration (HTTP). Supports configuration, system dashboard, system maintenance, and monitoring
Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3 with support for traps, and SNMP version 3 user-based security model (USM) Standard MIBs draft-ietf-bridge-8021x-MIB
draft-ietf-bridge-rstpmib-04-MIB
draft-ietf-hubmib-etherif-MIB-v3-00-MIB
draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
ianaaddrfamnumbers-MIB
ianaifty-MIB
ianaprot-MIB
inet-address-MIB
ip-forward-MIB
ip-MIB
RFC1155-SMI
RFC1213-MIB
SNMPv2-MIB
SNMPv2-SMI
SNMPv2-TM
RMON-MIB.my
dcb-raj-DCBX-MIB-1108-MIB
rfc1724-MIB
RFC-1212.my_for_MG-Soft
rfc1213-MIB
rfc1757-MIB
RFC-1215.my
SNMPv2-CONF.my
SNMPv2-TC.my
rfc2674-MIB
rfc2575-MIB
rfc2573-MIB
rfc2233-MIB
rfc2013-MIB
rfc2012-MIB
rfc2011-MIB
draft-ietf-entmib-sensor-MIB
lldp-MIB
lldpextdot1-MIB
lldpextdot3-MIB
lldpextmed-MIB
p-bridge-MIB
q-bridge-MIB
rfc1389-MIB
rfc1493-MIB
rfc1611-MIB
rfc1612-MIB
rfc1850-MIB
rfc1907-MIB
rfc2571-MIB
rfc2572-MIB
rfc2574-MIB
rfc2576-MIB
rfc2613-MIB
rfc2665-MIB
rfc2668-MIB
rfc2737-MIB
rfc2925-MIB
rfc3621-MIB
rfc4668-MIB
rfc4670-MIB
trunk-MIB
tunnel-MIB
udp-MIB
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 7 of 14 Feature Description
Private MIBs CISCOSB-lldp-MIB
CISCOSB-brgmulticast-MIB
CISCOSB-bridgemibobjects-MIB
CISCOSB-bonjour-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcpcl-MIB

CISCOSB-MIB
CISCOSB-wrandomtaildrop-MIB
CISCOSB-traceroute-MIB
CISCOSB-telnet-MIB
CISCOSB-stormctrl-MIB
CISCOSB-ssh-MIB
CISCOSB-socket-MIB
CISCOSB-sntp-MIB
CISCOSB-smon-MIB
CISCOSB-phy-MIB
CISCOSB-multisessionterminal-MIB
CISCOSB-mri-MIB
CISCOSB-jumboframes-MIB
CISCOSB-gvrp-MIB
CISCOSB-endofmib-MIB
CISCOSB-dot1x-MIB
CISCOSB-deviceparams-MIB
CISCOSB-cli-MIB
CISCOSB-cdb-MIB
CISCOSB-brgmacswitch-MIB
CISCOSB-3sw2swtables-MIB
CISCOSB-smartPorts-MIB
CISCOSB-tbi-MIB
CISCOSB-macbaseprio-MIB
CISCOSB-policy-MIB
CISCOSB-env_mib
CISCOSB-sensor-MIB
CISCOSB-aaa-MIB
CISCOSB-application-MIB
CISCOSB-bridgesecurity-MIB
CISCOSB-copy-MIB
CISCOSB-CpuCounters-MIB
CISCOSB-Custom1BonjourService-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcp-MIB
CISCOSB-dlf-MIB
CISCOSB-dnscl-MIB
CISCOSB-embweb-MIB
CISCOSB-fft-MIB
CISCOSB-file-MIB
CISCOSB-greeneth-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces_recovery-MIB
CISCOSB-ip-MIB
CISCOSB-iprouter-MIB
CISCOSB-ipv6-MIB
CISCOSB-mnginf-MIB
CISCOSB-lcli-MIB
CISCOSB-localization-MIB
CISCOSB-mcmngr-MIB
CISCOSB-mng-MIB
CISCOSB-physdescription-MIB
CISCOSB-Poe-MIB
CISCOSB-protectedport-MIB
CISCOSB-rmon-MIB
CISCOSB-rs232-MIB
CISCOSB-SecuritySuite-MIB
CISCOSB-snmp-MIB
CISCOSB-specialbpdu-MIB
CISCOSB-banner-MIB
CISCOSB-syslog-MIB
CISCOSB-TcpSession-MIB
CISCOSB-traps-MIB
CISCOSB-trunk-MIB
CISCOSB-tuning-MIB
CISCOSB-tunnel-MIB
CISCOSB-udp-MIB
CISCOSB-vlan-MIB
CISCOSB-ipstdacl-MIB

CISCO-SMI-MIB
CISCOSB-DebugCapabilities-MIB

CISCOSB-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-vlanVoice-MIB

CISCOSB-EVENTS-MIB
CISCOSB-sysmng-MIB
CISCOSB-sct-MIB

CISCO-TC-MIB

CISCO-VTP-MIB

CISCO-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-eee-MIB
CISCOSB-ssl-MIB
CISCOSB-qosclimib-MIB
CISCOSB-digitalkeymanage-MIB
CISCOSB-tbp-MIB

CISCOSMB-MIB
CISCOSB-secsd-MIB
CISCOSB-draft-ietf-entmib-sensor-MIB
CISCOSB-draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
CISCOSB-rfc2925-MIB
Remote Monitoring (RMON) Embedded RMON software agent supports 4 RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events) for enhanced traffic management, monitoring, and analysis
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack Coexistence of both protocol stacks to ease migration Firmware upgrade Web browser upgrade (HTTP) and TFTP
Port mirroring Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a network analyzer or RMON probe. Up to 4 source ports can be mirrored to one destination port. A single session is supported.

VLAN mirroring Traffic from a VLAN can be mirrored to a port for analysis with a network analyzer or RMON probe. Up to 4 source VLANs can be mirrored to one destination port. A single session is supported. © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 8 of 14 Feature Description
Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) (options 66
and 67)
(DHCP) options facilitate tighter control from a central point (DHCP server) to obtain IP address and perform autoconfiguration (with configuration file download) Text-editable config files Config files can be edited with a text editor and downloaded to another switch, facilitating easier mass deployment Smartports Simplified configuration of QoS and security capabilities Auto Smartports Automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This facilitates zero touch deployments.

Cloud services Support for FindIT Network Discovery Utility and Cisco OnPlus™ technology Localization Localization of GUI and documentation into multiple languages Other management HTTP, RADIUS, port mirroring, TFTP upgrade, DHCP client, BOOTP, SNTP, ping, syslog Power Efficiency
EEE compliant (802.3az) Supports 802.3az on all copper Gigabit Ethernet ports (SG200-xx models) Not supported on SG200-08 and SG200-08P models
Energy Detect mode Automatically turns off power on Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port when the switch detects a link down Active mode is resumed without loss of any packets when the switch detects that the link is back up Cable length detection Adjusts the signal strength based on the cable length. Reduces the power consumption for cables shorter than 10 m.

General
Jumbo frames Frame sizes up to 10 KB supported on 10/100 and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces (9 KB for SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
MAC table Up to 8000 MAC addresses
Discovery
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) (802.1ab) with LLDPMED extensions
LLDP allows the switch to advertise its identification, configuration, and capabilities to neighboring devices, which store the data in an MIB. LLDP-MED is an enhancement to LLDP that adds the extensions needed for IP phones.

Cisco Discovery Protocol The switch advertises itself using the Cisco Discovery Protocol. It also learns the connected device and its characteristics via this protocol.

Auto Smartports Automatically applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartports roles to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED. This capability facilitates zero-touch deployments.

Bonjour The switch advertises itself using the Bonjour protocol Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.3af PoE delivered
on half of the RJ-45 ports
within the listed power
budgets
Maximum power of 15.4W to any 10/100 or Gigabit Ethernet base port supporting PoE. The total power available for PoE per switch is as follows:

Model Power Dedicated to PoE
Number of Ports That Support
PoE
SF200-24P 100W 12
SF200-24FP 180W 24
SF200-48P 180W 24
SG200-08P 32W 4
SG200-10FP 62W 8
SG200-26P 100W 12
SG200-26FP 180W 24
SG200-50P 180W 24
SG200-50FP 375W 48
Power consumption
Model Power Savings Mode
Power
Consumption:

Worst Case Heat Dissipation (BTU/hr)
SF200-24 Energy Detect 110V/0.272A/13.7
W
220V/0.169A/14.5
W

49.5 © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 9 of 14 Feature Description
SF200-24P Energy Detect 110V/0.346A/21.3
W
220V/0.166A/22.2
W

75.8 SF200-24FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.231A/23.5
W
220V/0.179A/24.4
W

85.6 SF200-48 Energy Detect 110V/0.453A/26.2
W
220V/0.276A/26.8
W

91.5 SF200-48P Energy Detect 110V/0.355A/37.2
W
220V/0.217A/37.4
W
127.6
SG200-08 Auto power down for link
down
110V/P=6.7W
220V/P=7.21W

24.6 SG200-08P Auto power down for link
down
110V/P=7.6W
220V/P=8.1W

27.6 SG200-10FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/P=13.13W
220V/P=13.48W

46.0 SG200-18 Energy Detect (link down),
short reach
110V/P=22.4W
220V/P=22.9W

78.2 SG200-26 Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.513A/27.8
W
220V/0.306A/28.3
W

96.6 SG200-26P Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.591A/36.8
W
220V/0.381A/37.5
W

97.9 SG200-26FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.269A/27.8
W
220V/0.196A/28.7
W
128.0
SG200-50 Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.569A/61.8
W
220V/0.296A/61.4
W
209.6
SG200-50P Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.595A/62W
220V/0.338A/61.2
W
211.6
SG200-50FP Short reach plus Energy
Detect
110V/0.749A/76.4
W
220V/0.412A/78.3
W
267.2
Ports
Model Name Total System Ports RJ-45 Ports
Combo Ports
(RJ-45 + SFP)
SF200-24 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-24P 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-24FP 24 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
24 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-48 48 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
48 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF200-48P 48 Fast Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet
48 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-08 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet –
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 10 of 14 Feature Description
SG200-08P 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet –
SG200-10FP 8 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet combo SG200-18 18 Gigabit Ethernet 16 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26P 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-26FP 26 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50P 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
SG200-50FP 50 Gigabit Ethernet 48 Gigabit
Ethernet
2 Gigabit Ethernet combo
Buttons Reset button
Cabling type Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 5 or better for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX; UTP Category 5 Ethernet or better for 1000BASE-T
LEDs System, Link/Act, PoE, Speed
Flash 16 MB (8 MB in SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
CPU memory 128 MB (32 MB in SG200-08 and SG200-08P)
Packet buffer All numbers are aggregate across all ports, as the buffers are dynamically shared:

Model Packet Buffer
SF200-24 4 Mb
SF200-24P 4 Mb
SF200-24FP 4 Mb
SF200-48 2 @ 8 Mb
SF200-48P 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-08 4 Mb
SG200-08P 4 Mb
SG200-10FP 4 Mb
SG200-18 4 Mb
SG200-26 4 Mb
SG200-26P 4 Mb
SG200-26FP 4 Mb
SG200-50 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-50P 2 @ 8 Mb
SG200-50FP 2 @ 8 Mb
Supported Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) Modules
Product Ordering Number Media Speed Typical Distance
MFEFX1 Multimode fiber 100 Mbps 2 km
MFELX1 Single-mode fiber 100 Mbps 10 km
MFEBX1 Single-mode fiber 100 Mbps 20 km
MGBBX1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 40 km
MGBSX1 Multimode fiber 1000 Mbps 300 m
MGBLH1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 40 km
MGBLX1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 10 km
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 11 of 14 Feature Description
Environmental
Dimensions (W x H x D) Model Metric (mm) Inches
SF200-24 440 x 44.32 x 257 17.35 x 1.74 x 10.1
SF200-24P 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-24FP 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-48 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SF200-48P 440 x 44.32 x 350 17.35 x 1.74 x 13.8
SG200-08 113 x 27 x 130 4.45 x 1.06 x 5.12
SG200-08P 130 x 42.3 x 130 5.12 x 1.52 x 5.12
SG200-10FP 279.4 x 44.45 x 170 11 x 1.45 x 6.7
SG200-18 440.6 x 44.32 x 202.82 17.35 x 1.74 x 7.99
SG200-26 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-26P 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-26FP 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-50 440 x 44 x 257 17.35 x 1.73 x 10.1
SG200-50P 440 x 44 x 350 17.35 x 1.73 x 13.8
SG200-50FP 440 x 44 x 350 17.35 x 1.73 x 13.8
Unit weight Model Kilograms Pounds
SF200-24 3.04 6.70
SF200-24P 3.45 7.61
SF200-24FP 3.67 8.09
SF200-48 3.42 7.54
SF200-48P 4.73 10.43
SG200-08 0.75 1.65
SG200-08P 1.26 2.78
SG200-10FP 1.26 2.78
SG200-18 2.01 4.43
SG200-26 3.27 7.21
SG200-26P 3.67 8.09
SG200-26FP 3.82 8.42
SG200-50 3.96 8.73
SG200-50P 5.47 12.06
SG200-50FP 6.04 13.32
Power Model Power
SF200-24 100V-240V, 12V/2.5A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-24P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-24FP 100V-240V 47-63 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4, 50-60 Hz
SF200-48 100V-240V, 12V/4.5A, 50-60 HZ
SF200-48P 100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-08 (external) 100V-240V, 0.5A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-08P (external) 100V-240V, 1.0.56A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-10FP (external) 100V-240V, 2.5A, 50-60 Hz
SG200-18 100V-240V, 1.0-0.5A, 50-60 HZ
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 12 of 14 Feature Description
SG200-26 100V-240V, 12V/2.5A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-26P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-26FP 100V-240V 50-60 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/3.6A, 12V/4, 50-60 Hz
SG200-50 110V-240V, 12V/8.33A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-50P 100V-240V, 50V/2A, 50-60 HZ
SG200-50FP 100V-240V 47-63 Hz, internal, universal
100V-240V, 50V/7.5A, 12V/7.5A, 50-60 Hz
Certification UL (UL 60950), CSA (CSA 22.2), CE mark, FCC Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A Operating temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Storage temperature –4° to 158°F (–20° to 70°C)
Operating humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing
Storage humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing
Acoustic noise and mean
time between failures (MTBF)
Model Fan (Number) Acoustic Noise MTBF @ 40°C (hours)
SF200-24 No N/A 414,166
SF200-24P 1 40.2 dB 307,098
SF200-24FP 2 40.2 dB at 45°C 314,444.5 (based on 45°C)
SF200-48 No – 267,865
SF200-48P 2 41.7 dB 174,966
SG200-08 No – 71,834
SG200-10FP No – 287,436 (based on 45°C)
SG200-08P No – 69,003
SG200-18 No – 68,033
SG200-26 No – 194,278
SG200-26P 1 40.2 dB 218,842
SG200-26FP 2 40.2 dB at 45°C 319,407 (based on 45°C)
SG200-50 2 41.7 dB 237,610
SG200-50P 4 42.5 dB at 30°C

54.7 dB at 40°C
208,976
SG200-50FP 4 42.1 dB at 30°C

55.9 dB at 50°C
192,790 (based on 45°C)
Warranty Limited lifetime
Package Contents
● Cisco 200 Series Smart Switch
● Power cord (power adapter for 8-port and 10-port SKUs) ● Mounting hardware
● CD-ROM with user documentation (PDF) included
● Quick-start guide
Minimum Requirements
● Web browser: Mozilla Firefox version 8 or later; Microsoft Internet Explorer version 7 or later, Safari, Chrome ● Category 5 Ethernet network cable
● TCP/IP, network adapter, and network operating system (such as Microsoft Windows, Linux, or Mac OS X) installed on each computer in the network
© 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 13 of 14 Ordering Information
Table 2 provides ordering information for the Cisco 200 Series Switches. Table 3 gives ordering information for the MFE and MGE transceivers.

Table 2. Cisco 200 Series Switches Ordering Information Model Product Ordering Number Description
Fast Ethernet
SF200-24 SLM224GT-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SF200-24P SLM224PT-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 12 ports
SF200-24FP SF200-24FP-xx ● 24 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SF200-48 SLM248GT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SF200-48P SLM248PT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SF200-48 SLM248GT-xx ● 48 10/100 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
Gigabit Ethernet
SG200-08 SLM2008T-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 ports
SG200-08P SLM2008PT-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 ports
● PoE support on 4 ports
SG200-10FP SG200-10FP-xx ● 10 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 8 ports
SG200-18 SLM2016T-xx ● 16 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-26 SLM2024T-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-26P SLM2024PT-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 12 ports
SG200-26FP SG200-26FP-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SG200-50 SLM2048T-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
SG200-50P SLM2048PT-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 24 ports
SG200-50FP SG200-50FP-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports
● 2 combo mini-GBIC ports*
● PoE support on 48 ports
* Each combo mini-GBIC port has one 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and one mini-GBIC/SFP Gigabit Ethernet slot, with one port active at a time. © 2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public. Page 14 of 14 Table 3. Service and Support Ordering Information
Service Ordering Number Description
CON-SBS-SVC2 3 years support, software updates, Small Business Support Center access via online, telephone, or community, next-business-day advance replacement
Table 4. MFE and MGE Transceiver Ordering Information
Product Ordering Number Description
MFE Transceivers
MFEBX1 100BASE-BX-20U SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 20 km MFELX1 100BASE-LX SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 2 km MFEFX1 100BASE-FX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 10 km MGE Transceivers
MGBBX1 1000BASE-BX-20U SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 40 km MGBLH1 1000BASE-LH SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 40 km MGBLX1 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 10 km MGBSX1 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber, 850 nm wavelength, supports up to 550 m A Powerful Foundation for the Basic Business Network
As you strive to make your business more competitive and efficient, every dollar counts. Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches give you just the right the features, performance, and reliability you need, without making you pay for advanced features you don’t. With Cisco 200 Series switches, you can rest assured that your business applications and communications tools are resting on a strong technology foundation, so you can focus on achieving your business goals.

For More Information
To find out more about Cisco 200 Series Smart Switches, visit www.cisco.com/go/200switches.

To learn about other products and solutions in the Cisco Small Business portfolio, visit www.cisco.com/go/smallbusiness.

Printed in USA C78-634369-04 07/13
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Overview
Last year, we saw 317 million new malware variants, while targeted attacks and zero-day threats were at an all-time high1. The threat environment is evolving quickly and given the size and complexity of today's networks, organizations are struggling to keep up. Symantec™ Endpoint Protection is designed to address these challenges with a layered approach to security at the endpoint. It goes beyond traditional antivirus to include firewall, Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) and advanced protection technologies powered by the world’s largest civilian threat intelligence network. Symantec Insight™ technology blocks rapidly-mutating malware and enables faster scan times, while SONAR™ stops zero-day threats by monitoring file behavior and blocking suspicious files while they execute. Granular policy settings such as application control and external media control provide an added layer of security. With a single management console and high-powered agent, Symantec Endpoint Protection delivers powerful protection at the endpoint without compromising performance.

Unrivaled Security
Stops targeted attacks and advanced persistent threats with intelligent security and layered protection • Symantec Endpoint Protection leverages the world's largest civilian threat intelligence network to deliver advanced protection at the endpoint. This network consists of telemetry data coming from 175 million endpoints and 57 million attack sensors in 175 countries, providing unique visibility into the latest security threats. • Derived from this intelligence network, our unique Insight™ technology identifies file reputation by analyzing key file attributes such as how often a file has been downloaded, how long a file has been there, and where it is being downloaded from. This information allows us to block more threats and defend against new, mutating malware. • SONAR™ technology, also powered by this intelligence network, monitors application behavior in real-time and stops targeted attacks and zero-day threats
• Network Threat Protection analyzes incoming data streams and blocks threats while they travel through the network before hitting endpoints
• Symantec™ Endpoint Protection detects and removes threats more accurately2, repeatedly scoring a AAA rating, the highest score, by Dennis Labs Real World A/V Test
Blazing Performance
Performance so fast your users won't know it is there
• Insight™ reputation technology accurately identifies file reputation so only at-risk files are scanned, effectively eliminating up to 70 percent of scan overhead compared to traditional solutions • Symantec™ Endpoint Protection outperforms all products in its class in terms of scan speed and total performance impact3

1. 2.

3. Symantec Internet Security Threat Report 2015
AV-Test, Product Review, Corporate Solutions for Windows 7, April 2015 PassMark Software, "Enterprise Endpoint Security Performance Benchmarks", 2014 1 • Optimizes content delivery for faster distribution and lower storage requirements. Virus definition sets require 90% less disk space on Symantec™ Endpoint Protection Manager.
• Supports embedded systems and Virtual Desktop Infrastructures (VDI) with smaller client size for reduced memory footprint Smarter Management
Single management console across physical and virtual platforms with granular policy control • Delivers intelligent security technologies and policy lockdown features in a single high performance agent with a single management console across Windows®, Mac®, Linux®, virtual machines, and embedded systems • Provides granular policy control with the flexibility to customize policies depending on users and their location • Supports remote deployment and client management for both Windows®and Mac®systems making it easier to keep remote endpoints up-to-date
• Expands traditional reporting by incorporating multi-dimensional analysis and robust graphical reporting in an easy-to-use dashboard
• Reduces network overhead and decreases the time it takes to get updates by allowing one client to send updates to another (Group Update Provider). This also facilitates more effective updates in remote locations.

Five Layers of Protection
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 provides five layers of protection in one high performance agent all managed through a single console.
1) Network: Symantec’s network threat protection technology analyzes incoming data and blocks threats while they travel through the network before hitting endpoints. Rules-based firewall and browser protection are also included to protect against web-based attacks.
2) File: Signature-based antivirus and advanced file heuristics look for and eradicate malware on a system to protect against viruses, worms, Trojans, spyware, bots, adware, and rootkits Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
2 3) Reputation: Symantec’s unique Insight™
correlates tens of billions of linkages between users, files, and websites to detect rapidly mutating threats. By analyzing key file attributes, Insight™can accurately identify whether a file is good or bad and assign a reputation score, effectively protecting against targeted attacks while reducing scan overhead by up to 70 percent. 4) Behavior: SONAR™leverages artificial intelligence to provide zero-day protection. It effectively stops new and unknown threats by monitoring nearly 1,400 file behaviors while they execute in real-time to determine file risk. 5) Repair: Power Eraser™ aggressively scans infected endpoints to locate advanced persistent threats and remove tenacious malware. Remote support enables the administrator to trigger the Power Eraser scan and remedy the infection remotely from the Symantec™ Endpoint Protection management console.

Extended Policy Control Features
In addition to core protection technologies, Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 also provides granular policy controls, including:
1) Application Control: Allows you to control file and registry access and how processes are allowed to run. It also includes advanced system lockdown features, only allowing whitelisted applications (known to be good) to run, or blocking blacklisted applications (known to be bad) from running.
2) External Media Control: Allows you to restrict access to select hardware and control what types of devices can upload or download information. External media control can be combined with application control to offer more flexible control policies. 3) Host Integrity Checking & Policy Enforcement: Ensures endpoints are protected and compliant by enforcing policies, detecting unauthorized changes, and conducting damage assessments with the ability to isolate a managed system that does not meet your requirements
Optimization for Virtual Environments
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection protects your high-density virtual environment while maintaining performance levels superior to agentless solutions and providing end-to-end security visibility. 1) VMware vShield™ Integration: Allows higher virtual machine (VM) density and reduces I/O and CPU usage 2) Virtual Image Exception: Whitelists files from a standard virtual machine image to optimize scanning Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
3 3) Resource Leveling: Randomizes scan and update schedules to prevent resource utilization spikes 4) Shared Insight™ Cache: Scans files once, shares the results between clients, and de-duplicates file scanning to reduce bandwidth and latency
5) Virtual Client Tagging: Automatically detects and reports whether the client is running in a virtual environment, making it easier to set different policies for virtual machines
6) Offline Image Scanning: Finds threats in offline VM images 7) Scan Throttling for Virtualization: Detects disk load and reduces scan speed to prevent utilization spikes Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
4 * For a complete list of system requirements visit our support page **Support added in Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6 MP1a Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
5 More Information
Try it now for FREE
Try the leading solution in endpoint protection by downloading a free 60-day trial today:
http://www.symantec.com/endpoint-protection/trialware
Read third party reviews and find out why Gartner has ranked Symantec as a leader in the Endpoint Protection Platform Magic Quadrant:
http://www.symantec.com/endpoint-protection/news-reviews Visit our website
http://enterprise.symantec.com
To speak with a Product Specialist in the U.S.

Call toll-free 1 (800) 745 6054
To speak with a Product Specialist outside the U.S.

For specific country offices and contact numbers, please visit our website.

About Symantec
Symantec Corporation (NASDAQ: SYMC) is an information protection expert that helps people, businesses and governments seeking the freedom to unlock the opportunities technology brings anytime, anywhere. Founded in April 1982, Symantec, a Fortune 500 company, operating one of the largest global data-intelligence networks, has provided leading security, backup and availability solutions for where vital information is stored, accessed and shared. The company's more than 19,000 employees reside in more than 50 countries. Ninety-nine percent of Fortune 500 companies are Symantec customers. In fiscal 2015, it recorded revenues of $6.5 billion. To learn more go towww.symantec.com or connect with Symantec at:
go.symantec.com/socialmedia.

Symantec World Headquarters
350 Ellis St.

Mountain View, CA 94043 USA
+1 (650) 527 8000
1 (800) 721 3934
www.symantec.com
Copyright © 2015 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, the Symantec Logo, and the Checkmark Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. 21320633-4 09/15
Data Sheet: Endpoint Security
Symantec™ Endpoint Protection 12.1.6
6 Tomorrow’s benchmark for multi-workload compute
Purpose-built for flexibility, efficiency, and manageability As the world’s best-selling server,1
the HP ProLiant DL380 Server is designed to adapt to
the needs of any environment, from large enterprise to remote office/branch office. With Gen9, the DL380 just got better, offering enhanced reliability, serviceability, and continuous availability, backed by a comprehensive warranty.

With the HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server, you can deploy a single platform to handle a wide variety of enterprise workloads:
•Virtualization—Consolidate your server footprint by running multiple workloads on a single DL380
•Big Data—Manage exponential growth in your data volumes—structured, unstructured, and semi-structured
•Storage-centric applications—Remove bottlenecks and improve performance •Data warehousing/analytics—Find the information you need, when you need it, to enable better business decisions
•Customer relationship management (CRM)—Gain a 360-degree view of your data to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty
•Enterprise resource planning (ERP)—Trust the DL380 Gen9 to help you run your business in near real time
•Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI)—Deploy remote desktop services to provide your workers with the flexibility they need to work anywhere, at any time, using almost any device •SAP®—Streamline your business processes through consistency and real-time transparency into your end-to-end corporate data
To support your heterogeneous IT environment, the DL380 Gen9 Server supports Microsoft®
Windows® and Linux® operating systems, as well as VMware® and Citrix® virtualization environments.

Future-proof design with flexible options
Choose the features/functions you need now; add
more as necessary as your business needs grow;
the modular chassis, networking, and controller
designs allow for easy upgrades. Pay for what you
need, when you need it.

Industry-leading performance and energy
efficiency
For delivering faster business results and quicker
returns on your investment; Up to 70 percent
performance gain from the Intel®
Haswell
E5-2620 v3 processors2 and ENERGY STAR®
rated systems drive down energy costs
with 94 percent3 efficient power supplies.

Agile infrastructure management
For accelerating IT service delivery; streamline
management with HP OneView4—the
revolutionary converged management platform
that delivers automation simplicity across servers,
storage, and networking.

Data sheet
HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server
The no-compromise data center standard
1 Q114 IDC WW Quarterly Server Tracker, 30th
May 2014.
2 Intel performance testing, comparing
measurements on platform with two E5-2697 v2
(12C, 2.7 GHz), 8x8 GB DDR3-1866, RHEL 6.3 vs.
platform with two E5-2697 v3 (14C, 2.6 GHz,
145 W), 8x8 GB DDR4-2133, RHEL 6.3, April 2014.
3 94 percent efficient (Platinum Plus) HP Flexible
Slot Power Supplies.
4 HP OneView support is available for ProLiant
Gen9 in DL and BL server models only. Expected
availability is December 2014.

Share with colleagues Rate this document
Sign up for updates
hp.com/go/getupdated
Data sheet | HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 Server
HP Services
Let HP help guide you to the New Style of IT. HP Technology Services delivers confidence, reduces risk, and helps you realize greater agility and stability. • Our Consulting services provide advice and guidance to safely move your workloads to newer technologies.
• HP implementation and installation services enable faster, more reliable startup of your new ProLiant Gen9 servers, and our support portfolio allows you to get connected and get back to business fast.
• We recommend HP Proactive Care for ProLiant Gen9 servers to prevent issues and resolve problems quickly and efficiently.
• HP Foundation Care provides a choice of coverage levels and response times for hardware and software support.
• HP Datacenter Care enables you to operate and evolve your IT environment at a lower cost and with more agility, including our Flexible Capacity Service to acquire IT without impacting capital budget.
• Our support technology lets you tap into the knowledge of millions of devices and thousands of experts to stay informed and in control, anywhere, any time.

Learn more at
hp.com/servers/DL380gen9
© Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG in Germany and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Citrix is a registered trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. SD and microSD are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C in the United States, other countries or both. 4AA5-4078ENW, September 2014
Technical specifications
In the following table, bold italic text designates a new or improved feature, as compared to the HP ProLiant DL380p Gen8 Server.

Compute Up to two Intel® Xeon® E5-2600 v3 series, 4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18 cores; PCIe 3.0, up to six available slot(s) Memory HP SmartMemory (24) DDR4, up to 2,133 MHz (768 GB max) Storage Standard HP Dynamic Smart Array B140i, choice of HP Flexible Smart Array or HP Smart SAS HBA controllers FBWC 2 GB DDR3-1,866 MHz, 72-bit wide bus at 14.9 GB/s on P440ar Battery HP DL/ML/SL 96 W Smart Storage Battery
HP SmartDrives 24 + 2 SFF/12 + 3 LFF max, HDD/SSD
Networking 4 x 1GbE Embedded + choice of FlexibleLOM + Standup VGA/serial/USB ports/SD Front VGA opt, rear VGA, and serial standard, 6 USB 3.0, microSD GPU support Single-/double-wide and active/passive up to 10.5" (3) On Premise management HP OneView5
and HP iLO Advance
On Cloud management HP Insight Online with enhanced mobile app On System management Changes in HP iLO, HP Smart Update Manager (HP SUM), Intelligent Provisioning and scripting tools; plus the new UEFI and HP RESTful Interface Tool
Power and cooling 94 percent efficient with Flexible Slot FF Hot plug fans with full N + 1 redundancy, optional high performance fans Industry compliance ASHRAE A3 and A4, lower idle power, and ENERGY STAR Power discovery services Supported
Location discovery services Optional
Form factor/Chassis depth Rack (2U), 26.75" (SFF), 28.75" (LFF) Serviceability—easy install rails Standard
Warranty 3/3/3
QuickSpecs:
hp.com/servers/DL380gen9/qs/
5 HP OneView support is available for ProLiant
Gen9 in DL and BL servers expected later in 2014.
hp.com/qref/dl380gen9
Contactless Antenna
BRF210
Overview
Payment Express is the global leader in card acceptance systems for unattended cashless devices with over 30,000 machines connected to its network. Payment Express owns the hardware design, intellectual property and processor platform, ensuring end to end accountability from card swipe to bankcard provider.

The BRF210 is a Payment Express EMV Compliant Contactless Antenna. It is part of a modular unattended payment terminal combined with the SCR200 Secure Card Reader and or the SKP200 Key Pad and Display, to provide an unbeatable unattended solution for Chip and PIN environments.

In addition, you also benefit from our comprehensive fleet and transaction management tools, available in real time via the internet.

US: 310 670 (PAYX) 7299
[email protected]
www.paymentexpress.com
• 32-Bit Cortex M3 120MHz processor
• Contactless card interfaces - ISO14443A/B
• Supports closed loop proprietary payment
cards (e.g MiFare)(with firmare update)
• FeliCa (with firmare update)
• SAMs card interfaced - optional (external)
• 2 RS232 serial ports
• 4 display LEDs - vertical or horizontal
orientation
• DC Input 5Vdc to 40Vdc
• 3W max power consumption
• Size - 95mm (w) x 85mm (h) x 22mm (d)
Certifications:

EMV Contactless L1 & L2
PayPass 2.1/ 3.x
PayWave 2.1

FEATURES & BENEFITS

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

e:VAL® Cloud Based Electronic Validation System
e:VAL® Product Description
Parking Research Enterprises
5901 NW 151st ST., Suite 205
Miami Lakes, FL 33014
www.preinc.com
[email protected]

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Introduction
e:VAL is a secure internet application that allows users to validate parking tickets anywhere internet access is available using a standard web browser. Common challenges associated with paper validation tickets or stickers such as; missing or lost validation tickets, theft, and fraud are eliminated with e:VAL.

The e:VAL solution was designed to:
• Allow users to securely validate parking tickets using a standard web browser. • Provide 100% accounting of all validation activity.
• Manage all cash accounting activity related to the validation process. • Provide reporting on all validation and cash accounting activity. • Prevent theft and fraud related to parking validation. • Reduce or eliminate the need for validation stickers and paper validation tickets. • Provide visitor tracking and reporting.
e:VAL also provides reports on all validations, visitors, and cash management activities.

Managers can generate comprehensive reports displaying the cost of validations provided to visitors.

The types of validations that may be applied include:
• Cash Value –A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts a cash value from the fee of the ticket upon departure.
• Time Value –A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts an amount of time from the duration of the ticket resulting in a discounted fee upon departure. • Rate Change – A validation that when applied to a ticket selects a different rate structure to calculate the ticket fee.
• Calculated Time – A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts the current duration of the ticket resulting in a discounted fee upon departure. • Percentage – A validation that when applied to a ticket deducts a percentage of the total fee.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PROCESS DESCRIPTION

1. The customer obtains an entry ticket.

2. The customer visits a validation provider or merchant account.

3. The customer’s ticket is validated using e:VAL.
a. Web Edition
b. Kiosk Edition
c. Mobile Edition

4. The customer receives the discount applied upon departure at the parking structure an exit column or automated payment machine.

Validation accounts may be configured as one of three types:
• Pre-Payment Accounts – Require the validation provider to fund an account prior to allowing validations to be applied.
• Post Payment Accounts – Allow the validation provider to apply validation up to a set credit limit before a payment must be made.
• No Charge Accounts – Allow validations to be applied without restriction.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
All modules described may be used synchronously and are included with a standard e:VAL system.

WEB Edition
e:VAL Web Edition uses a standard web browser to apply parking validations over the internet. Validation providers log into their facility web portal to manage or apply validations anywhere internet access is available.

Optional information including; visitor name, company, or text may be recorded and associated with a validation transaction.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

KIOSK Edition
e:VAL Kiosk Edition uses a small internet appliance designed to provide a customer validation with minimal user interaction. This makes the solution ideal for high volume applications or unattended validation points.

The unit may be programed remotely to display a custom message or change the validation type.

The unit may be connected to the internet through a standard network connector or wirelessly.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Badge Mode
e:VAL Kiosk Edition in Badge Mode requires an authorized badge or barcode to be scanned prior to allowing a validation to take place on the unit. Badges can be created using any common barcode software on existing identification such as a time card or membership identification.

Badges may be programmed through the web interface and restricted by kiosk or the entire system.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Event Management
e:VAL Event Management Edition uses either e:VAL Kiosk or Web Edition to apply different validations based on a particular venue or event. Events may be created, tracked, and assigned to an e:VAL Kiosk in real time from anywhere using the online interface. e:VAL Event Management was designed for using in corporate parks, hotels, and other event driven environments.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

Residential Management
e:VAL Residential Management adds the ability to apply a validation to a tenant account as well as have a concierge do so on their behalf. Real time reporting of validations is provided for both types of validations.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRE Mobile Connect
PRE Mobile Connect allows for integration full integration with mobile phone payment services. Parking patrons are able to quickly and easily pay for their parking using their mobile phone.

The solution requires no additional hardware installation at entry or exit

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.

PRE Web Service API
The e:VAL solution provides the ability to execute parking validations via a standard web browser, an internet enabled kiosk device or mobile device. Additionally we provide a web service programming interface allowing third party applications the ability to look up and execute parking validations transactions.

All traffic uses HTTPS and user based IP Address restriction is supported.

Web-Based Electronic Validation System
Product Description
© 2015 Parking Research Enterprises, Inc.
e:VAL DATAFLOW DIAGRAM
The e:VAL system requires a dedicated computer which facilitates communication between the host SKIDATA system and the e:VAL Hosted Servers. Communication is initiated outbound using HTTPS.

Factsheet
Picture may vary from actual product
www.skidata.com
Increase occupancy and sales
sweb.Validate lets you sell a variety of kinds and
contingents of validations to business partners and
to settle payment for these in their entirety. In this way, the nearby shops make parking in your garage more
attractive, and as operators you benefit from increased occupancy and profits. Also, sweb.Validate is fully
integrated into all functionalities of the SKIDATA system.

Increase efficiency
You are more efficient in the both the management and
in the application right from the start. The web-based
solution can be used with existing POS systems or
office PCs – meaning you do not need special hardware
or tickets, or the associated extra maintenance. In
addition customer complaints will be reduced and you
relieve your staff as there are no tickets or vouchers
which have to be produced and sent any more.

Full cost control
Your business partners buy credit, either in advance
or by subsequent settlement, and provide exactly
the right discount for each of their visitors – as
a reward for goods purchased in the shopping
center, or as parking authorizations for suppliers or
clients. Thereby, you can identify at all times how
many validations were awarded and by whom.

Easy to use
Customers can collect multiple validations with their
short-term parking ticket. These are then automatically applied during payment, which greatly simplifies the
payment process. Furthermore, sweb.Validate offers a
web-based management portal. Your business partners
award validations via the web application, the self-service terminal or in the future also using the mobile app.

The opportunities and benefits available for the use of validations have never been so diverse:
sweb.Validate – the new web-based service increases your garage utilization and your turnover through the sale and marketing of discounts to nearby business partners. Shops, offices and hotels comfortably and easily grant electronic reductions to their parking customers.

Simple and
effective - success
with validations.

Parking Management POS & Vaildation
Sales.Services
‘sweb.Validate’
Customer Agreement Terms and Conditions

1. Agreement Governs. This agreement governs your purchase and use of the parking control equipment, including (without limitation) the hardware, software, and any documentation, data, and multimedia content (collectively, the "Equipment") manufactured (or otherwise provided) by SKIDATA, Inc. ("SKIDATA"). PROVISIONS OF ANY PURCHASE ORDER OR SIMILAR DOCUMENT YOU SUBMIT SHALL NOT BE BINDING ON ANY PARTY.

2. Software. With respect to the software that is part of the Equipment, you acknowledge and agree that (a) this agreement permits you, the original user, to use the software solely in the device or computer it is embedded-in or installed-in by SKIDATA (b) you may not transfer the software to another device, computer or storage media (c) you may not disassemble, reverse engineer, copy, sublicense, or distribute the software except as allowed in this agreement, (d) you may transfer the software to another person only if you deliver the device or computer it is embedded-in or installed-in along with any documentation to that person without retaining any copies and that person complies with the terms of this agreement, (e) SKIDATA retains ownership of the software, and (f) the software contains confidential, proprietary information that is a valuable trade secret of SKIDATA and is protected by copyright laws and you will keep such information strictly confidential.

3. Limited Warranty. For a period of 1 Year from the date of delivery of the Equipment (the "Warranty Period"), SKIDATA warrants that the Equipment will materially conform with the applicable descriptions and specifications provided at the time of delivery.

4. Limitations. EXCEPT AS STATED ABOVE, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AGAINST

INFRINGEMENT, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. Without limiting the foregoing, SKIDATA does not warrant that the operation of the software is not error-free.

5. Remedies and Limitation. During the Warranty Period, SKIDATA shall, at SKIDATA's option, repair, replace, or refund or credit the purchase price of any portion of the Equipment that does not comply with the warranty set forth above. SKIDATA's obligation to repair, replace, or refund or credit the purchase price of any defective Equipment pursuant to this Section shall not apply to any portion of the Equipment that has been subjected to misuse, mishandling, or storage in a manner inconsistent with its labeling, neglect, modification, unusual physical stress after delivery to the shipper, or fluctuations in the power supply or an unstable network system used in connection with the Equipment.

6.Limitation of Remedies and Liability. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AS SET FORTH ABOVE. IN NO EVENT SHALL

SKIDATA BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, LOSS

OF PROFITS, OR FOR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, EVEN IF SKIDATA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER SUCH CLAIMS ARE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR OTHER THEORIES OF LIABILITY. IF THE

FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL BE FOUND INAPPLICABLE TO ANY CLAIM OF LOSS

FOR ANY REASON, THE LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE

PRICE PAID FOR THE DEFECTIVE OR OTHERWISE NONCONFORMING EQUIPMENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM.

7. Miscellaneous. Any modification or waiver of this agreement must be in writing and signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. This agreement represents the entire and final agreement between you and SKIDATA regarding its subject matter. SKIDATA shall have no obligations or liabilities to you under this Agreement. However, you agree that SKIDATA is an intended third-party beneficiary under these terms of this Agreement and may enforce its terms against you. In the event any suit or action is brought to enforce or interpret any of the terms of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party all reasonable attorney fees incurred at trial, on appeal, and on any petition for review, together with such other expenses, costs, and disbursements as may be allowed by law.

Exhibit F
Parking Access and Revenue Control RFP
1 City of Santa Monica
Parking Operations

REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS

PARKING ACCESS AND REVENUE CONTROL SYSTEM (PARCS)
PROPOSAL DUE DATE:

Thursday November 14, 2013
This Request for Proposals has been developed specifically for the Parking Access and Revenue Control System, and has been edited from its previous form. Although the general scope has not changed, some of the requirements have been altered. All Proposers are urged to review this document in detail before submitting a proposal.
2 Table of Contents
Notice Inviting Request for Proposals……………………………………………………..5 Section 1 – Introduction………………………………………………………….………...6
Section 2 – Instructions to Proposers…………………………………………………….. .6 Compliance with the RFP……………………………………………….….6
Due Date……………………………………………………….……………6
RFP Rules…………………………………………………………………...6
Financial Statements………………………………………………………..7
Acknowledgement of Insurance Requirements………………………….…8
Response Format…………………………………………………………...8
Delivery of Proposal…………………………………………………….….8
Communication Restrictions…………………………………………….…9
Questions……………………………………………………………….…..10
RFP Schedule………………………………………………………............10
Evaluation Criteria…………………………………………………………10
Operational Review………………………………………………………...11
Section 3 – RFP Specifications…………………………………………………………….14 Proposal Submittals……………………………………………………..…14
Closeout Submittals…………………………………………………..……17
Delivery, Storage and Handling Requirements…………………………....17 Warranty…………………………………………………………………...18
Add Alternate: Extended Warranty……………………………………….18
System Description………………………………………………………...19
Design Criteria……………………………………………………………..21
Central Management System………………………………………………23
Revenue Control System………………………………………………......27
Access Control System…………………………………………………….29
Entry, Exit and Pay-on-Foot Stations………………………………...……34 Barrier Gates………………………………………………………………..38
Vehicle Detectors………………………………………………….……….39
Intercom System…………………………………………………………....40
Installation Requirements….………………………………….…………....41
Acceptance Testing………………………………………………….……...42
3 Training ……………………………………………………………..…..... 44
Reports ……………………………………………………………………..44
Section 4 – Administrative Information……………………………………………………46 Performance Bond…………………………………………………….…....46
Liquidated Damages……………………………………………………..…46
Hold Harmless………………………………………………………………46
Termination…………………………………………………………………46
Insurance Requirements…………………………………………….………47
Payment Terms………………………………………………………..…….47
Pricing……………………………………………………………….………47
Interpretations and Addendums………………………………………….…48
Ambiguity, Conflict, or Other Errors in the RFP…………………………....48 Information Provided by City…………………………………………….…49
Cancellation/ Modification/ Solicitation/Rejection………………………....49 Acceptance of Proposals…………………………………………….………49
Conducting Investigations/Requesting Supplementary Information……......50 Ownership and Disclosure………………………………………….………..50
Confidentiality………………………………………………….……………50
Validity of Proposals……………………………………………….………...51
Costs and Expenses of Proposers……………………………….……………51
Proposal Protest Procedure…………………………………………………...51
Examination of Documents…………………………………………………...52
Interpretation s/Questions……………………………………………………..52
Right to Reject Proposals………………………………………………….......53
Authorized Signatories………………………………………………….…......53
Public Records Act…………………………………………………………….53
Non Discrimination……………………………………………………….........53
Oaks Initiative………………………………………………………………….53
Living Wage Ordinance………………………………………………………...53
Arizona Disclosure……………………………………………………………...54
Notice of Award……………………………………………………….…..…....54
Other Information for Proposal Submittals………………………….……...…..54 4 Exhibits:

Exhibit A - Insurance Requirement ……………………………………………………..55 Exhibit B – Oaks Initiative Notice ………………………………………………………57 Exhibit C – Living Wage Ordinance ……………………………………………………59 Exhibit D – Arizona Disclosure ………………………………………………………....61 Exhibit E – Locations List ………………………………………………………………63
Exhibit F – Equipment List ……………………………………………………………...64 Exhibit G – Non-Collusion Affidavit and Non-Discrimination Policy………………….65 5 Notice Inviting Request for Proposals
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT proposals for the installation of a new parking access and revenue control system (“PARCS”) for fourteen parking facilities owned by the City of Santa Monica, including twelve (12) parking structures and two (2) surface lots located throughout the City’s Downtown, as well as at the City’s Main Library, Civic Center and the Municipal Pier (collectively, the “Parking Facilities”). Proposals will be accepted at City of Santa Monica Parking Operations (“Parking Operations”) located at 1717 Fourth Street, Suite 150, Santa Monica, CA 90401. This Request for Proposals (“RFP”) is a competitive process designed to serve the City’s best interests and to provide Vendors a fair opportunity for their services to be considered in compliance with Santa Monica Municipal Code Chapter 2.24.

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
The objective of this RFP is to replace the City’s existing PARCS with an all new fully integrated on-line, real-time PARCS, functioning as described herein, at the Parking Facilities as identified in Exhibit A. The information contained in this RFP defines the necessary steps all Proposers must follow. Failure to follow these steps may result in disqualification. The City reserves the right to accept minor irregularities contained in Proposals and the right to reject Proposals not submitted in compliance with this RFP. The City further reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals.

The RFP is open to all qualified firms and manufacturers that are able to deliver all required materials and functions specified in this RFP.

The installation of the PARCS, and ongoing support service, will be awarded to a single Proposer, they will be responsible for all material, labor, equipment, services, installation, testing, training and ongoing support. No part of the currently installed system may be reused in the implementation of the new PARCS. This includes gates, loops, ticket dispensing devices, ticket and card readers, computers, software, etc.; however, Proposer may use existing communication and power. Proposer is responsible for any special connections and or converters for their system.

The installation must be scheduled to allow for continuous, revenue-collecting operations at all the Parking Facilities. Most installation work will need to occur during overnight hours. No installation work may occur during the holiday season between Thanksgiving Day to New Year’s Day, except as necessary in the new Downtown Parking Structure 6, which is not yet open to the public.

A critical objective of this project is the ability of the PARCS to communicate in real time via a Central Management System (CMS) located in City Hall and in the Parking Structure 5 Office.

The City’s parking operator must have complete and remote control of the system. 6 SECTION 2 – INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS
A. COMPLIANCE WITH THE RFP: Proposals must be in strict compliance with this RFP.

Failure to comply with all provisions of the RFP may result in disqualification of a Proposal.

B. DUE DATE: All Proposals for this project are due by 5:00 p.m. on November 14, 2013.

Any offer submitted by a Proposer as part of a Proposal must remain open and irrevocable for a period of 180 days from the deadline for submitting Proposals stated above. All work to be performed under any contract entered into pursuant to this RFP must be authorized in writing by Parking Operations prior to the commencement of such work.

C. RFP RULES

1. The Proposer is solely responsible to seek clarification, if needed, of any portion of the RFP. All requests by Proposers for clarification of the RFP must be in writing, via email by October 21, 2013 5:00pm Pacific Daylight Time. Thereafter, the City will not respond to requests for clarification received after that time. Failure by a Proposer to seek clarification of any portion of the RFP shall not relieve the Proposer from its representations as set forth hereinabove nor serve as the basis for any claim by the Proposer that it was mistaken or misled in connection with the preparation of its Proposal.

2. Interpretations, corrections, and changes by the City of the RFP will be made by RFP Addendums. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the RFP made in any other manner shall not be relied upon and will not be binding. Notice of an RFP Addendum shall be given only to those Proposers who register and download the RFP via the City’s online bidding system available at:
http://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=15167#.

3. Notice by the City of a Proposal Addendum shall be by hand delivery, mail, facsimile or e-mail. The City also anticipates (but shall not be obligated for) making RFP Addendums available on the City website. Failure of a Proposer to receive an Addendum shall not entitle the Proposer to an extension of the Proposal due date nor shall it permit the submission of any additional Proposal information after the deadlines set forth in the Proposal due date.

4. All Proposals must be submitted, filed, made, and executed in accordance with applicable Laws, whether such applicable Laws are expressly referred to herein or not.

5. All Proposals may be withdrawn at any time upon written notice to the City at the place for receipt of Proposals prior to the deadline for submittal of Proposals. Proposals withdrawn prior to the deadline may be resubmitted up to the deadline for submission.

6. Proposers have the continuing obligation, commencing upon submission of his/her/its Proposal, to immediately notify the City, in writing, if it learns that any of the following have occurred: (1) any statement made in its Proposal was false or misleading; (2) circumstances have occurred since the Proposer submitted its Proposal that, if they had occurred prior to the date that Proposer submitted its Proposal, would have constituted grounds for the automatic disqualification of the Proposer; or (3) the Proposer has undergone a change in Ownership in which Ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of its stock or assets has changed.
7 7. The City reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, but shall not have the obligation, to conduct Proposer interviews or to visit supplier/manufacturer locations or existing projects as part of the review process.

8. The City reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, but shall not have the obligation, to request, receive, evaluate and score as part of its evaluation of a Proposer’s Proposal any additional or supplemental information relevant to the questions in the Proposal that the City may receive from a Proposer or another source, including, without limitation, information received after the deadline. Unless requested by the City in an RFP Addendum or otherwise required by these Instructions, a Proposer shall not have the right after the deadline for submission to submit new or additional information to supplement its Proposal. All proposal information must be submitted to the Finance Department Parking Office. Any submittal of alternate proposals or offers to staff or elected officials not specified in this RFP will result in disqualification.

9. The City reserves the right, but assumes no obligation, to contact and interview any persons or organizations identified in Proposer’s Project References listed in any response to any portion of the Proposal. Proposers assume sole responsibility for any inaccuracies in the contact information provided. Incorrect contact information provided in response to a request anywhere in the Proposal for a Project Reference may, in the sole and absolute discretion of City, result in the Project Reference being stricken.

10. In addition to the City’s contacting the References listed in Proposer’s responses to the Proposal, the City shall have the right, but not the obligation, before or after a Proposer has been prequalified, to investigate the facts or circumstances of any response by a Proposer. The City has no obligation to afford any Proposer the opportunity, as part of the scoring process of a Proposer’s Proposal or otherwise, to respond to any adverse information that may be received as a result of such investigations. In addition to the foregoing, the City shall have the right, but not the obligation, during the selection process to designate auditors to perform audits or reviews of the books or accounts of any Proposer in order to confirm the accuracy and completeness of financial information provided. The Proposer shall make provision for and is responsible to ensure full and prompt cooperation with such audits or review.

11. The City reserves the right to waive clerical or minor irregularities, errors or omissions in the information contained in any Proposal or in regard to any Proposer’s compliance with Proposal process, and to make all final determinations with respect to the information provided in any Proposal.

D. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS: The Proposer must provide copies of audited financial statements for the most recent three (3) fiscal years for the entity that is proposed to sign the Contract. Audited financial statements should include: balance sheet, income statement, footnotes, and subsidiary schedules. In the event that the Proposer does not have audited financial statements, three years of business tax returns with supporting schedules, may be provided on an exception basis. However, tax returns are not an alternative to providing audited financial statements; if the Proposer has audited financial statements, they must be provided.

1. If the entity that will sign the Contract has a parent company or is proposing as a joint venture, the parent company or joint venture companies must also provide audited 8 financial statements for the most recent three fiscal years. The parent company must provide a statement indicating its intent and means to provide financial assurance of performance. Parent company guarantee forms are provided, Form N.1 and Form N.2, for use by the Proposer.

2. If the entity that will sign the Contract has been in existence less than three years, the Proposer must provide sufficient financial data to substantiate, to the satisfaction of the City, the Proposer’s financial capability.

3. In addition to the audited financial statements, the Proposer must provide a statement from the Chief Financial Officer indicating that there has been no material change in the financial circumstances of the proposing entity (or its parent company or City’s if they are providing financial assurance of performance) since the date of the last audited financial statements.

The City will make best efforts, but make no representation that it will be able to maintain total confidentiality of the Proposer’s financial information. At all times, the City will comply with the provisions of the California Public Records Act.

E. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: By signing its proposal, Proposer acknowledges that it has read and understands the insurance requirements for the proposal as described in Insurance Requirement and Contract section. Proposer also understands that the evidence of required insurance must be submitted within fifteen (15) working days following notification of its offer being accepted; otherwise, the City may rescind its acceptance of the proposal and retain its Performance Bond.

F. RESPONSE FORMAT: The items listed below are the minimum RFP requirements.

Submit in the same order as the Table of Contents for this RFP. Failure by a Proposer to include all listed items may result in the rejection of its Proposal. Each section should be clearly labeled, with pages numbered and separated by tabs. Proposals must include the following sections:

1. Cover Letter.

2. Qualifications and References.

3. Project Manager’s resume listing qualifications and experience.

4. Data sheets for primary equipment in project.

5. Detailed project schedule.

6. Detailed price sheet with itemized costs.

7. Detailed price list for on-going fees or subscription based services.

8. Warranty/Extended Warranty/Service Agreement.

9. Report samples.

10. Sample training program.

11. Sample punch list.

12. List of Sub-Contractors.

13. List manufacturer of each primary component of system.

14. Recommended spare parts list w/pricing.
9 G. DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: All Proposals are to be delivered before 5:00 p.m., Pacific Daylight Time, on the date shown in Notice Inviting of RFP, to:

City of Santa Monica
Parking Operations
Frank Ching, Parking Administrator
1717 Fourth Street, Suite 150
Santa Monica, CA 90401
[email protected]

1. The Proposer assumes full and sole responsibility for timely receipt of the completed Proposal at the above-listed location. Proposals that are received after the deadline specified in this RFP shall be returned unopened; provided, however, that a late Proposal may be considered if it is the only Proposal received.

2. The City, in compliance with its Sustainable City Program, is encouraging the use of recycled and tree-free products. Where possible, products should be duplex copied and printed on 100% recycled or tree-free paper. They shall be submitted in reusable three ring binders and shall not contain plastic bindings, plastic page cover, or laminated pages.

3. Proposer must submit one (1) original and seven (7) hard copies, total of eight (8) hard copies, of its proposal printed double-sided and on recycled paper and proposals must not contain any non-recyclable material. Additionally, one (1) electronic file that is able to be accessed via a Windows-based PC with Office 2010 and / or can be read in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) must be submitted via email to or on a USB flash drive or CD/DVD.

H. COMMUNICATION RESTRICTIONS

1. In order to preserve the fairness to all parties participating in this RFP process, Proposers are not authorized to communicate with any members or potential members of the selection committee or City staff other than the assigned contact regarding the status of this RFP, the City’s decision related to this RFP, or other questions related to the RFP process, other than as may be expressly permitted herein. There shall be no communication regarding this RFP or the Parking Facilities or their operations by any potential Proposer with any City contractor, lessee, or other stakeholders including, but not limited to, City of Santa Monica Councilmembers, Macerich, Central Parking Systems, Walker Parking Consultants, and Downtown Santa Monica, Inc. Violation of this provision will be grounds for disqualification.

2. Interference with the RFP selection process by any Proposer, employee of a Proposer, persons with vested interests, and/or persons with associated interests of a Proposer may result in disqualification.

3. For purposes of this RFP selection process, interference will be described as: “any effort by any person to sway, coerce, influence, or otherwise affect the outcome of the bid process to their advantage by any means other than fulfilling the terms of the Contractual Documents.” This includes, but is not limited to, attempting to provide gifts or meals of any value, and access to or specialized information to any City contractor, lessee, or other stakeholders either directly or indirectly, including extending an invitation for such activities.
10 4. All informal communication regarding this RFP must cease from the date of receipt of this RFP by each Proposer, until the later of 1) when a binding contractual agreement exists with the selected Vendor and all other Proposers have been notified, or 2) when Parking Operations rejects all Proposals.

5. Participating in this RFP process does not restrict day-to-day business or operational communication with Parking Operations or Central Parking Systems to facilitate preexisting business matters. Any communications regarding this RFP outside of the approved the bidding process specified in this RFP is not authorized.

Any protest related to this RFP must follow the process described in Section R. Protest filed outside of this process will be cause for disqualification.

I. QUESTIONS

1. All communication and any questions regarding this RFP must be submitted via email to [email protected] no later than 5:00 PM Pacific Standard Time on October 24, 2013.

Questions and answers will be provided to all registered Proposers via Addendum.

2. All communication related to this RFP is subject to public disclosure laws and no information submitted is considered confidential, unless otherwise specified and allowed by applicable law. All communication from the City shall be submitted exclusively via the City’s online bidding system, and all potential Proposers must be registered via Planet Bids (http://www.planetbids.com/portal/portal.cfm?CompanyID=15167#) in order to receive such communications and participate in this RFP process.

3. Oral, telephone, facsimile or telegraphic modifications to a Proposal will not be accepted.

J. RFP SCHEDULE
We will use the following timeline to manage the RFP and installation process:
 October 17, 2013 RFP Issued
 October 24, 2013 Deadline for Questions
 October 31, Answers to Questions Released
 November 14, 2013 Proposals due
 November 18 – December 6 Evaluation Process
 January, 2013 City Council Approval
 January, 2013 Award Contract
 Late February, 2014 First installation online (Parking Structure 6)  May, 2014 Project Completion
There will not be a pre-bid meeting. Proposers are encouraged to visit the Parking Facilities in order to familiarize themselves with the site layout and its related components. It is each Proposer’s responsibility to schedule a visit with City of Santa Monica Parking Operations. All Proposers should contact Frank Ching, City Parking Administrator at (310) 458-8299 to schedule a time to visit the Parking Facilities.
11 K. EVALUATION CRITERIA: The City will form a selection committee to evaluate Proposals. The recommendation and award will be based upon factors defined by Santa Monica Municipal Code Section 2.24.072, and on the factors listed below:
1) Price. The total cost to provide, install, operate, and maintain the PARCS. Ongoing cost including, but not limited to, credit card processing, ticket printing, maintenance, and communications cost.
2) The quality of the material or services offered. Service levels and ability to meet the service standards of the maintenance agreement.
3) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform or provide the material or services. 4) The capacity of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service promptly, within the time specified, and without delay or interference.
5) The sufficiency of the bidder’s financial resources and inventory support. 6) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, training, experience and efficiency of the bidder. The qualifications and experience of assigned project manager. 7) The ability of the bidder to provide such future maintenance or service as may be needed.
8) Any other factor which will further the intent set forth in Section 608 of the City Charter.

L. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW: The PARCS equipment will be installed in the fourteen (14) Parking Facilities plus listed in Exhibit E, replacing all existing equipment listed in Exhibit F. In addition, three new facilities are being added to the system as outlined in as below.

New PARCS Equipment Required for Parking Structure 6
 4 Pay on Foot Machines with Cash, Credit Card and Electronic Payment options  2 Entry Stations w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  3 Exit Stations w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  5 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 15 Protective Bollards
New PARCS Equipment Required for for Pier Parking Lot
 2 Pay on Foot Machines with Cash, Credit card and Electronic Payment options  1 Outdoor Shelter for Pay on Foot Machine
 1 Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom.  1 Exit Station w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  2 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 4 Protective Bollards
New PARCS Equipment Required for KEC Parking Structure
 1 Pay on Foot Machine with Cash, Credit card and Electronic Payment options 12  1 Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  5 Exit Stations w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom  2 Barrier Gates w/Ground Loops
 4 Protective Bollards

1. The PARCS will accommodate over eleven million cars per year. The City’s current system supports 7,000 keycard users and serves an average of 13,000 transient cars per day operating 24 hours a day, 365 days per year, except at the Main Library and Pier Deck. Other features include web-based validations, monthly keycard integration with transit passes, debit card integration with transit debit program, and prepaid event parking.

2. Parking demand is heavily event-driven. As an example, each year the Los Angeles Marathon finish line is in the City, necessitating the parking of over 30,000 cars that day alone in Parking Facilities located in the City’s Downtown and Civic Center. a. Downtown Parking Structures
The City owns and operates seven (7) parking structures that serve the Third Street Promenade and adjacent commercial area (“Downtown Parking Structures”). The Downtown Parking Structures contain a total of 4,891 parking spaces and serve both transient and monthly customers. The structures were built in 1967 and provided free public parking until 1987, when a fee was instituted and parking meters were installed.

In December 1993, the City Council approved the conversion to a “pay at exit” system that included staffed parking booths. By 2010, all Downtown Parking Structures were automated and serviced by pay machines. The Downtown Parking Structures may be remotely operated by the centralized control panel located in the Parking Office.

Recently, Parking Structure 6 was demolished for reconstruction of a new structure to include 725 spaces, which is scheduled to open in late 2013. The new PARCS for Parking Structure 6 must be installed and operational prior to its reopening.

The City’s Downtown including the Third Street Promenade’s restaurant, retail, office, theater, and residential land uses, as well as the surrounding Downtown commercial area, rely on the Downtown Parking Structures to meet their parking needs. In addition, the City hosts the popular Farmers’ Market on Wednesdays and Saturdays at Arizona Avenue and Second Street, causing peak usage of the area structures between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. on those days. Farmers’ Market merchants and customers depend on the Downtown Parking Structures for parking and restroom facilities. The Downtown Parking Structures average over 80% capacity, seven days a week, over 12 hours each day. During weekends, evenings, Farmers’ Market hours, and peak tourist and retail periods (including summer and fall/winter seasons), some of the Downtown Parking Structures reach or exceed capacity. Because the Downtown Parking Structures often reach or exceed capacity, the ability of the new PARCS to effectively process large volumes of transactions and vehicles is critical.
b. Santa Monica Place Parking Structures
13 The City owns two (2) parking structures attached to the Santa Monica Place mall and operates them via a lease agreement with Macerich Santa Monica Place LLC (the “Santa Monica Place Parking Structures”). Parking Structure 7, located at 1500 4th Street, contains 938 spaces, and Structure 8 located at 1500 2nd Street, contains 1,029 spaces.

Besides providing parking for mall patrons and employees, the Santa Monica Place Parking Structures serve visitors to the Third Street Promenade, Santa Monica Pier, Palisades Park, City Hall, and surrounding retail establishments. c. Main Library Parking Structure
Opened in 2005, the Santa Monica Main Public Library is located at 601 Santa Monica Boulevard. The parking structure that services the Main Library (“Main Library Parking Structure”) has an entrance located on 7th Street, north of Santa Monica Boulevard. With three levels of underground parking and 525 spaces, the Main Library Parking Structure provides parking for library employees, patrons and guests of special events held at the Main Library. The daily operating hours are from 8 a.m. to 11 p.m. d. Civic Center Area Parking
Civic Center Parking Structure
The Civic Parking Structure (“CCPS”) is located at 333 Civic Center Drive and has approximately 744 spaces. It was completed in 2007 and is the world’s first LEED certified parking structure. Located adjacent to Santa Monica’s City Hall, Public Safety Facility, Civic Auditorium and the Los Angeles County Courthouse, the CCPS provides parking for municipal and county employees, litigants, jurors, nearby hotels, downtown workers, as well as Civic Auditorium and Santa Monica High School events.

Civic Auditorium Parking Lot
The Santa Monica Civic Auditorium is located at 1855 Main Street and the Civic Auditorium Parking Lot (CAPL) stretches from Main Street to 4th Street and from Pico Boulevard to Civic Center Drive. The CAPL has entrances and automated booths on both Civic Center Drive and Main Street. In addition to serving the same clientele as the CCPS, the CAPL can be booked in conjunction with Civic Auditorium events, or for large events, such as filming or trade shows, held in the CAPL proper.

The CAPL has 1,009 spaces, including several spaces dedicated for recharging of electric vehicles. The parking lot operates 24 hours per day, seven days a week with automated pay machines. On event days, staff hours reflect the hours of the event and will often require overnight and/or weekend staffing. For event days or evenings, a flat fee is collected upon entry. Depending on the size and type of the event, one or both entrances are used.
e. Pier Deck Parking
14 Approximately three million visitors come to the Santa Monica Pier annually. The Santa Monica Pier has restaurants, street performers, shops and a world-famous amusement park, Pacific Park. The Pier Deck Parking Lot consists of 284 spaces. It operates seven days a week throughout the year from 7:30 am to midnight, with the exception of special events when times may vary. The Pier Deck Parking Lot currently has a cashier on duty at the entrance and exit gates. Installation of the new PARCS will require the installation of one or two pay machine(s) with entrance and exit gates so that the Pier Deck Parking Lot will become an automated and be remotely operated by the Parking Office. f. Ken Edwards Center (KEC)
Ken Edwards Center is located at 1527 4th Street. It was designed specifically for the needs of seniors and people with disabilities. WISE & Healthy Aging, a non-profit agency, is a tenant of the Ken Edwards Center. In March 2013, the City’s Senior Center also relocated to Ken Edwards Center. The parking structure that services the KEC (“KEC Parking Structure”) contains 116 parking spaces, of which 34 are available to the public. The remaining spaces are assigned to building tenants. The KEC Parking Structure will primarily serve the needs of the KEC, with additional public parking available during off peak hours. Similar to the Pier Deck Parking Lot, the City anticipates that the installation of the new PARCS will include installation of one or two pay machines with entrance and exit gates so that the KEC Parking Structure will become an automated facility and be remotely operated by the Parking Office SECTION 3 – RFP SPECIFICATIONS

1. PROPOSAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Product description for each component including the following:
a. Detail of user interface.
b. Operating temperature and humidity ranges.
c. Housing material and access panel location.
d. Mounting requirements.
e. Electric power requirements

2. Description of the CMS software and hardware including the following:
a. Configuration diagram.
b. Software platforms and programming language.
c. Communication protocol, polling procedures and transaction message flow from peripheral devices to and through CMS.
d. Communication failure/error identification and recovery. e. Fault tolerance.
15 f. Back-up procedures.
g. Data storage and retrieval procedures.

3. Photos of actual installations are recommended. No videos will be accepted.

B. RCS Credential: Proposer shall provide rationale for offering one of the following:

1. Magnetic stripe tickets

2. Barcode tickets
C. Detailed description of cloud-based validation system functions and features.

D. Sample reports as defined throughout this document.

E. Name of all manufacturers providing primary components.

F. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. In continuous operations for previous five years.

2. Primary components installed in three or more parking facilities of similar size and complexity. Provide the following for each installation. a. Name of project.
b. Location.
c. Contact name, telephone number and email address.
d. Date of installation.
e. Number of lanes.
f. Description of equipment and quantities.

G. Installer Qualifications:

1. Licensed in California. Submit contractors’ license with Proposal.

2. Continuously worked with equipment manufacturer, including providing installations and maintenance, for minimum of three years.

3. Approved in writing by PARCS manufacturer(s).

4. Documentation of manufacturer’s installation training within previous two years.

5. Proven ability to provide service and support after installation, meeting minimum requirements as specified herein.

6. Manufacturer approved service center located within two hours driving distance of site.

H. References: Provide a minimum of three (3) references of similar size and scope (multiple facilities w/multiple lanes, pay on foot machines in remote locations, etc.).

1. Name of project

2. Location
16 3. Contact information – phone, email, address

4. Month and year of installation

5. Number of lanes

6. Description of project

7. Cost of project
I. Project Manager: Contractor must propose an assigned Project Manager and provide his/her resume. The Project Manager will be the point of contact and oversee the entire project, both operationally and administratively.

J. Organizational Chart of all relevant staff.

K. List of sub-contractors, identifying nature of work.

L. PCI Compliance: Provide proof that the proposed PARCS is compliant with current Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements. This pertains to all credit and debit card acceptance hardware, software and other system components as defined by the PCI DSS. Acceptable proof of PCI DSS Compliance is that the equipment manufacturers are listed on Visa and MasterCard web sites as PCI DSS Compliant. It is not acceptable to state that the credit card processor is PCI DSS Compliant or is in the process of becoming compliant and/or receiving validation.

M. Warranty: Submit a copy of Warranty and clear details of procedures in the event of failure and instances that may affect validity or limitations of warranty.

N. Training Plan: Submit a comprehensive training plan.

O. Project Schedule:

1. Submit a detailed project schedule (from signed contract to acceptance testing), identifying milestones along the way, as well as potential challenges to the schedule.

2. Describe how Proposer will maintain the schedule.

3. Describe existing PARCS removal and new PARCS installation will occur without ceasing existing operations.

4. Provide an expedited installation schedule for Structure 6 (first installation).

Time is of the essence.

5. As a separate sub section to the installation schedule, provide a Data Conversion Plan.
a. Plan shall detail how each parking garage or lot will be brought on line with the new PARCS while the “yet to be converted” lots and garages continue operations under the current system.
b. Plan shall discuss how both systems shall run in tandem until such a time that the news PARCS can take full control of all facilities. 17 P. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts specific to this installation, including:

1. Part name.

2. Part serial number.

3. Unit price.

4. Recommended quantities.

5. Total cost.

Q. Anti-Tailgating: Tailgating has been a problem proposer shall describe system features that will address this issue.

2. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Within 30 days of award of contract.

1. Equipment finishes and colors (if applicable).

2. RCS ticket or alternate credential.

3. ACS credentials.

4. Other items requiring City selection.

B. Acceptance Testing Plan: Thirty (30) days prior to start of first test C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manuals, standard operating procedures and/or guidelines for all components Thirty (30) days prior to start of first test.

3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Assume care, custody and control of all PARCS equipment and components.

B. Replace damaged materials at no cost to City.

C. Deliver equipment to site in manufacturer’s original containers to prevent damage and marked for easy identification.

D. Store equipment in original containers in clean, dry location.

E. Remove gate arms and cover lane equipment in areas with active construction to avoid damage. Reinstall prior to lane and system acceptance testing.

F. Spare Parts: Deliver spare parts to be maintained on site complete and ready to use, prior to commencement of SAT. Maintain inventory of spare parts at this level as during warranty period.
18 G. Stock Items: Furnish the following stock items prior to commencement of acceptance testing. City must approve color and artwork prior to final order of any item that is custom printed.

1. 10,000 ACS credentials:
a. 3,500 RFID Cards
b. 3,500 HID Proximity
c. 2,000 HID Proximity w/Magnetic Stripe
d. 1,000 Magnetic Stripe CDC

2. Three (3) spare ribbons/toner cartridges, etc. for each printer requiring ribbon, toner, etc. as appropriate.

3. Twelve (12) rolls of receipt paper per POF and EXS.

4. Two (2) lockable coin vaults per POF.

5. Two (2) lockable banknote vaults per POF.

6. Gate Parts
a. 4 spare drive pins (or equivalent, if applicable) per facility. b. 2 complete spare gate arm assemblies per facility.

H. Lock and Key Requirements:

1. Identical locks and keys for all like equipment but unique to this project so that keys from other facilities will not provide access.

2. Provide City or City’s Representative with two sets of keys for each lockable piece of equipment and two sets of master keys.

4. WARRANTY
A. General: Equipment and entire PRACS installation (100% parts and labor) for two (2) years from date of final acceptance by the City. System maintained and serviced against any and all malfunctions due to manufacturing or installation defects at no cost to City during warranty period, including preventative maintenance per manufacturer's recommendations or as necessary to keep equipment in good working order. Software support provided during warranty period to include all software upgrades at no additional cost to City.

1. Maintain a log of all maintenance, preventive maintenance and repair work performed under warranty and provide to City at end of warranty period.

2. Technical Support: Service is required 24 hours per day, seven days per week, and 365 days per year during and after warranty period. Response time from initiation of trouble call to on-site response by qualified service technician cannot exceed four hours with solution. Repair or replace all defective or damaged items under warranty by end of the following calendar day on which notice was given.
19 B. Install all commercially-released or proprietary software and operating system updates, patches and upgrades applicable to this system that are released during warranty period and maintenance agreement at no additional cost.

C. Provide all system programming, including rate changes.

D. All Microsoft based software included but not limited to Windows and applications upgrade shall be included for the entire term of the warranty and maintenance contract at the expense of the vendor. This should be inclusive in supporting warranty and maintenance contract.

5. ADD ALTERNATE: EXTENDED WARRANTY AND PREVENTATIVE

MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
A. In Cost Section only, provide annual pricing for extending the warranty and preventative maintenance for up to ten years.

B. The City may, at its own election, extend the warranty and maintenance period up to eight (8) additional years after acceptance of the systems and the initial two year warranty. Pricing for extended maintenance agreement and warranty must be listed as an option, and the pricing guaranteed for up to ten (10) years.

6. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This is an automated PARCS consisting of Pay-on-Foot revenue control equipment for transient transactions and proximity card, RFID and magnetic stripe access control equipment for monthly patrons. Provide all necessary components and materials for a complete and functioning system.

B. System Design: Gated PARCS with the following subsystems:

1. Central Management System (CMS) consisting of server, task or subsystem computers and workstations providing on-line monitoring and control of all PARCS devices. Through information generated by system reports, a complete CMS capable of:
a. Correlating RCS and ACS entries and exits with vehicles present. b. Reconciling time parked with revenue generated.
c. Providing independent and consolidated occupancy and activity counts for both RCS and ACS systems.

2. Microprocessor controlled, in on-line, virtual real-time communication with CMS.

3. Transactions occurring at equipment report to CMS immediately, with communications hierarchy appropriate to need for action or response from another component, feature or subsystem.
20 4. All transaction data is available to CMS workstations within one minute of completing transaction at any device. Delays or functional degradation resulting from data communication between devices over CMS network is not acceptable.

5. Each primary component communicates complete transaction log to CMS. In event of communication failure, devices continue to operate in off-line mode and store a minimum of 2,000 transactions, or have sufficient system redundancy, to insure availability of transaction data upon restoration of CMS. In event of failure during communication, an error-checking and recovery routine is employed to prevent corruption of data files.

6. ACS for regular (‘monthly’) parkers who prearrange parking and utilize RFID or HID proximity card access.

7. RCS for ‘transient’ parkers who pull a ticket to enter and process the ticket to exit, including
a. ENS with ticket dispensers.
b. Pay-on-Foot system consisting of POF machines and Exit Stations. c. Pay-in-Lane system consisting of PIL machines.
d. Cloud-based validation system.

8. Primary Components:
a. RCS consisting of ENS, ticket dispenser, PIL, POF, and Exit Station. b. ACS consisting of antennas, transponders, readers and access credentials. c. Barrier gates.
d. CMS including software, computers with related monitors, data communication equipment, data storage devices and printers. e. Intercom system including master station, call stations and related hardware.

9. Additional components and accessories:
a. Vehicle detectors (loops or sensors) and count system at all entrance and exit lanes.
b. Protective bollards.
c. Electronic signs.

C. Communication Infrastructure
The City of Santa Monica Information Systems Department (“ISD”) uses Hewlett Packard servers and VMWare virtual server infrastructure for City business applications hosted in its primary Data Center in City Hall. It is preferred that the PARCS application support virtual server environments based on VMWare standards used by the City. ISD will provide required virtual servers for the PARCS application based on specs provided by the selected Vendor. In addition, it is preferred that all HUB computers be commodity hardware such as a standard PC. The City selected Hewlett 21 Packard E series Desktop Computers through a competitive process as a standard platform for all its client computing needs.

ISD operates an Enterprise Network using Cisco Layer 2, 3 switches and routers. All City related facilities including Parking Structures and some Parking Lots are connected via fiber-optic communications network to one of five hub sites located throughout the City. The City uses MRV multiplexers and SFP’s for its Metropolitan Area Network (MAN). The Network core and edge devices are based on Cisco commodity hardware.

ISD will work with the selected Vendor to make necessary improvements, upgrades and to interconnect the new PARCS system VLAN to the City Network. Proposers are encouraged to inspect the current communication infrastructures and provide required specifications needs to support the new PARCS equipment as part of any Proposal.

D. Power Requirements:

1. Provide and install all necessary device control wiring, communications wiring and additional power wiring required by system. Include special electrical power and grounding. Proposer can evaluate the current wiring and reuse if reliable and reusable but will be liable for any failures or performance issues.

2. Provide and install any power conditioning that is required for the operation of the system. Power provided for this Project is 120 VAC +/- 10% and 60 Hz from circuits dedicated to PARCS.

3. Provide and install all electronics and communications equipment for communication network. Terminate and connect all communications cabling.

4. Provide and install 30-minute battery back-up power for servers, task computers, work stations, entry and exit stations, barrier gates and POFs. Provide unit pricing for each component.

5. Proposer must perform their own site evaluation to ascertain whether existing communications and power conduits are sized correctly and are good and useable for new communications cable, new vehicle detection loops and all necessary power terminations. If any existing conduits and/or cables are found to be noncompliant with local codes or should the system proposed require additional conduit and/or cables, the Proposer must specify location(s) and include the cost of same in proposal. All new electrical conduit and power wiring shall be in compliance with local codes and manufacturer requirements.

6. The City has the desire to enhance communication speed and reliability. City of Santa Monica ISD will coordinate with the selected Proposer with respect to specifications and an upgrade schedule.

7. DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Accuracy: Provide the following minimum accuracy levels. Calculate accuracy by dividing the accurate counts/calculations by all counts/calculation.

1. Ticket reading: 99%
22 2. Fee calculation: 99%

3. Transaction counts: 99%

4. Exception counts: 99%

5. Revenue amounts: 99%

6. Data received and accepted by computer system as valid: 100%

7. Data transmission: Less than one message re-transmission per hour.

B. Equipment Construction: Design and construct all components and equipment with the following:

1. Perform in and withstand the climate conditions of the City of Santa Monica, including wind and sand in beach areas.

2. Ability to add future hardware devices without a major upgrade to the hardware or software within seven (7) years from the date of acceptance of the PARCS. If Proposer anticipates a necessary major upgrade during the next seven (7)-year period, Proposer must specify pricing.

3. Islands at gated lanes must not be poured until stub ups and anchor bolts are properly placed and any conflicts with installation at particular lane location are resolved

4. Durable vandal and weather resistant cabinets, which are able to maintain finish, look, integrity and functionality in the environment in which installed for a period of ten years.
a. Mounting holes accessible only from inside of cabinets. b. Hinged cabinet doors that swing clear of bollards, walls, columns and any other obstructions.

5. Modular internal components, to extent practical, for easy maintenance and replacement.

6. Corrosion resistant connection boxes for all wiring connections.

7. Control logic and communication capability as necessary and required herein.

8. Compatible communication ports for all communications and connections.

9. Crystal controlled time clock/calendar that is updated at least once daily by CMS and accurate to one minute per ninety days for all primary components.

C. Fiber Optic (F/O) Cabling: Use fiber optic communications wiring for all Ethernet runs longer than 300 fee in accordance with the following:

1. Provide surge protection devices at both ends of all non-fiber optic communication wiring longer than 25 feet.

2. Include pull boxes as shown on the drawings or per industry standards.

3. Provide and install multimode 62.5 / 125um plenum rated optic cable or of quality required to provide communication and data transfer in underground conduit.

4. Provide a detailed parts list showing number and manufacturer, for all fiber backbone material. (F/O cable, Terminators, Patch Panels, Fiber Duplex Patch Cords, etc.)
23 5. Label all F/O components as per TIA/EIA-606. (Cables, Connectors, Hub facilities, Termination facilities, Conduits, and Pathways). All Drops are to be labeled.

6. Do not exceed minimum bend radius for all F/O cable.

7. Do not exceed allowable tensile rating for F/O cable during installation. If a winch or pulling machine is used, a dynometer must be used to monitor tension.

8. F/O testing and certification of all runs is a requirement, per industry standards.

Written test results of each test must be submitted to City for review. a. End-to-End Attenuation testing.
b. Optic Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) testing.

D. Future Upgrades: The proposed PARCS must have the ability to add hardware devices in the future without a major upgrade to the hardware or software within 7years from the date of acceptance. If Proposer anticipates a major within 7 years, specify pricing in price form.

8. CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (CMS)
A. User Interface:

1. Capable of operating across City’s Local Area Network (LAN), accessible, with proper user ID and password, to all authorized users’ workstations with installed CMS software modules on City’s LAN.

2. Windows version 7 or later.

3. Provide field programmable functions of each device from CMS (password protected), including rate structures (from CMS only), with any and all programming changes reported in daily log.

4. Maintain a secure connection while active, and automatically log-off after programmable period of inactivity.

5. Remote access to CMS over standard TCP/IP connection (may use web browserbased applications).

6. Browser-based user-interface modules utilize client/server technology or equivalent. The following general requirements apply to all components or modules:
a. Windows-based graphical user interface.
b. Allow for both standard and custom report formats.
c. Adequate security to allow for different classifications of users.

B. Computer System:

1. Provide and install server/host computer in a lockable rack, off the ground and protected from dust and debris.
24 2. Provide CMS servers, task computers, workstations and all ancillary equipment with sufficient power, capacity and communication bandwidth to meet functional performance demands of PARCS software without loss of responsiveness to user input or slowing of any end node device or workstation.

3. Provide a minimum of 5 separate workstations with monitor, keyboard, processor and printer.

4. Provide minimum of 5 licenses and software for remote access to CMS on existing computers provided by City.

5. Meet performance recommendations of software vendor and accommodate for growth and expansion as specified herein without any specified function being slowed or delayed by performance of any other function or task.

6. System back up in less than three hours.

7. Report generation at a minimum of 35 pages per minute.

C. Data Storage:

1. Reside and operate on an ANSI SQL-compliant relational database server product.

2. Incorporate integrity controls to enforce three types of integrity:
a. Entity integrity ensures no duplicate keys within a table and all non-null tables are populated.
b. Relational integrity ensures no orphan keys, that all transactions properly deleted children entities, and properly modified adult references. c. Domain integrity ensures all attribute value ranges are enforced.

3. All transaction records stored as actual data, not in report format.

4. Data shall be archived in a format readable by report generator.

5. On-line data storage capacity to store a minimum of 24 months of system data.

6. Archive data automatically every six months with first archive after first 18 months, so that server always has most recent 12 months of data. d. Be on industry standard media such as DLTs.
e. Archive or restore transaction database in less than one hour. f. Use redundant on-line storage such as Level 1 RAID Technology.

7. Either periodically or on demand, CMS downloads and sends electronically, revenue reports for integration into City's financial department via TCP/IP connection to designated computer network in Microsoft Excel or approved equivalent.

D. Licensing

1. Supply all required operating system and application software licenses in sufficient quantities to accommodate number of users and equipment in installed system.
25 E. Security

1. Utilize protocols and passwords that prevent unauthorized access to software and hardware and manipulation of data and reports, including individual transactions.

2. Include minimum of 4 levels of access authorization to all operational, administrative and reporting functions and provide the following security features:
a. Define individual user and group based security.
b. Ability to assign a unique user ID and password for each person authorized to use system.
c. Ability to establish an expiration period for passwords and periodically change that password for each authorized user ID.
d. Ability to disable a user ID following successive log-on failures exceeding a specific limit.
e. Ability to view and report user and group level security rights and create user-defined fields.
f. Ability to de-activate codes for former users and internal and external customers.

3. Password protected CMS subsystems to restrict access to individual functions of each subsystem:
a. Revenue Control System Monitoring, Control and Reporting. b. Access Control System Monitoring, Control, and Reporting. c. Occupancy Monitoring and Reporting.
d. Equipment Monitoring and Reporting.
e. Ad-Hoc Report Generator.

F. Occupancy Monitoring: Provide the following functions.

1. Every vehicular entry and exit lane serves as a counting location, equipped with vehicle detection devices.
a. Each entering vehicle subtracts a count of one from number of available spaces.
b. Each exiting vehicle adds a count of one to number of available spaces. c. Provide directional logic (e.g. a vehicle entering through an entrance lane or through an exit lane is counted as an inbound vehicle).

2. Track and display the number of available parking spaces on computer monitor(s).

3. Provide anti-coincidence packages to accurately monitor entering and exiting vehicles that occur simultaneously.

4. Provide two programmable thresholds for each parking area:
26 a. One threshold to trigger "full status". When full status is reached count system operates in one of two modes, selectable by user.

I) Mode one signals an alarm and relies on human intervention to activate appropriate dynamic signs and gate status changes.

II) Mode two automatically activates appropriate dynamic signs and gate status changes but allows for manual overriding of "full status". b. Second threshold triggers "open status". The two operating modes described above also apply to “open status” threshold.

5. Ability to automatically disable ticket dispensers when facility is full, but allows for manual override.

6. Ability to activate any and all electronic signs, individually controlling each facility or zone within a facility, including "FULL" signs and lane control lights provided by PARCS Contractor, as well as "FULL" or capacity signs provided by others.

7. Ability to maintain and display separate counts for each facility or zone within a facility, each with total occupancy or spaces available, total RCS and ACS occupancy and total RCS and ACS spaces available.

8. Ability to maintain and report for each entry and exit lane:
a. Non-resettable counters tracking monthly, transient and total parking patron usage.
b. Counts of illegal/opposite direction entry/exit for each lane. c. Vends, vehicle detector and gate counts.

9. Ability to store lane, facility and zone counts at hourly intervals in daily files for specialized reports to analyze lot utilization and activity levels.

10. Transaction Counts: Provide, display and compare separate counts related to each lane:
a. At entry lanes: Ticket dispenser count plus ACS count compares with directional lane count and gate count.
b. At exit lanes: Exit lane transactions plus ACS count compares with directional lane count and gate count.

11. Deliver data to existing signage system.

G. Equipment Monitoring: Provide the following functions.

1. Monitor operational status of all entry and exit lanes and POFs.

2. Warning alarms displayed and tracked through CMS for the following conditions:
a. Lane status; open or closed.
b. Gate failure.
c. Gate up.
d. Low-ticket supply.
27 e. Ticket in throat.
f. Illegal entry or exit (reverse direction through lane). g. Back-out ticket.
h. Ticket jam.
i. Vehicle detected in lane for 30 seconds without initiating transaction. j. Count status.
k. Passback violation.
l. POF tampering.
m. POF door status, open or closed.
n. POF receipt paper status.
o. POF note and coin vault status.

3. Visual and audible abnormal status alarms at each computer workstation.

4. When an alarm is turned off, visual and audible signals stop at all workstations.

5. A daily log report identifying all system alarms.

6. Monitor electrical circuits and frequency of operational errors in components to identify maintenance actions to prevent failure of a component.

9. REVENUE CONTROL SYSTEM (RCS):

A. CMS Interface: Provide the following functions in concert with the CMS.

1. Remote programming of POFs.

2. Testing of fee structure against existing facility usage statistics.

3. Uploading and consolidating reports from Exit Stations and POFs.

4. Retrieval and review of all transactions, based on user-defined parameters.

B. Reports: Provide the following reports which can be displayed on a monitor, printed on a printer, converted to an ASCII file and are sortable chronologically and by POF, shift or lane.

1. Daily Event Log - A listing of changes to system and users who made changes, including print communication messages, facility lane equipment alarms, remote gate opening, and system log on/offs.

2. Daily Transaction Report – A daily summary of all transactions processed at each POF and Exit Station, including entry time, exit time, transaction time, payment amount and type.

3. Field sortable entry lane counts (equipment “vend” for ENS, ACS, gate, activation loop, and closing loop counts).

4. Field sortable exit lane count totals (equipment "vend" for Exit Station, ACS, gate, activation loop, and closing loop counts).

5. Revenue Alarms Report – Provide report to include at a minimum remote gate vends and manual gate open counts.

6. Lane Volume Report - Provide entry and exit counts by date. This report is used for management planning and statistical information.
28 7. Duration of Stay Report - Provide duration of stay based on patrons' elapsed parking time and patron time of entry. This report is utilized in rate structure and facility usage analysis, management planning, statistical information, rate analysis, and revenue analysis.

8. Ticket Sequence Report – Provide a complete sequence of transactions related to individual tickets (i.e., information about how and when a ticket was issued tied to how and when fee was paid and ticket was processed).

9. Ticket Value Report - Provide ticket stratification based upon value of all transactions processed. Provide breakdowns for each rate structure. This report is used for revenue analysis, rate analysis, management planning, and statistical information.

10. Outstanding Ticket Report – Provide a listing of tickets that have been issued but are not yet processed at an exit. CMS receives data on each ACS transaction from ACS controller, adding it to transaction log and consolidating it into daily activity reports.

11. Back-out/Stolen Ticket List – Provide a chronological list of back-out tickets issued by ticket dispenser for selectable times.

C. Rate Structure:

1. A minimum of twenty completely different fee structures.

2. Each fee structure shall have the ability to program a minimum of forty fee increments.

3. Automatic adjustment for daylight saving time and leap year in fee calculations.

4. User defined maximums (12-hour, 24-hour, etc.)

5. Provide for:
a. Day, evening and night rates.
b. Weekend rates.
c. Flat rates.
d. Event rates.
e. Holiday rates.

6. User defined grace time parameters
a. Exit grace time.
b. Turnaround grace time.
c. Elapsed grace time – to allow for elapsed time from payment at a central location, retrieve vehicle and drive to exit lane.

7. Ability for City Staff to implement permanent or temporary rate changes remotely and independently. Rate changes shall be testable and easily return to base rate structure.

D. Credit and Debit Cards:

1. Accept the following types of card payments:
29 a. VISA.
b. MasterCard.
c. American Express.
d. Discover Card.
e. Bank Debit Cards with Credit Card logo.

2. Utilize credit and debit card acceptance hardware, software, and other system components that are compliant with all PA-DSS, FACTA and PCI rules, regulations and practices (including Visa/MasterCard’s CISP program, Discover’s DISC program, and American Express’s DSOP program). To accomplish this, the following is required:
(NOTE: If the City is the Merchant on Record, it is the City’s responsibility to complete the tasks listed below. In such event, the City, its Parking Operator and the selected Proposer will cooperate to ensure these tasks are completed. If the City is not the Merchant on Record, it is the Proposer’s responsibility) a. Verify the installation of anti-virus software, and malware monitoring tools. b. Install and manage hardware firewall device.
c. Use only approved dual-layer authentication remote management software. d. Configure password encryption and password management on Revenue Control computers. These are windows settings on the back-office Revenue Control host computer to be set up by the installation vendor.

3. Complete development of interface with City’s merchant account provider TransFirst, or third party gateway processor Six Card Solutions. The City prefers a solution that does not require utilizing a third party gateway processor for credit cards.

4. Provide EMV (Europay/MasterCard/VISA) and NFC (Near field Communications) capable credit card processing, so that no devices or software need to be replaced for EMV or NFC acceptance when appropriate/available in this region.

5. Configure system such that information from each credit card transaction is transmitted to a server in direct communication with authorizing clearinghouse via DSL, T1, or similar connection to provide on-line real time approvals for each transaction.

6. Maximum authorization time from patron confirmation to clearinghouse authorization is nine (9) seconds.

7. Confirm and provide record formats required by City’s financial institution.

8. Print receipts with a signature line only when amount is greater than a minimum fee, established by City, or if credit card information was entered manually.

9. If communication is down, process credit cards in batch mode, per PCI guidelines and protocols.

E. Cloud-Based Validation System

1. Ability to validate tickets via any web-enabled device. 30 2. Patrons with a validated ticket bypass and insert validated ticket at Exit Station.

3. Allow up to 999 validation accounts to be programed within CMS. Each account to include a unique account number and allow validations based on use, time or dollar value.

4. Allow all validations to be reported and sortable by time, date, origin, and use.

5. Software tracks and stores user ID, ticket number and validation amount for billing purposes.

6. Validation billing software calculates and prepares monthly invoices.

7. Include system pricing and any on-going fees in price proposal. Proposer’s system shall not utilize per-transaction pricing.

10. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS):

A. CMS Interface:

1. Provide an on-line, computer-based access control system for those authorized by City to have access and egress at parking facilities without being processed through a ticketed system, for example; a “monthly parker”.

2. Distributive, networked or centralized processing may be employed, so long as required multi-lane control features such as anti-passback, occupancy and activity tracking are maintained. Employ RFID readers and Proximity readers as specified herein for access for the following distinct user groups:
a. City or City-authorized vehicles requiring free and fast ingress and egress to parking facilities.
b. Monthly parkers who have a contractual agreement and/or will prepay or prearrange billing for parking on a monthly basis.
c. Frequent parkers, who prepay or prearrange billing and are charged for parking at fees equal to, or discounted from public parking fees. Includes:

I) Smart cards with a prepaid balance that delineates at each use II) Cards that are pre-encoded for a specific number of uses, dates of use or other parameter.

III) Automatic credit card billing after each use.
d. City of Santa Monica transit cards.
e. Big Blue Bus monthly and debit cards.

3. Individually recognize and process up to ten-thousand (10,000) ACS users at all reader locations.

4. Have at least sixteen (16) preprogrammed access levels capable of being changed without reprogramming of ACS.

5. Provide anti-passback control. With this feature, users enter and exit in proper sequence (i.e., entry, exit, entry, exit, etc.).
a. Selectable option to allow either "hard" (out of sequence user is rejected and an alarm is generated at ACS controller and CMS) or "soft" mode (out of sequence user is allowed access but reported.)
31 b. In both hard and soft modes, each out of sequence event is reported as an exception transaction in daily ACS access log.
c. Password protected "resynchronization" of all users to one access before return to anti-passback control.

6. Link users to each other to allow one entity to be identified with and/or pay for a group of users. Provide up to one-hundred (100) such ACS groups.

7. Ability to group ACS cards and limit access to a preset maximum number of cars in facility at any given time, and/or allow and track overages to be invoiced separately.

8. Nesting feature:
a. Ability to require parkers that are assigned to park in a specific level (nest area) to use ACS credential to enter and exit nest area in order to exit facility.
b. Required sequence: In facility, In nest, Out of nest, Out of facility.

9. Central ACS controller requirements:
a. Issue and reprogram ID devices.
b. Allow authorized supervisor to create, store, send and receive user programming from ACS readers. Password protected access to programming, with multiple levels of access, to any and all information regarding specific blocks and/or suites of cards.
c. Provide a data base for ACS management including the following:

I) Provide at least twenty (20) programmable record fields for each person issued an ACS credential and at least twelve (12) programmable record fields for each user’s vehicle(s). .

II) Allow specific parker record files to be retrieved, displayed and/or printed based on selectable criteria, such as current ACS status, access group, access level, and/or ID numbers (except data that is password protected).

III) Allow searching, sorting and printing of database by any field for routine and special forms such as invoices or mass-mailings.

IV) Consolidating and retaining data to allow for report generation. The following are minimum required reports, viewable on a workstation monitor and/or printable on demand:
a) Activity Usage Reports – Provide a chronological list of ACS usage, including date, time, credential, user type and location of entries and exits; capable of being sorted by any field. b) Count Reports – Monitor and report counts of ACS vehicles present on an hourly basis by group, access level.
c) Percentage of Occupancy – For selectable times during 24 hour period for all categories of ACS parkers.
32 d) In/Out Status Report: Shows status of all ACS cards at any given time, sortable by name/card #/status.
e) Active User Report – A listing of all active users that have access to the facility.
f) Activity Exceptions Report – A field-sortable listing of all activity exceptions to include at a minimum hard-passback, soft-passback, shared account, debit card, hotel quest pass and nesting violations.
g) User Changes Report – Provide report of changes to user accounts to include at a minimum debit card rate changes and status changes (e.g. card placed in neutral with no charges applied at exit).

V) The monthly software shall provide the operator with the capability, at a minimum, to perform the following on both cards and accounts:
a) Fully modify any field subject to restrictions on duplicate card and account numbers.
b) Copy the data from any field in a previously selected or created record into the same field on the current record with a combination of two keystrokes (limited by restrictions on duplicate entries).
c) Search for any record by criteria for any field, including the use of wild card characters and partial strings.
d) Display, sort and print a pre-formatted report of all accounts, or a group of accounts selected by query criteria entered for up to three (3) fields, with the option to sort data by account number or alphabetically by account name, at the option of the operator.

Report must include the account number, account name, and assigned card numbers, in card number sequence, listed under each account.
e) Display, sort and print a list of all cards in card number sequence and, at the option of the operator, to group those cards by status or account number.
f) Save a copy of the card and account tables as an archived “point in time” reference at any time by authorized manual prompt from an authorized workstation.
d. Capable of reporting the collection of fees from parkers on monthly prepayment, declining, decrementing, end of month billing, and/or credit card basis.
e. Monitor and report revenue associated with ACS system to CMS. Separate revenue by type of payment (prepayment, declining, decrementing, monthly billing and/or type of credit card) and indicate ACS ID device number(s), account number(s), and month(s) for which payment was received. 33 f. Provide for posting of payments and automatic lockout of ACS users within programmable grace period after expiration of a prepaid account. g. Invoicing Package
I) Include ACS ID device number(s), account number(s) and monthly rate associated for each ACS ID device being invoiced.

II) Provide a monthly report listing total number of ACS ID device numbers invoiced and total dollar amount invoiced.

III) Provide an “on-file” credit card billing interface to allow automated credit card billing for those electing that payment option.

IV) Provide password protected credit card file in compliance with credit card data security requirements of Payment Card Industry (PCI).

V) Include an Accounts Receivable package for all normal accounting functions associated with ACS revenue:
a) Invoice report.
b) Cash receipts journal.
c) Accounts receivable ledger with supporting subsidiary ledgers for each account.
d) Accounts receivable aging report for selectable time periods. e) Account history reports, indicating invoices and payments by customer.
f) General ledger, adjustment ledgers, general ledger interface for City or City Representative’s mainframe and all invoicing features included in invoicing package within paragraph describing Central ACS Controller.
h. Provide automatic on-line real-time monitoring of ACS usage with DVD/CD-ROM storage of transaction data for audit and analytic purposes. i. Monitor and report all alarm conditions to CMS.
j. Password protection and Daily Log reports for all administrative actions. k. AVI readers continue to track and record data if gates remain ‘up’.

B. CMS Readers and Credentials

1. Housed in a weather proof, harsh environment enclosure rated NEMA-3R or greater.

2. Operational Description
I) ACS reader identifies ACS credential device in lane and searches for authorization through ACS Controller. If authorized, a signal is sent to raise the gate.

II) Where ACS lanes are also equipped with Entry Stations or Exit Stations, activation of reader automatically disables dispenser/verifier.

Likewise, the initiation of a ticket entry/exit transaction automatically disables ACS.
34 3. Proximity Card System
a. Passive credential design capable of being read within 6 inches of reader b. Minimum accuracy of card reader: 99%.
c. Read and process credential within one second of presentation to reader. d. In combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, Ability to maintain processing rate of 500 transactions per hour for at least four continuous hours of operation, including normal patron delays.
e. Checking protocol that identifies multiple reads of same card within a few seconds (due to users “waving” card in front of reader), correcting false anti-passback reads.
f. Protection from common and/or local sources of interference - Unaffected by neighboring electronic systems or electronically controlled devices. g. When paired in-lane with any RCS device, card reader mounted to face plate of RCS device (ticket dispenser, exit validator, POF etc.). h. Provide proximity card with magnetic stripe functionality.

11. ENTRY, EXIT AND PAY ON FOOT STATIONS
A. Entry Station

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, issue time and date stamped ticket with:
a. Ticket number.
b. Rate code.
c. Machine/Lane number.
d. Time.
e. Date.
f. Facility/Facility Code.

2. Capable of operating while disconnected from CMS.

3. Color LCD screen.

4. Pinhole video camera.

5. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

6. Minimum capacity of 5,000 tickets with hands-only (no tools) ticket loading.

7. Independent ticket dispensing mechanism that is removable as a single unit.

8. Easily readable display screen message such as “Please Press Button for Ticket and “Please take ticket”.

9. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, in combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, including typical patron delays, of 400 transactions per hour for push button operation.

10. If a vehicle is detected for longer than 30 seconds without a transaction being initiated, an alarm is issued alerting the operator that a patron may require assistance.

11. Operational Descriptions:
35 a. for Normal RCS Patron Entry
I) Upon vehicle detection, send a signal to the ENS to issue a machine readable time and date encoded ticket automatically or at the push of a button by patron.

II) Upon removal of the ticket from ENS, send a signal to open the gate and send transaction data to CMS.

III) The use or detection of an ACS credential does not allow the above sequence to occur.
b. Back-out Ticket Taken: Ticket is removed from ENS and directional sequence is violated (i.e. vehicle backs out of entrance without entering) I) Sound an audible alarm at the CMS
II) Report ticket issued as an invalid back-out ticket and post to the daily transaction exception log
c. Back-out Ticket Not Taken: Ticket is left in the ENS and directional sequence is violated (i.e. vehicle backs out of entrance without entering) I) Abandoned ticket is ingested back into ENS, rendered invalid, and discarded into dedicated holding bin.

II) Event posted to daily transaction exception log.
d. Full Status
I) RCS manually or automatically disables ticket dispenser and CC reader at all Entry Stations when count system considers facility to be full.

II) Easily readable display screen and audio message such as “Sorry, the garage is full”.

III) RCS reactivates ticket dispenser when count drops below a programmable threshold.

IV) ACS patrons are allowed access even when ticket dispenser is disabled.

B. Exit Station

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, read ticket data to determine ticket validity, payment due and any encoded validation.

2. Color LCD screen.

3. Pinhole video camera.

4. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

5. Minimum capacity of 5,000 receipt tickets.

6. Provide audible instructions to patron during transaction process.

7. Include the following integrated components:
36 a. Processed ticket vault.
b. Easily readable display screen and audio message such as “Please Insert Ticket”.
c. Audio and visual instructions displayed to patrons.
d. Integrated intercom
e. Integrated credit card reader.
f. Integrated proximity card reader

8. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, including typical patron delays and in combination with gate and other in-lane equipment, of 400 transactions per hour.

9. Maximum elapsed time from insertion of validated ticket until gate opens is three seconds.

10. If a vehicle is detected for longer than 30 seconds without a transaction being initiated, an alarm is issued alerting the operator that a patron may require assistance.

11. Operational Description
a. Upon detection of a vehicle, the display screen audibly and visually prompts patron to insert ticket into Exit Station.
b. For fully paid or validated tickets, send signal to open gate and send data to CMS. Retract ticket into Exit Station and retain for audit purposes. c. For tickets that are not fully paid/validated or if grace period has expired, prompt patron to pay remaining fee via credit card, or park and proceed to a POF to pay with cash, or contact staff via intercom.
d. Offer receipt for payment with:

I) Transaction number.

II) Rate code.

III) Machine/Lane number.

IV) Entry time and date.

V) Time and date of payment.

VI) Parking fee.

VII) Amount paid, separating tax.

VIII) How paid (cash, CC or validation)
IX) Facility /Facility Code
e. Send signal to close gate after vehicle has passed closing vehicle sensor.

12. Send alarm to CMS if vehicle backs off sensor without completing transaction.

13. Information printed on processed tickets:
a. Entry time and date.
b. Exit time and date.
c. Parking fee.
d. Amount paid.
e. Transaction number.
37 f. Machine/Lane number.

C. Pay-on-Foot Stations (POF)

1. Independently and in concert with CMS, read ticket data to determine ticket validity, payment due and any encoded validation.

2. Upon receipt of payment, issue machine encoded ticket, with programmable grace period.

3. Provide concise instruction with pictograms where appropriate for user-friendly operation.

4. Provide clear, audible instructions to patron throughout transaction process.

5. Include high security lock system with appropriate alarm contacts for tampering.

6. Capable of maintaining a minimum processing rate, including typical patron delays, of 60 transactions per hour.

7. Color LCD screen.

8. Pinhole video camera.

9. Barcode reader for barcode and QR code validations.

10. Ability to recycle cash payments to support change fund.

11. Meet the latest ADA requirements without modification, including but not limited to reach ranges, visibility of display screens, clear floor or ground space, and operable parts.

12. Operational Description
a. Patron inserts ticket into POF.
b. For valid tickets, fee is displayed. Patron inserts cash or credit card and payment is processed. Change is returned to patron if needed or credit card transaction is processed.
c. Amount paid, transaction number and other data are printed on ticket in readable form and encoded on ticket. All data is sent to CMS. d. Patron is advised audibly and visually to take ticket and proceed to vehicular exit.
e. Receipts are issued only upon patron request for all transactions.

I) Transaction number.

II) Rate code.

III) Machine number.

IV) Entry time and date.

V) Time and date of payment.

VI) Parking fee.

VII) Amount paid, separating tax.

VIII) How paid (cash, CC or validation)
IX) Facility /Facility Code.
f. If POF cannot read ticket or it is otherwise identified as an exception transaction an alarm is sent to CMS, ticket is returned to patron, and a visual and audible message advises patron that transaction cannot be processed and to press intercom for assistance.
38 13. Information printed on processed tickets:
a. Entry time and date.
b. Exit time and date.
c. Parking fee.
d. Amount paid.
e. Transaction number.
f. Machine number.

12. BARRIER GATES
A. Provide an effective barrier (up to 15 feet in length) to vehicles entering or exiting facility. Include gate length options with pricing.

B. Raise and lower on a command signal.

C. Standard sized gate arms must open within 1.5 seconds. Oversized gate arms open in less than 5 seconds.

D. Closed gate arm height of approximately three feet.

E. Use articulating gate arms in areas of limited headroom.

F. Employ breakaway design that can be easily replaced when broken away from housing.

G. Provide safety edge and auto-raise upon contact with vehicle or person.

H. Incorporate in one housing all necessary components for functioning of unit.

I. Provide circuit breaker protected gate motor and components designed for heavy-duty use.

J. Provide corrosion resistant parts.

K. Provide gate controller that prevents damage when gate motion is blocked in any position and cannot be raised or lowered by force applied to gate arm.

L. Allow for adjustment of gate arm travel.

M. Provide mechanical counter to record lane travel totals.

N. Gate Controller features:

1. Microprocessor controlled over-the-network activation and communication for gate status and functions from CMS.

2. Separate momentary contact closures for each of the following counts:
39 a. ACS patrons
b. RCS patrons
c. Vehicle entries
d. Vehicle exits.

3. Directional logic with electronic outputs to alarms, counters and to report atypical lane activity to CMS.

4. Ability to store at least three vend inputs and sequentially process each vend.

5. Ability to test gate operability and controller programming on-site without use of special diagnostic equipment.

6. “AUTO-MANUAL” switch, and “ON-OFF” switch for gate.

7. Contains power supplies, dust-proof relays, and other circuit components to barrier gate.

8. Provide remote gate arm activation (with sufficient line of sight or CCTV camera coverage).

O. Barrier Gate Usage Restrictions:

1. Provide signage prohibiting pedestrians and motorcycles from utilizing barrier gate as a means of ingress or egress to facility.

2. Provide along approach route of automated gate and/or affixed to both sides of barrier gate arm.

3. Incorporate both text and graphics to convey hazards of not meeting this restriction.

13. VEHICLE DETECTORS:

A. Tailgating has been a problem. Incorporate/employ anti-tailgating logic, vehicle inductive profiling, and self-tuning technology such as/comparable to Reno DL-ATG series detector.

B. Maintain peak sensitivity regardless of temperature, rain or other environmental conditions.

C. Fit within entry and exit controllers, or gate housings, or in remote lane/ramp controller cabinet.

D. Detect vehicles that back out of lane resulting in a back-out or stolen ticket and report to CMS.

E. Provide indicator light on front panel indicating presence of vehicle.

F. Require no special tools or meters for adjustment following initial installation G. If tied to inductive loops, provide multiple loop tuning to prevent crosstalk or interference between loops in close proximity of each other. 40 H. Provide directional logic using “A-B” logic as follows:

1. Sensor “A” activates lane device for RCS or ACS operation.

2. Following RCS or ACS operation, gate raises.

3. Vehicle passes Sensor “B”, sending signal to lower gate. Count increases by one.

4. Sequence of Sensor provides directional logic.

5. Activation of Sensor “A” without Sensor activation at “B” results in an incomplete transaction and lowering of gate.

I. If using Inductive Loops:

1. Cut-into paving surface and filled with manufacturer’s approved sealant (see drawings).

2. Conduct preventative x-ray testing.

3. Be formed by three to four turns of 16-gauge THHN single-conductor wire.

4. No splices are permitted.

5. Contain loop leads:
a. Limited to a length of 100 feet.
b. Have a four-twist minimum per foot and located at a minimum of 18 inches from electrical power lines.
c. Be contained in separate conduit to prevent interference from electrical signals.

14. INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. Fully digital, microprocessor based, modular design utilizing VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol).

B. Programming server for all intercom features performed through networked workstation or from intercom master station.

C. Programmed configuration of intercom stations and system features stored in nonvolatile memory.

D. System includes all software and hardware required for programming system, including:

1. Individually programmable volume control for each intercom station.

2. Substations programmed to call intercom master station.

3. Call forwarding feature for individual stations or all stations to re-direct calls to another designated master station or substation.

4. Allow conferencing for an unlimited number of stations from master station.

5. Include ability to announce up to 50 pre-recorded messages at intercom stations, selectable based on programmed criteria, or manually.
41 6. Announced messages and audio input broadcasts may be interrupted only at affected intercom station during intercom calls and return automatically upon completion of call.

7. If master station is busy, system automatically announces pre-recorded message at calling station, when master station disconnects, another pre-recorded message directs station to re-initiate call.

E. Master station desktop model with LCD-Display (8 lines x 14 characters minimum) and gooseneck noise cancelling microphone designed for high-noise environment. Required features:

1. Provide full-duplex hands-free conversation with any other selected individual station or combination of stations in system.

2. Integrated amplifier and loudspeaker.

3. Connector and external noise cancelling headset.

4. Firmware/feature upgrades available via download through intercom server with no local modification on station required.

5. High sensitive microphone to provide clear conversation from a maximum range of at least 20 ft.

6. Minimum audio frequency range for audio components: 200-7000Hz.

7. Intercom station directory panel with direct access, pre-programmable function menus, selectable language, and adjustable display contrast.

8. “Handset function” enabling user to switch from loud-speaking, gooseneck microphone operation to handset mode.

F. Substation requirements:

1. Microphone, loudspeaker and in-use LED, all housed in one unit with configurable front pushbutton control.

2. “Press for Assistance” label.

3. DSP technology to provide full speaker/microphone supervision and fully adjustable (volume/timing threshold programmable via intercom server) audio monitoring.

4. Feature upgrades via download through intercom server with no local modifications required.

5. ADA compliant in regard to distances and volume.

15. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Responsible for final power connections to all equipment and must make all necessary communication connections from the islands and lanes to the central server.

2. Responsible for running all power and communication lines/conduit from identified junction boxes, panels or breaker boxes to all equipment, if needed.

3. Follow all national, state, county, and local regulations, as well as manufacturer’s installation requirements.
42 4. Business License: The selected Contractor must obtain a City of Santa Monica Business License prior to the commencement of work.

5. Obtain all required permits.

6. The Contractor must coordinate installation of the PARCS with Parking Operations. a. Weekly meetings with Parking Operations staff and the City’s parking operator will be required in order to review progress of the work as scheduled. b. Schedules of site work must be submitted in advance for approval. c. The Parking Facilities must remain operational at all times during installation. d. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure minimal interference to the general public.

7. Contractor shall coordinate installation and testing of equipment so the City may maintain continuous operation of existing system during installation of new PARCS.

8. Install PARCS in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved Shop Drawings.

9. Contractor is responsible for installation of all control and communication wiring, Contractor supplied equipment and its interfacing and interconnection with City supplied equipment. Contractor authorizes and/or accepts responsibility for application of power to equipment and initiation of operation and for running all initial diagnostics and system generation programs necessary to provide complete working system.

10. Contractor is responsible for all software and communications by all computers and peripheral devices.

11. Use fiber optic certified technicians for fiber optic installation and connections.

12. Provide dust and noise protection in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

13. Remove from site all existing parking equipment not to be reused or relocated, in conjunction with City’s approval.

14. Remove and replace curbs, paving and other construction as required for installation of PARCS.

15. Replace all device control and communications wiring in existing conduit to existing lanes and provide all additional communications wiring required for system architecture and design.

16. Maintain at least one entry lane and one exit lane open to public at all times.

17. Cut and patch concrete for all conduits added to existing islands or paving.

18. Repair damage to any and all surfaces disrupted during installation.

19. A representative from the City may observe installation process at any time.

20. Acceptance of Contractor's work will be determined by the Parking Administrator. a. Work shall be completed in a responsible manner in accordance with the terms of the Contract. Liquidated damages will apply for non-performance. b. All accidents and incidents must be reported to the City on the date of occurrence.

A written or electronic report shall be filed with the City.

16. ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Develop an Acceptance Testing Plan to demonstrate the functionality of the system.
43 1. Include demonstrations of compliance with specifications, contractual compliance, definitions of all test objectives, participant responsibilities, documentation of tests and procedures for dealing with failures during test.

2. Detail tests for every functional requirement of each entry lane, exit lane and POF. Include checklist for specified supplies, spare parts, training operation and training manuals.

3. Confirm that all specified features are provided and fully operational before Acceptance Testing.

4. Notify City in writing at least one week prior to each official test session. In the event that a test is not successful, correct noted deficiencies and advise City at least two days in advance, that test session is ready to resume.

5. City representative may witness tests.

6. Provide all test and diagnostic equipment including RCS and ACS credentials, currency, credit cards, stock items, and all consumables required for each test.

B. Passing Acceptance testing, even if performed in the presence of the City or City Representative, does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide a system in accordance with the Specifications.

C. Promptly correct all problems encountered at no cost to the City.

D. Lane Acceptance Test (LAT): Test all equipment and systems at each location to confirm that the components installed are fully operational as specified.

Substantial completion includes the following.

1. All PARCS equipment included in project or phase passed LAT.

2. All communications from equipment to CMS and workstations passed LAT.

3. All UPSs passed LAT

4. All electronic signage interfaces complete and passed LAT.

E. System Acceptance Test (SAT): Confirm that all the physical, operational and management features and capabilities of the individual lane components are present in the integrated system.

1. Before start of test, verify that:
a. The major subsystems and the entire PARCS are fully operational as an integrated system and operating properly.
b. All spare parts, stock items, and manuals are on site and approved. c. All training is complete to City’s satisfaction.
d. All test checklists and training evaluation forms have been submitted.

2. CMS produced all required reports and passed LAT.

3. Conduct interim SAT at the completion of each phase if phasing of the installation is required.

4. Maintain detailed records and a logbook of all SAT tests, events and issues to be provided to the City upon completion of the SAT.
44 F. Thirty-Day Operational Test and Final Acceptance
a. After Substantial Completion and opening of the facility, the City will conduct an operational test for thirty days.
b. Provide a qualified and experienced technician able to be on-site within one hour during the thirty day test.
c. Performance Standards:

I) All mechanical components are operational without downtime. For each downtime period of four hours, one day will be added to the test duration.

II) All electronic components are operational without downtime or programming problems for the complete monthly reporting cycle. For each down time period of one hour but less than eight hours or programming problems that delay report cycle, two days will be added to the test duration.

III) All reports correlate 100% with cash receipts.

17. TRAINING
A. Develop and implement a comprehensive training program for City personnel, including a minimum of 30 hours of initial training prior to go-live date, and a minimum of 15 hours of refresher training within thirty days after system acceptance.

B. Design the curriculum so that each group is trained in the full repertoire of system commands that they may have to use in course of performing designated functions, such as proper use of all parking system equipment, database management and report generation software, supervisor functions and capabilities, basic maintenance and repair functions, and the use of audit functions.

C. Schedule training no more than two weeks prior to use of equipment.

D. Include lectures, visual presentations, hands-on operation of equipment and any materials necessary to perform job. Provide each trainee with a complete set of training materials and operating manuals during training session, to be kept for use on job at completion of training.

18. REPORTS
Below are the minimum revenue reports required for the new PARCS. The PARCS must be able to generate/query reports which can be set by the parking operator and management users. Please include samples and/or screen shots of all reports in Proposals. All reports must be available upon installation without additional cost to City of Santa Monica as “custom report” creation. The equipment needs to be able to provide a management-user the ability to perform queries generate report within defined time frames, days of week, break down by hour and facility etc… 45 1. Daily device revenue report

2. Daily lane report

3. Active access card holder report

4. Card transaction report by date

5. Credit card report
 By Credit Card type
 By Lot
 By Device

6. Validation report

7. Non resettable totals
 Cash report
 Transaction report
 Validation report

8. Count statistics report

9. Duration of stay report with ability to breakdown by 30-minute increments

10. Entry/exit report by facility and parker type

11. Parking Fee Report

12. Average Occupancy Report , break down by hour

13. Number of Vehicles Parked, break down by hour

14. Average Length of Stay (tickets elapsed time average) Report

15. General Totals Report

16. Daily Revenue Report

17. Transaction Report

18. Revenue Alarm Report

19. Outstanding Ticket Report

20. Detailed activity reports on sales inventory, and statistical data by parker type

21. Rate stratification report
46 SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION
A. Performance Bond: After the contract award to the Proposer, a $750,000 performance bond will be required as a security to the project completion and the performance of the service contract.

B. Liquidated Damages: Non-performance by the Contractor will cause damage to the City by undermining the City’s ability to manage its parking resources and generate revenue for the City’s General Fund. For the purpose of computing damages under the provisions of the Contract, City shall assess and /or deduct from payment due, or to become due, the following amounts as liquidated damages:

1. Failure to respond within four (4) hours for any service or software programming calls: Reimbursement of average revenue loss (based on hourly rate value of the tickets) for the period of time beyond four hours, plus $500 per occurrence.

2. Failure to submit complete, accurate reports and invoices in the specified format:

Non-payment of invoice until submission of an accurate and appropriately formatted invoice is received.

3. Failure to provide required parts, software, supplies or other components within five (5) business days: $500 per day, per occurrence.

4. If, during the performance of their duties, any employee of the Contractor is found to possess or be under the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs or to be under the influence of any prescription drug which could impair the employee’s ability: $500 per employee, per occurrence.

C. Hold Harmless
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Proposer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless, the City, its board and council members, officers, employees, agents and volunteers (“Indemnitees”), through legal counsel reasonable acceptable to City, from any and all Losses arising out of or relating to any of the following: (i) performance or nonperformance of the Contract by Contractor or its Contractors of any tier; (ii) activities of the Contractor or its Contractors, of any tier; (iii) the payment or nonpayment by the Contractor or any of its Contractors, of any tier; and (iv) any personal injury, property damage or economic loss to third persons associated with the performance or nonperformance by the Contractor or its Contractors, of any tier.

However, nothing contained in this provision shall be construed as obligating the Contractor to indemnify any Indemnitee for Losses resulting from the Indemnitee’s sole or active negligence or wrongful misconduct. Contractor shall take steps to assure that a right indemnification is included in all subcontracting agreements.

D. Termination

1. Termination for Cause: The City may terminate the Contract in whole or in part, and from time to time, whenever the City determines that the Contractor is; 47 a. Defaulting in performance or is not complying with any provision of the Contract;
b. Endangering the performance of the Contract;
c. Failing to make satisfactory progress in the prosecution of the Contract; d. Persistent and repeated failure by Contractor regarding any obligation under terms of the Contract.

Prior to a termination for cause, the City shall send the Contractor written notice specifying the cause. The notice will give the Contractor at least thirty (30) days from the date the notice is issued to cure the default or make progress satisfactory to the City in curing the default, unless a different time is given in the notice. If the City determines that default contributes to the curtailment of an essential service or poses an immediate threat to life, health or property, the City may terminate the Contract immediately upon issuing oral or written notice to the Contractor without any prior notice or opportunity to cure. In addition to any other remedies provided by law or the Contract, the Contractor must compensate the City for additional costs that would be incurred by the City, whether the costs are actually incurred or not, to obtain substitute performance.

Any termination for cause must be considered a termination for convenience as of the date the Contractor was advised of the termination for cause, if it is determined that there was no cause.

2. Termination for Convenience
The City may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, for convenience upon written notice to the Contractor. The termination is effective thirty (30) days after the notice is issued, unless a different time is given in the notice. The City is liable only for payment for acceptable performance and all reasonable costs of installation of the PARCS prior to the effective date of the termination and for all reasonable costs resulting from said Termination for Convenience as set forth in the Contract. Payment, to the extent of cost substantiation and schedule, shall be set forth in the Contract.

E. Insurance Requirements:

Please see Exhibit A for Insurance Requirements
F. Payment Terms
Proposers must specify the first ninety percent (90%) of the payment terms in proposal.

The City will withhold payment of the final ten (10%) until all functions have been performed without problems or glitches for a continuous period of ninety (90) days prior to release of the final payment. If there are any problems, operational dissatisfaction, and/or glitches before the completion of the ninety (90) - day period, the count of days will restart with day one (1) until a full ninety (90)-day cycle is completed without problems in order to release the final payment. 48 G. Pricing

1. Proposers must provide purchase and installation price breakdown by each unit and each location in a spreadsheet, with pricing summary. Pricing shall include all hardware, software, servers, computers, Cloud Based Validations, training, and all other contents listed in this RFP.

2. ISD may supply servers and/or computers. Accordingly, please provide the savings/deduction amount from the overall purchase pricing for consideration.

This does not preclude Proposer from factoring in the price of loading proprietary equipment.

3. All pricing in Proposals will be used to set the beginning point of negotiation. All final negotiated prices will be stated in the executed purchase agreement upon City of Santa Monica City Council approval.

4. All prices included in a Proposal shall be filled in ink or typed and must give actual cost of each product in line item price; lump sum discounts will not be accepted. Proposals that are incomplete, conditional, or unclear may be rejected as incomplete

5. Include 9.5% state sales tax in price proposal.

6. Pricing will be in effect for a period of two years.

7. Proposals must consist of itemized pricing for each piece of equipment and software module, as well as shipping, installation, training, and any other services being proposed. In addition, proposals must include the cost to remove equipment currently in place at the Parking Facilities.

8. The cost of upgrades to correct problems or deficiencies is the responsibility of the Proposer.

H. Interpretations and Addendums
Nothing stated or discussed orally during any Q&A, interview or other session shall alter, modify, or change the requirements of the RFP. Only interpretations, explanations, or clarifications of this RFP that are incorporated into a written Addendum to this RFP issued by City should be considered by Proposers. All Addendums will be distributed to each person that requests a copy of all Addendums to this RFP, but it shall be the responsibility of the Proposers to make inquiries as to the Addendums issued. All such Addendums shall become a part of this RFP, and all Proposers shall be bound by such Addendums. Each Addendum issued will be on file in the City of Santa Monica, Parking Operations. Each Proposer must acknowledge its receipt of all Addendums by submitting an acknowledgement letter with its Proposal.

I. Ambiguity, Conflict, or Other Errors in the RFP

1. If a Proposer discovers any ambiguity, conflict, discrepancy, omission, or other error in this RFP, it shall immediately notify the City of such error in writing and request modification or clarification of the document. The City will make modifications by issuing a written Addendum.
49 2. Proposers are responsible for clarifying any ambiguity, conflict, discrepancy, omission, or other error in this RFP prior to submitting a Proposal, or any such request shall not be accepted.

3. The terms selected vendor, proposer or contractor may be used interchangeably in this RFP.

4. Implied Requirements: Products and services that are not specifically requested in this RFP, but which are necessary to provide the functional capabilities proposed by the Proposer, shall be included in the proposal.

J. Information Provided by City
Information included in or provided with this RFP is provided solely for the convenience of the Proposers. NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND IS MADE BY THE CITY AS TO THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THE INFORMATION INCLUDED IN OR PROVIDED WITH THIS RFP.

Proposers are solely responsible for conducting such independent due diligence investigations as may be necessary for the proper preparation of Proposal. The City and its employees, agents and advisors are not responsible for the completeness or accuracy of any information distributed or made available, orally or in writing, during this RFP process.

K. Cancellation or Modification of Solicitation and Rejection of Any and All Proposals

1. The City reserves the right to withdraw this RFP at any time and for any reason and to issue such clarifications, modifications, and/or Addendums, as it may deem appropriate. If there is any disagreement or discrepancy between this RFP and any supplement or Addendum, the most recent supplement or Addendum shall govern. The City reserves the right to waive minor irregularities in proposals, provided that such action is in the best interest of City. Any such waiver shall not modify any remaining RFP requirements or excuse the Proposer from full compliance with the RFP specifications and other contract requirements if the Proposer is awarded the Contract.

2. The City reserves the right, after reviewing the Proposals, to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any informality in the Proposals, and to invite those qualified for further negotiation in the second phase of the selection process. The City shall reject the proposal of any Proposer that is determined to be non-responsive.

However, the City reserves the right to request clarifications or corrections to proposals. The unreasonable failure of a Proposer to promptly supply information in connection with such a request may be grounds for a determination of nonresponsibility.

3. Receipt of a Proposal by the City or submission of a Proposal to the City confers no rights upon the Proposer, nor does it obligate the City in any manner. The City reserves at its sole discretion, the right to determine which Proposers are qualified to submit Proposals.
50 L. Acceptance of Proposals
The City shall review all proposals that are submitted properly. However, the City reserves the right to request clarifications or corrections to proposals. For Proposals to be reviewed, the submitting firm must be in good financial standing with the City and be current on all licenses and contractual requirements, if any, with the City.

M. Conducting Investigations/Requesting Supplementary Information The City reserves the right to conduct investigations with respect to the qualifications, experience and representations of the Proposer and Proposer associates and to require Proposers to supplement, clarify, or provide additional information in order for City to evaluate the Proposal submitted. Each Proposer team member, through its request for and receipt of this RFP and participation in this RFP, consents to such investigations.

N. Ownership and Disclosure

1. Proposals received in response to this RFP will be maintained by the, Parking Operations and, by California State Law, are matters of public record and subject to public inspection except for the time reserved for review by the Parking Operations and its evaluation committee. To the extent allowed by applicable law, the City will not disclose Proposal contents during the period falling between the Proposal Submission and the date of the Notice of Intent to Award the project.

However, all information, except noted as confidential, submitted by Proposers becomes a matter of public record upon Notice of Intent to Award the project and as required by Applicable Law.

2. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Proposers recognize and agree that neither the City nor its staff, agents, employees, representatives, nor its advisors shall be responsible or liable in any manner for any losses that a Proposer or any of its agents, employees, or representatives may suffer from the disclosure of information or materials to third parties or any other claims or damages resulting from this RFP process.

3. All Proposals (other than portions thereof subject to confidentiality, patent or copyright protection) will become the property of the City to the fullest extent permissible under applicable law upon submission. Regardless of the outcome of this RFP process, the City, in accordance with all applicable laws, reserves the right to use all information, documents, data, concepts, and other items contained therein, for its own purposes in any manner it elects to do so without further cost to the City.

O. Confidentiality
Information submitted to the City by Proposers is subject to possible compulsory disclosure by the City upon request from a member of the public, under the California Public Records Act, Government Code Section 6250, and et seq. The City recognizes some information required by the RFP process may be considered confidential by the 51 Proposer. The City will protect the confidentiality of materials submitted to it to the extent permitted by applicable law. Materials which Proposers wish to be treated as confidential must be clearly marked as “CONFIDENTIAL”. The City will not voluntarily disclose material so marked to persons other than those involved in the evaluation process.

P. Validity of Proposals
All Proposals shall be valid for a period of 180 days from the date the Proposals are due. If Contractors so wish, their Proposal may remain valid for the term of any resulting Contract to allow any agency or department of City or the State of California to negotiate Contracts for services. Contractors should state how many days or months Proposals would remain valid beyond the 180 days minimum.

Q. Costs and Expenses of Proposers
The City accepts no liability under any circumstances for any costs or expenses incurred by Proposers in acquiring, clarifying, or responding to any condition, request, or standard contained in this RFP. Each Proposer that participates in this RFP process does so at its own expense and risk and agrees that City shall not reimburse any costs incurred during this process. Further, each Proposer shall indemnify and hold harmless City from and against any claims for such reimbursement (including any costs and/or attorney’s fees) made, directly or indirectly, by or on behalf of such Proposer. Costs for developing any Proposal shall be the sole responsibility and shall be incurred at the sole risk of the Proposer, whether or not any award results from this solicitation. The City will not be responsible for any such costs or expenses incurred by Proposers under any circumstances.

R. Proposal Protest Procedure
Any objection by a Proposer to the procedures or processes in relation to this RFP process shall be submitted to the City, in writing, not more than seven (7) days prior to the Proposal due date for receipt of Proposals. Failure by a Proposer to so object shall constitute a final and conclusive waiver by the Proposer of its right to thereafter assert such objection at any other time or for any purpose.

Subject to the paragraph above, any Proposer may dispute the City’s determinations made as part of the prequalification process by filing a protest provided that each and all of the following are complied with the City’s bid protest procedures:

Protestant may file a written protest with the City’s Purchasing Services Manager no more than five (5) calendar days following the posting of award recommendation on the City’s online portal website. The written protest must set forth, in detail, all grounds for the protest, including without limitation all facts, supporting documentation, legal authorities and arguments in support of the grounds for the protest. All factual contentions must be supported by competent, admissible and credible evidence. Any 52 matters not set forth in the written protest shall be deemed waived. Any protest not conforming to this procedure shall be rejected as invalid. The protest must include the name, address, and telephone number of the person representing the protesting party.

The Purchasing Services Manager shall review the merits and timeliness of the protest and issue a written decision to the Protestant within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the protest. The decision of the Purchasing Services Manager may be appealed to the City Finance Director.

The Protestant may appeal the decision of the Purchasing Services Manager to the City Finance Director by filing a letter of appeal within ten (10) calendar days of the date of the Purchasing Services Manager’s decision. The letter of appeal should be addressed to the City Finance Director and shall set forth, in detail, all grounds for the appeal, including without limitation all facts, supporting documentation, legal authorities and arguments in support of the grounds for the appeal. All factual contentions must be supported by competent, admissible and credible evidence. Any matters not set forth in the letter of appeal shall be deemed waived. Any letter of appeal not conforming to this procedure shall be rejected as invalid.

The City Finance Director shall review the merits and timeliness of the letter of appeal and issue a written decision to the Protestant within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the letter of appeal. The decision of the City Finance Director is final. If he or she determines the protest is frivolous, the party originating the protest may be determined to be ineligible for future purchase orders/contracts.

The Finance Director shall have final authority to settle and resolve a protest. The procedure and time limits set forth herein are mandatory and are the protestant’s sole and exclusive remedy in the event of a protest. Failure by a party originating the protest to comply with these procedures shall constitute a waiver of any right to further pursue the protest, including filing a Government Claim or legal proceeding.

S. Examination of Documents
By submitting a Proposal, Proposer represents that it has thoroughly examined and become familiar with the work, products and content required by this RFP and that it is capable of performing quality work to achieve the City’s requirements.

T. Interpretations/Questions
Any person is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications, or finds discrepancies or omissions, may submit to the City a written request for interpretation.

The requesting party is responsible for prompt delivery of any requests. When the City considers interpretations necessary, interpretations will be in the form of a written document and will be distributed to all parties recorded by the City as having received proposal documents. Written questions must be submitted by 53 U. Right to Reject Proposals
The City reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any non-material irregularities or informalities in any Proposal, and to accept or reject any item or combination of items. The City reserves the right to withdraw this RFP at any time without prior notice, and the City makes no representations that any contract will be awarded to any proposer responding to this RFP.

V. Authorized Signatories
Persons signing any documentation in response to this RFP on behalf of a Proposer must be authorized signers with the requisite authority to represent their firm and to enter into binding contracts with clients.

W. Public Records Act
All statements of qualifications/proposals will be public records subject to disclosure under the California Public Records Act after the selection process is completed.

X. Non Discrimination
The firm represents and agrees that it does not and will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, medical condition, sex, sexual orientation and/or gender identity, national origin, political affiliation or opinion, or pregnancy or pregnancy-related condition and will comply with City’s Non Discrimination Policy. Proposer must review and fully comply with the policy. A NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT is also required. See Exhibit G Y. Oaks Initiative
Under the provisions of the City of Santa Monica Taxpayer Protection Amendment of 2000 ("Taxpayer Protection Act"), the selected Vendor will be considered a "recipient of a public benefit." Under the Taxpayer Protection Act, City public officials who approve this Contract are prohibited from receiving gifts, campaign contributions or employment from Vendor for a specified time. This prohibition extends to individuals and entities that are specified and identified in the Taxpayer Protection Act and includes Vendor and its trustees, directors, partners, corporate officers and those with more than a 10% equity, participation, or revenue interest in Vendor. Vendor understands and agrees that: (A) Vendor is aware of the Taxpayer Protection Act; (B) If selected, Vendor will complete and return the forms shown in Exhibit C in order to identify all of the recipients of a public benefit specified in the Taxpayer Protection Act; and (C) Vendor will not make any prohibited gift, campaign contribution or offer of employment to any public official who approved this Contract. See Exhibit B 54 Z. Living Wage Ordinance
The City has adopted a Living Wage Ordinance, which requires the payment of a specified minimum wage for work done pursuant to certain services contracts with the City. If selected, Vendor will complete and return the forms in order to verify Vendor’s business practices conform to the terms of this Living Wage Ordinance. See Exhibit C AA. Arizona Disclosure
The City has adopted a policy that requires a review of all current and likely future agreements and contracts with Arizona-based businesses to examine the feasibility of acquiring such products and services elsewhere while the Arizona law remains in effect.

See Exhibit D
BB. Notice of Award
The City will inform all Proposers of its intent to award a Contract to the selected Proposer in writing upon City Council approval.

CC. Other Information for Proposal Submittals: Proposers are welcome to submit any additional information, functions and/or attachments with their Proposal. It will enhance the competitiveness of the proposer in the RFP process. All information must relate to and benefit the project and/or its ongoing operations. 55 Exhibit A: Insurance Requirements
Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property that may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder and the results of that work by the Contractor, its agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors.

Minimum Scope/Limits of Insurance

1. Commercial General Liability (CGL): Insurance Services Office Form CG 00 01 covering GCL on an “occurrence” basis, including products-completed operations and personal & advertising injury, with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit.

2. Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office Form CA 00 01 covering Code 1 (any auto), or if the Contractor has no owned autos, Code 8 (hired) and Code 9 (non-owned), with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage.

3. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance: Workers’ Compensation insurance as required by the State of California and Employer’s Liability Insurance with limits of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury or disease.

If the Contractor maintains higher limits than the minimums shown above, the City of Santa Monica requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits maintained by the Contractor.

Other Insurance Provisions

1. The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
a. Additional Insured Status (CGL policy): The City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured on the CGL policy with respect to liability arising out of work or operations performed by or on behalf of Contractor including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations. The additional insured status can be provided in the form of an endorsement at least as broad as Insurance Services Office Form CG 20 10, 11 85 or both CG 20 10 and CG 20 37. b. Primary Coverage (all policies): For any claims related to this contract, the Contractor’s insurance shall be primary as respects the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City of Santa Monica, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it.
c. Notice of Cancellation (all policies): Each insurance policy required herein shall state that coverage shall not be cancelled except after notice has been given to the City of Santa Monica. d. Waiver of Subrogation (all policies): Contractor hereby grants to the City of Santa Monica a waiver of any right of subrogation which any insurer of said Contractor may acquire against the City of Santa Monica by virtue of payment of any loss. Contractor agrees to obtain any endorsement that may be necessary to effect this waiver of subrogation, but this provision applies 56 regardless of whether or not the City of Santa Monica has received the a waiver of subrogation endorsement from the insurer.

The Workers’ Compensation policy shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Santa Monica for all work performed by the Contractor, his employees, agents and subcontractors.

Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions
Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the City of Santa Monica.

The City of Santa Monica may require the Contractor to reduce or eliminate the deductible or retention applicable to the contracted work or provide satisfactory proof of ability to pay losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses within the retention.

Acceptability of Insurers
Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current a current A.M. Best rating of no less than A:VII, unless otherwise acceptable to the City of Santa Monica.

Verification of Coverage
Contractor shall furnish the City of Santa Monica with original certificates and amendatory endorsements or copies of the applicable policy language providing the insurance coverage required herein. All certificates and endorsements are to be received and approved by the City of Santa Monica before work commences. However, failure to obtain required documents prior to the work beginning shall not waive the Contractor’s obligation to provide them. The City of Santa Monica reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, including the endorsements required herein, at any time.

Failure to Maintain Insurance Coverage
If Contractor, for any reason, fails to maintain insurance coverage which is required pursuant to this Agreement, the same shall be deemed a material breach of contract. The City of Santa Monica, at its sole option, may terminate this Agreement and obtain damages from the Contractor resulting from said breach.

Alternatively, City of Santa Monica may purchase such coverage (but has no special obligation to do so), and without further notice to the Contractor, the City may deduct from sums due to the Contractor any premium costs advanced by the City for such insurance.

Subcontractors
Contractor shall require and verify that all subcontractors maintain insurance meeting all the requirements stated herein.
57 Exhibit B: Oaks Initiative Notice

CITY OF SANTA MONICA

NOTICE TO APPLICANTS, BIDDERS, PROPOSERS

AND OTHERS SEEKING DISCRETIONARY PERMITS, CONTRACTS, OR OTHER

BENEFITS FROM THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Santa Monica’s voters adopted a City Charter Amendment commonly known as the Oaks Initiative. It prohibits a public official from receiving specified personal benefits from a person or entity after the official votes, or otherwise takes official action, to award a “public benefit” to that person or entity. Examples of a “public benefit” include public contracts to provide goods or services worth more than $25,000 or a land use approval worth more than $25,000.

The Oaks Initiative requires the City to provide this note and information about the Initiative’s requirements. An information sheet on the Oaks Initiative is attached. You may obtain a full copy of the Initiative’s text from the City Clerk.

In order to facilitate compliance with the requirements of the Oaks Initiative, the City compiles and maintains certain information. That information includes the name of any person who is seeking a “public benefit.” If the “public benefit” is sought by an entity, rather than an individual person, the information includes the name of every: (a) trustee, (b) director, (c) partner, (d) officers, or (e) ten percent interest in the entity. Therefore, if you are seeking a “public benefit” covered by the Oaks Initiative, you must supply that information on the attached form (Attachment A).
58 City of Santa Monica
Oaks Initiative Disclosure Form
All persons or entities receiving public benefits defined below from the City of Santa Monica shall provide the names of trustees, directors, partners and officers and names of those with more than a 10% equity, participation or revenue interest. This information is required by City Charter Article XXII— Taxpayer Protection.

Name of Entity: ____________________________________________ NAME(S) OF PERSONS OR ENTITIES RECEIVING PUBLIC BENEFIT:

NAME(S) OF TRUSTEES, DIRECTORS, PARTNERS, AND OFFICERS:

NAME(S) OF THOSE WITH MORE THAN A 10% EQUITY, PARTICIPATION OR REVENUE INTEREST:

Public benefits include:

1. Personal services contracts in excess of $25,000 over any 12-month period;

2. Sale of material, equipment or supplies to the City in excess of $25,000 over a 12-month period;

3. Purchase, sale or lease of real property to or from the City in excess of $25,000 over a 12-month period;

4. Non-competitive franchise awards with gross revenue of $50,000 or more in any 12-month period;

5. Land use variance, special use permit, or other exception to an established land use plan, where the decision has a value in excess of $25,000;

6. Tax “abatement, exception, or benefit” of a value in excess of $5,000 in any 12-month period; or

7. Payment of “cash or specie” of a net value to the recipient of $10,000 in any 12-month period.

Prepared by: ________________________ Signature: _____________________ Date: ________________________ Title: _____________________ FOR CITY USE ONLY:

Bid/PO/Contract # _________________________ Permit # ___________________________ (1/06)
59 Exhibit C - Living Wage Ordinance

CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Living Wage Ordinance
Certification for Providers of Services to the
City of Santa Monica
(Fiscal Year 13/14 – July 1, 2013 through June 30, 2014)

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL CONTRACTORS PROVIDING SERVICES TO THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA IN EXCESS OF $54,200
The City of Santa Monica Municipal Code Chapter 4.65, Living Wage Ordinance (LWO) establishes a Minimum Wage of $14.08 per hour1for certain employees of contractors providing services to the City where services exceed $54,200 and requires that contractors also provide the same health care and other benefits to employees’ same sex spouses and domestic partners as are provided to other employees’ spouses.

An employee covered by the LWO is any person who does not actually work as a manager, supervisor, or confidential employee, and who is not required to possess an occupational license.

Contractors with collective bargaining agreements covering those employees assigned to contract are exempt from the wage requirements of the Living Wage Ordinance only if the waiver is explicitly set forth in such agreement in clear and unambiguous terms.

Please prepare the following certification if you are a contractor engaging in a contract for services with the City of Santa Monica in excess of $54,200.

Your signature on this certification grants the City permission to review any and all payroll books and records and any company documents pertaining to the benefits offered to employees to assure your compliance with the LWO during the term of the contract.

Please direct any questions and send the completed, signed Certification to:

City of Santa Monica Finance Department
Attention: Living Wage Compliance Section
1717 4th Street, Suite 250
Santa Monica, CA 90401
You can also contact staff regarding living wage ordinance questions by e-mail at [email protected] or by phone 310-458-8281.
60 CITY OF SANTA MONICA
Living Wage Ordinance Certification
July 1, 2013 through June 30, 2014

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL CONTRACTORS PROVIDING SERVICES TO THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA IN EXCESS OF $54,200
MINIMUM WAGE - $14.08 per hour
Please read, complete, and sign the following:

THIS CONTRACT IS SUBJECT TO THE LIVING WAGE ORDINANCE.

THIS CONTRACT IS NOT SUBJECT TO THE LIVING WAGE ORDINANCE.

If this contract is not subject to the Living Wage Ordinance requirements, please note reason below and attach supporting documentation for exemption. For example, in order to be exempt pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement, a signed collective bargaining agreement must be attached. (a) ________ contractor is a government agency and is exempt (b) ________ contractor is a City grantee and is exempt (c) ________ contractor is a non-profit corporation and is exempt (d) ________ contractor is an employer whose employees are covered by a bona fide collective bargaining agreement where the waiver is explicitly set forth in an agreement in clear and unambiguous terms
(e) ________ contractor is a corporation providing banking services The undersigned, on behalf of himself or herself individually and on behalf of his or her business or organization, hereby certifies that he or she is fully aware of Santa Monica’s Living Wage Ordinance (LWO), and the applicability of the LWO, and the applicability of the subject contract, as determined herein. The undersigned further agrees to be bound by all of the terms of the LWO, as mandated in all sections of Santa Monica Municipal Code, Chapter 4.65. If, at any time during the term of the contract, the answers to the questions posed herein change so that Contractor would be subject to the LWO, Contractor will promptly notify the Director of Finance in writing.

Contractor further understands and agrees that the failure to comply with the LWO, this certification, or the terms of the Contract as it applies to the LWO shall constitute a default of the Contract, which shall be grounds for termination. City shall have the right to examine all books and records of the contractor as they relate to compliance with the LWO. Payroll records shall at a minimum include full name of each employee performing labor or providing services under the contract, job classification and rate of pay.

These statements are made under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California.

Printed Name: Title:

Signature: Date:

Contractor:

Bid Number:

Service Description:
61 Exhibit D - Arizona Disclosure
NOTICE:

City Policy on Doing Business with Arizona Firms

CITY OF SANTA MONICA

NOTICE TO APPLICANTS, BIDDERS, PROPOSERS AND OTHERS SEEKING TO DO

BUSINESS WITH THE CITY OF SANTA MONICA
The City Council of the City of Santa Monica adopted Resolution No. 10479 (CCS) on May 25, 2010, which requires a review of all current and likely future agreements and contracts with Arizona-based businesses to examine the feasibility of acquiring such products and services elsewhere while the Arizona law remains in effect.

Additionally, vendors offering goods or services to the City of Santa Monica must complete and sign the attached disclosure form; this applies to all solicitations, including but not limited to, bids and proposals. Please review, sign and submit the form with your bid packet prior to the closing date of bid.

Contractors that do not have headquarters in the State of Arizona and those that will not be working with Arizona-headquartered subcontractors to provide goods and/or services as specified in this solicitation will take priority in the bidding process.

NOTE: Headquarter location or residency may not be considered as a factor if prohibited by applicable law.

Failure to return this form or inability to certify as to its provisions will render your bid or proposal non-responsive.

State of Arizona Disclosure Form - see next page.
62 City of Santa Monica
State of Arizona Disclosure Form

TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL VENDORS PROVIDING GOODS AND SERVICES TO THE CITY

OF SANTA MONICA
Headquarter location or residency may not be considered as a factor if prohibited by applicable law.

Please check the appropriate boxes below.

Our company’s headquarters are located in the State of Arizona.

Yes No
Goods or services pertaining to this solicitation will be provided by a subcontractor whose business is headquartered in the State of Arizona.

Yes No
If the response to the statement above was “yes”, please list any and all subcontractors headquartered in the State of Arizona that may be providing goods or services (pertaining to this solicitation) to the City of Santa Monica.

If more than one, attach a list of additional subcontractors, including the physical address of each location.

Name of Subcontractor:

Street Address:

City: State: Zip Code:
*** PORTION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED BY ALL VENDORS ***
***************************************************************************************** I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct.

Signed: Date:

Printed name: Title:

Name of Company:

Street Address of Headquarters:

City: State: Zip Code:

Telephone # (including area code): Email:

FOR CITY USE ONLY:

Bid/PO/Contract # _________________________ Permit # ____________ 63 Exhibit E – Locations List

CITY OF SANTA MONICA PARCS LOCATIONS
Facility Name Street Address Spaces
Lanes
In
Lanes
Out POFs
Downtown Parking Structure 1 1234 4th Street 338 1 2 3
Downtown Parking Structure 2 1235 2nd Street 647 1 2 3
Downtown Parking Structure 3 1320 4th Street 339 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 4 1321 2nd Street 652 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 5 1431 4th Street 665 1 2 4
Downtown Parking Structure 6 1431 2nd Street 775 2 3 4
Downtown Parking Structure 7 1526 4th Street 820 1 4 6
Downtown Parking Structure 8 215 Colorado Avenue 1,041 2 4 7 Downtown Parking Structure 9 1136 4th Street 294 1 1 1
Santa Monica Main Public Library
601 Santa Monica
Boulevard 525 2 2 0
Civic Center Parking Structure
(“CCPS”) 333 Civic Center Drive 744 2 2 2
Civic Auditorium Parking Lot (CAPL) 1855 Main Street 1,009 3 2 3 Pier Deck Parking Lot
West End Colorado
Avenue 284 1 1 2
KEC Parking Structure 1527 4th Street 116 1 1 1
64 Exhibit F – Equipment List
Spare Parts
Each equipment system is unique in design and therefore each will have different internal components.

Proposers must provide itemized pricing for spare parts in the template below. Proposers must determine the type and quantity of spare parts that are essential for maintaining the PARCS and the most common spare parts that are not covered by warranty or a maintenance contract. Specific pricing inquiries are listed below. Spare parts are not part of the initial installation purchase. Pricing is for future parts order and evaluation consideration. Pricing will be hold accountable for minimum of two years. Any anticipation of price adjustment, Proposer must indicate in proposal.

Spare Parts
Description Unit MSRP Unit
Proposal
Cost
Gate Arms
Bracket or bolts component for gate arms
Bills acceptors
Ticket Printer Heads (Pay on Foot machines
or lanes)
Ticket Validator (in addition to Cloud Based
Validation Program)
Color LCD Screen (Pay on Foot machines and
lanes)
Coins Acceptor
RFID keycard
HID Proximity keycard
HID Proximity with magnetic stripe keycard
Magnetic stripe keycard for Cash Debit Card

CITY OF SANTA MONICA PARCS

REQUIRED PARCS EQUIPMENT
TOTAL
QTY
Downtown
Structure 1
Downtown
Structure 2
Downtown
Structure 3
Downtown
Structure 4
Downtown
Structure 5
Downtown
Structure 6
Downtown
Structure 7
Downtown
Structure 8
Downtown
Structure 9
Public
Library
Civic
Parking
Structure
Civic Aud.

Lot
Pier Deck
Lot
KEC
Parking
Structure
Entry Station w/Ticket Spitter, Prox Card Reader, Barcode Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom. 18 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 1 Exit Station w/CC Reader, Prox Card Reader, Barcode
Reader, Pinhole Camera, Intercom. 28 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 1 2 2 2 1 1 POF Station (Cash, Credit Card) w/Barcode Reader,
Pinhole Camera, Intercom 35 2 2 2 2 2 4 6 7 1 0 2 2 2 1 POF Station (Credit Card Only) w/Barcode Reader,
Pinhole Camera, Intercom 9 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
POF Shelter 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 1 0
Barrier Gate w/Ground Loops 48 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 6 2 4 3 4 2 2 Intercom Master Station 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Intercom Sub-Master Station 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Protective Bollard 148 8 8 8 8 7 15 17 21 6 8 8 24 6 4
Redundant System Server 1
PARCS Software (workstations licenses) 5 5
Credit Card Software and Server 2 2 Validation System 7 ACS Software 1 Complete Workstation (Hardware & Software) 5 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 0 TOTAL 316 17 17 18 18 30 29 34 44 0 18 13 37 13 9
65 Exhibit G – Non-Collusion Affidavit and Non-Discrimination Policy

NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO ACCOMPANY

PROPOSALS OR BIDS
STATE OF CALIFORNIA }
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES }
, being first duly sworn, deposes, and says: that She/He is:

(Insert “Sole Owner,” “A Partner”, “President,” “Secretary,” or other proper title) of
(Insert name of bidder)
Who submits herewith to the City of Santa Monica the attached proposal; that He, She, It, or They is (are) the person(s) whose name(s) is (are) (strike out words not appropriate) signed to the hereto attached proposal; that said proposal is genuine; that the same is not sham or collusive; that all statements of fact therein are true; that such proposal was not made in the interest or on behalf of any person, partnership, company, association, organization or corporation not therein named or disclosed.

Affiant further deposes and says: that the bidder has not directly or indirectly by agreement, communication or conference with anyone attempted to induce action prejudicial to the interests of the public body which is to award the contract or of any other bidder, or anyone else interested in the proposed contract; that the bidder has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure for himself, herself, itself, or themselves, an advantage over any other bidder.

Affiant further deposes and says that prior to the public opening and reading of bids the said bidder:
(a) Did not, directly or indirectly, induce or solicit anyone else to submit a false or sham bid; (b) Did not, directly or indirectly, collude, conspire, connive or agree with anyone else that said bidder or anyone else would submit a false or sham bid, or that anyone should refrain from bidding or withdraw his bid;
(c) Did not, in any manner, directly or indirectly, seek by agreement, communication or conference with anyone to raise or fix any overhead, profit or cost element of his, her, its, their price, or of that of anyone else; and
(d) Did not, directly or indirectly, submit his, her, its, or their bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulge information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid, depository, or to any member or agent thereof, or to any individual or group of individuals, except to the awarding authority or to any person or persons who have a partnership or other financial interest with said bidder in his, her, its, or their business. (strike out words not appropriate)
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.

____________________________ _____________________________ Signature Name of Bidder
66 City of Santa Monica
Non Discrimination Policy
A. Discrimination.
(1) Discrimination in the provision of services may include, but not be limited to the following:
(a) Denying any person any service, or benefit or the availability of a facility. (b) Providing any service, or benefit to any person which is not equivalent, or in a non-equivalent manner or at a non-equivalent time, from that provided to others. (c) Subjecting any persons to segregation or separate treatment in any manner related to the receipt of any service.
(d) Restricting any person in any way in the enjoyment of any advantage or privilege enjoyed by others receiving any service or benefit.
(e) Treating any person differently from others in determining admission, enrollment, quota, eligibility, membership, or any other requirement or condition which persons must meet in order to be provided any service or benefit.
(2) Consultant shall take affirmative action to ensure that intended beneficiaries of this Agreement are provided services without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability.
(3) Consultant shall further establish and maintain written procedures under which any person applying for or receiving services hereunder, may seek resolution from Consultant of a complaint with respect to any alleged discrimination in the provision of services by Consultant's personnel.

At any time any person applies for services under this Agreement, he or she shall be advised by Consultant of these procedures. A copy of these procedures shall be posted by Consultant in a conspicuous place, available and open to the public, in each of Consultant's facilities where services are provided hereunder.

B. Non-discrimination in Employment.
(1) Consultant certifies and agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability in accordance with the requirements of City, State or Federal law. Consultant shall take affirmative action to ensure that qualified applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State and Federal law. Such shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation. (b) Selection for training, including apprenticeship.
(2) Consultant agrees to post in conspicuous places in each of Consultant's facilities providing services hereunder, available and open to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this non-discrimination policy.
67 (3) Consultant shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of Consultant, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State or Federal law. (4) Consultant shall send to each labor union or representative coworkers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice advising the labor union or workers' representative of Consultant's commitments under this non-discrimination policy. (5) Consultant certifies and agrees that it will deal with its subconsultants, bidders, or vendors without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, sex, age, sexual orientation, marital status, AIDS or disability, in accordance with the requirements of City, State and Federal law. (6) In accordance with applicable State and Federal law, Consultant shall allow duly authorized representatives of the County, State, and Federal government access to its employment records during regular business hours in order to verify compliance with this non-discrimination policy. Consultant shall provide other information and records as the representatives may require in order to verify compliance with this non-discrimination policy.
(7) If City finds that any of the provisions of this non-discrimination policy have been violated, the same shall constitute a material breach of agreement upon which City may determine to cancel, terminate, or suspend this Agreement. While City reserves the right to determine independently that this nondiscrimination policy has been violated, in addition, a determination by the California Fair Employment and Housing Commission or the Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Commission that Consultant has violated State or Federal non-discrimination laws shall constitute a finding by City that Consultant has violated the provisions of this non-discrimination policy. (8) The parties agree that in the event Consultant violates any of the non-discrimination policies set forth herein, City shall be entitled, at its option, to the sum of five hundred dollars ($500) pursuant to Civil Code Section 1671 as liquidated damages in lieu of canceling, terminating or suspending this Agreement. (9) Consultant hereby agrees that it will comply with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C. 794), all requirements imposed by applicable Federal Regulations, and all guidelines and interpretations issued pursuant thereto, to the end that no qualified disabled person shall, on the basis of disability, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity of the Consultant receiving Federal Financial Assistance.

Santa Monica City CouncilSeptember 30, 2025

Santa Monica City Council
September 30, 2025